3Com Switch 5104M FIB User Manual
®
CoreBuilder 5000  
®
Distributed Management Module  
Commands Guide  
Software Version v6.0  
http://www.3com.com/  
Part No. 10012823  
Published November 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCCI Class A Compliance  
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by  
Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio  
disturbance may arise When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions.  
Trademarks  
Unless otherwise indicated, 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may  
not be registered in other countries.  
3Com, the 3Com logo, CoreBuilder, LANsentry, ONsemble, PACE, and Transcend are registered trademarks  
of 3Com Corporation. ONline and TriChannel are trademarks of 3Com Corporation. 3Com Facts is a service  
mark of 3Com Corporation.  
Sun is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States  
and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company, Ltd.  
DEC and DEC net are registered trademarks of Compaq Computer Corporation.  
IPX and Novell are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.  
All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are  
associated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
ABOUT THIS GUIDE  
Introduction 13  
Audience 13  
How to Use This Guide 13  
Conventions 13  
Related Documents 14  
INTRODUCTION  
Management Command Conventions 1-1  
Management Commands 1-2  
MANAGEMENT COMMANDS  
?
2-2  
BOOTP 2-3  
CLEAR ATM 2-4  
CLEAR BOOTP 2-5  
CLEAR BPORT_LEC ELAN_NAME 2-6  
CLEAR BPORT_LEC LECS_ATM_ADDRESS 2-7  
CLEAR BPORT_LEC LES_ATM_ADDRESS 2-8  
CLEAR BRIDGE_PORT NAME 2-9  
CLEAR COMMUNITY 2-10  
CLEAR COUNTER 2-11  
CLEAR EVENT SCRIPT 2-13  
CLEAR GROUP 2-14  
CLEAR HOST 2-15  
CLEAR IP 2-16  
CLEAR IP ARP_CACHE 2-17  
CLEAR LOG 2-18  
CLEAR LOG MODULE EVENT_LOG 2-19  
CLEAR LOGIN 2-20  
CLEAR PROTOCOLS 2-21  
CLEAR RMON 2-22  
CLEAR SCHEDULE 2-23  
CLEAR SCRIPT 2-24  
CLEAR SECURITY AUTOLEARN 2-25  
CLEAR SECURITY INTRUDER_LIST 2-26  
CLEAR SECURITY PORT 2-27  
CLEAR TFTP RESULT 2-28  
CLEAR TR_SURROGATE 2-29  
CLEAR VBRIDGE 2-30  
CLEAR VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING 2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPY SCRIPT 2-32  
DOWNLOAD FROM_DEVICE 2-33  
DOWNLOAD IN_BAND 2-34  
DOWNLOAD OUT_OF_BAND 2-37  
LOGOUT 2-39  
MAINTAIN 2-40  
MONITOR 2-41  
PING 2-43  
RESET DEVICE 2-44  
RESET HUB 2-45  
RESET MASTERSHIP 2-46  
RESET MODULE 2-47  
REVERT 2-48  
RUN SCRIPT 2-49  
SAVE 2-50  
SET 2-52  
SET ALERT 2-53  
SET ATM ILMI 2-55  
SET ATM LEARP_QUIET_TIME 2-56  
SET ATM NEIGHBOR IF_NAME 2-57  
SET ATM NEIGHBOR IP_ADDRESS 2-58  
SET ATM NUM_LECS 2-59  
SET ATM NUM_VCCS 2-60  
SET ATM Q93B 2-61  
SET ATM QSAAL 2-63  
SET ATM SIGNAL 2-65  
SET ATM UNI_VERSION 2-66  
SET ATM VPI_VCI_BITS 2-67  
SET BOOTP MODULE 2-68  
SET BOOTP POWER_UP_MODE 2-69  
SET BOOTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS 2-70  
SET BPORT_LEC BUS_RATE_LIMIT 2-71  
SET BPORT_LEC CONFIG_MODE 2-72  
SET BPORT_LEC ELAN_NAME 2-73  
SET BPORT_LEC ELAN_TYPE 2-74  
SET BPORT_LEC FRAME 2-75  
SET BPORT_LEC LEC_DEFAULTS 2-76  
SET BPORT_LEC LECS_ATM_ADDRESS 2-77  
SET BPORT_LEC LES_ATM_ADDRESS 2-78  
SET BPORT_LEC LINK_TRAP 2-79  
SET BPORT_LEC MODE 2-80  
SET BPORT_LEC MAX_RETRY_COUNT 2-81  
SET BPORT_LEC TIME 2-82  
SET BPORT_LEC NUM_ELAN_VCCS 2-84  
SET BPORT_MAU ALERT_FILTER 2-85  
SET BPORT_MAU AUTO_NEGOTIATE 2-86  
SET BPORT_MAU AUTO_POLARITY 2-87  
SET BPORT_MAU CONFIGURATION 2-88  
SET BPORT_MAU DUPLEX_MODE 2-89  
SET BPORT_MAU HIGH_POWER 2-90  
SET BPORT_MAU LINK_INTEGRITY 2-91  
SET BPORT_MAU PACE_MODE 2-92  
SET BPORT_MAU MODE 2-93  
SET BPORT_MAU REMOTE_DIAGNOSTICS 2-95  
SET BPORT_MAU RESET_MODE 2-96  
SET BPORT_MAU SQUELCH 2-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET BRIDGE_PORT INTERFACE 2-98  
SET BRIDGE_PORT MONITOR 2-99  
SET BRIDGE_PORT NAME 2-100  
SET BRIDGE_PORT SMT 2-101  
SET BRIDGE_PORT STP BRIDGE_MODE 2-102  
SET BRIDGE_PORT STP PATH_COST 2-103  
SET BRIDGE_PORT STP PRIORITY 2-104  
SET BRIDGE_PORT VBRIDGE 2-105  
SET CLOCK 2-106  
SET COMMUNITY 2-107  
SET DEVICE CONTACT 2-108  
SET DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS 2-109  
SET DEVICE DIP_CONFIGURATION 2-110  
SET DEVICE LOCATION 2-111  
SET DEVICE MAC_ADDR_ORDER 2-112  
SET DEVICE NAME 2-113  
SET DEVICE RESET_MASTERSHIP 2-114  
SET DEVICE TRAP_RECEIVE 2-115  
SET GROUP MODE 2-116  
SET GROUP NAME 2-117  
SET GROUP NETWORK 2-118  
SET GROUP PORT 2-119  
SET HOST 2-120  
SET INVENTORY NOTEPAD 2-121  
SET IP ACTIVE_DEFAULT_GATEWAY 2-122  
SET IP DEFAULT_GATEWAY 2-123  
SET IP IP_ADDRESS 2-124  
SET IP SUBNET_MASK 2-126  
SET LOGIN 2-127  
SET MODULE ANALYZER 2-130  
SET MODULE ARP_RESOLVE_METHOD 2-131  
SET MODULE AUTOPARTITION_THRESHOLD 2-132  
SET MODULE BCN_THRESHOLD 2-133  
SET MODULE CABLE_IMPEDANCE 2-134  
SET MODULE CONNECTOR_NETWORK 2-135  
SET MODULE CROSSOVER 2-136  
SET MODULE DLM_MODE 2-137  
SET MODULE DOT5_GROUP 2-138  
SET MODULE EARLY_TOKEN_RELEASE 2-139  
SET MODULE EXTERNAL_WRAP 2-140  
SET MODULE FIFO_FILL_LEVEL 2-141  
SET MODULE HOST_STATISTICS 2-142  
SET MODULE IGMP_SNOOPING 2-143  
SET MODULE INTERFACE 2-144  
SET MODULE INTERNAL_WRAP 2-145  
SET MODULE LOCALLY_ADMINISTERED_ADDRESS 2-146  
SET MODULE LOW_LIGHT_WARNING 2-147  
SET MODULE MAC_ADDRESS_TYPE 2-148  
SET MODULE MAC_PATH 2-149  
SET MODULE MASTERSHIP_PRIORITY 2-150  
SET MODULE MAXIMUM_VBRIDGE 2-151  
SET MODULE MEMORY_MODEL 2-152  
SET MODULE MODULE_BYPASS 2-153  
SET MODULE MONITOR_CONTENTION 2-154  
SET MODULE NETWORK 2-155  
SET MODULE PER_ PORT_COUNTERS_ CONNECTOR 2-157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODULE PHY_AUTOMATIC_FAILOVER 2-158  
SET MODULE PHY_SELECTION 2-159  
SET MODULE PROBE_MODE 2-160  
SET MODULE RING_SPEED 2-161  
statistics group  
SET MODULE RMON_  
2-162  
SET MODULE RMON_GROUP 2-163  
SET MODULE SPEED_THRESHOLD 2-164  
SET MODULE SURROGATE_GROUP 2-165  
SET MODULE SYSTEM_ANALYZER 2-166  
SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING BCN_RECOVERY 2-167  
SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING MISMATCH_RESOLUTION 2-168  
SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING MODE 2-169  
SET NETWORK TOKEN_ RING PURGE_ON_INSERT 2-171  
SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING RING_SPEED 2-172  
SET PORT ACTIVE_CONNECTOR 2-173  
SET PORT ALERT_FILTER 2-174  
SET PORT AUTO_POLARITY 2-175  
SET PORT AUTOSENSE 2-176  
SET PORT COLLISION 2-177  
SET PORT FAN_OUT_MODE 2-178  
SET PORT FORCE_CONFIGURATION 2-179  
SET PORT HALF_STEP 2-180  
SET PORT HIGH_POWER 2-181  
SET PORT LINK_INTEGRITY 2-182  
SET PORT LOW_LIGHT_WARNING 2-183  
SET PORT MODE 2-184  
SET PORT MODE LOCAL/REMOTE 2-185  
SET PORT MODE REDUNDANT/NON_REDUNDANT 2-186  
SET PORT MODE DIAGNOSTICS 2-187  
SET PORT MODE REMOTE_FAILURE_SIGNALING 2-188  
SET PORT MODE SHUTDOWN 2-189  
SET PORT NETWORK 2-190  
SET PORT PERSONALITY 2-192  
SET PORT RECEIVE_JABBER 2-193  
SET PORT RING_SPEED 2-194  
SET PORT SPEED_DETECT 2-195  
SET PORT SQE_TEST 2-196  
SET PORT SQUELCH 2-197  
SET PORT STATIC_SWITCH 2-198  
SET PORT STATION_TYPE 2-199  
SET PORT TYPE 2-200  
SET POWER MODE 2-201  
SET POWER MODULE POWER_REQUIREMENTS 2-202  
SET POWER OVERHEAT_AUTO_POWER_DOWN MODE 2-203  
SET POWER SLOT CLASS 2-204  
SET POWER SLOT MODE 2-205  
SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING 2-206  
SET PROTOCOLS RATE_LIMIT_THRESHOLD 2-208  
SET PROTOCOLS TRANSLATION 2-209  
SET RMON ALARM 2-210  
SET RMON EVENT 2-212  
SET RMON HISTORY 2-213  
SET RMON HOST INTERFACE 2-214  
SET RMON MATRIX 2-215  
SET RMON STATISTICS 2-216  
SET RMON TOPN_HOSTS 2-217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET SCHEDULE 2-219  
SET SCHEDULE HOLIDAY 2-221  
SET SCHEDULE STARTUP_REPLAY_TIME 2-222  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKDAY 2-223  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKEND 2-224  
SET SCRIPT DELETE 2-225  
SET SCRIPT INSERT 2-226  
SET SCRIPT NAME 2-227  
SET SCRIPT OVERWRITE 2-228  
SET SCRIPT RUN_ON_EVENT 2-229  
SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN CAPTURE 2-230  
SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN DOWNLOAD 2-231  
SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN MAC_ADDRESS 2-233  
SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN MASK 2-234  
SET SECURITY PORT ACTION_ON_INTRUSION 2-235  
SET SECURITY PORT MAC_ADDRESS 2-236  
SET SECURITY PORT MODE 2-237  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED ADDRESS_TABLE ADDRESS 2-238  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED INTRUDER_TABLE DELETE 2-239  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK AUTOLEARNING 2-240  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK EAVESDROP_PROTECTION 2-241  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK INTRUDER_JAMMING 2-242  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK INTRUDER_PORT_DISABLING 2-243  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK INTRUDER_REPORTING 2-244  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK MODE 2-245  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK SOURCE_ADDRESS_CHECKING 2-246  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK SOURCE_PORT_CHECKING 2-247  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT AUTOLEARN 2-248  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT FAILSAFE 2-249  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT GROUP_CODE_(A,B) 2-250  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT INTRUDER_CHECKING 2-251  
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT JAMMING 2-252  
SET SONET CLOCK_SOURCE 2-253  
SET TERMINAL BAUD 2-254  
SET TERMINAL DATA_BITS 2-255  
SET TERMINAL HANGUP 2-256  
SET TERMINAL MODE 2-257  
SET TERMINAL PARITY 2-258  
SET TERMINAL PROMPT 2-259  
SET TERMINAL STOP_BITS 2-260  
SET TERMINAL TERMINAL_TYPE 2-261  
SET TERMINAL TIMEOUT 2-262  
SET TFTP FILE_NAME 2-263  
SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS 2-264  
SET TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATION 2-265  
SET TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATUS 2-266  
SET TR_SURROGATE REM_STATUS 2-267  
SET TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS 2-269  
SET TRUNK CABLE_MONITOR 2-270  
SET TRUNK COMPATIBILITY_MODE 2-271  
SET TRUNK EXTERNAL_BEACON_RECOVERY 2-272  
SET TRUNK MODE 2-273  
SET TRUNK NETWORK 2-274  
SET TRUNK NETWORK_MAP 2-275  
SET TRUNK STATIC_SWITCH 2-276  
SET VBRIDGE AFT AGING_TIME 2-277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET VBRIDGE AFT ALL 2-278  
SET VBRIDGE AFT BRIDGE_PORT 2-279  
SET VBRIDGE AFT MAC 2-281  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MODE 2-283  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING GROUP AGE_TIME 2-284  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING PORT AGE_TIME 2-285  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_INTERVAL 2-286  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY LISTEN_TIME 2-287  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY MODE 2-288  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY RESET_TO_DEFAULT 2-289  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORT 2-290  
SET VBRIDGE INTERFACE 2-291  
SET VBRIDGE NAME 2-292  
SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_FORWARD_DELAY 2-293  
SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_HELLO_TIME 2-294  
SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_MAX_AGE 2-295  
SET VBRIDGE STP MODE 2-296  
SET VBRIDGE STP PRIORITY 2-297  
SET VBRIDGE STP RESET_TO_DEFAULT 2-298  
SHOW ALERT 2-299  
SHOW ALERT BRIDGE_PORT 2-300  
SHOW ATM INTERFACE 2-301  
SHOW ATM ILMI_CONFIGURATION 2-302  
SHOW ATM Q93B 2-303  
SHOW ATM QSAAL 2-304  
SHOW ATM SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION 2-305  
SHOW ATM STATISTICS 2-306  
SHOW ATM TRAFFIC_DESCRIPTOR 2-307  
SHOW ATM VCC 2-308  
SHOW BACKPLANE_PATHS 2-309  
SHOW BOOTP 2-312  
SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION 2-313  
SHOW BPORT_LEC LEARP_TABLE 2-315  
SHOW BPORT_LEC SERVER_CIRCUITS 2-316  
SHOW BPORT_LEC STATISTICS 2-317  
SHOW BPORT_LEC STATUS 2-318  
SHOW BPORT_MAU 2-319  
SHOW BRIDGE_PORT 2-320  
SHOW CLOCK 2-321  
SHOW COMMUNITY 2-322  
SHOW COUNTER 2-323  
SHOW DEVICE 2-334  
SHOW DLM 2-335  
SHOW GROUP 2-336  
SHOW HOST 2-337  
SHOW HUB 2-338  
SHOW IGMP_SNOOPING 2-340  
SHOW INTERFACE 2-341  
SHOW INVENTORY 2-342  
SHOW IP 2-344  
SHOW LOG EVENT_LOG 2-346  
SHOW LOG MODULE EVENT_LOG 2-347  
SHOW LOG TRAP_LOG 2-348  
SHOW LOGIN 2-349  
SHOW MODULE 2-350  
SHOW NETWORK 2-354  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW PORT 2-358  
SHOW POWER 2-362  
SHOW PROTOCOLS 2-364  
SHOW RING_MAP 2-366  
SHOW RMON CONTROL 2-369  
SHOW RMON DISTRIBUTION ETHERNET DATA 2-371  
SHOW RMON HISTORY DATA 2-372  
SHOW RMON HOST DATA 2-374  
SHOW RMON MATRIX DATA 2-375  
SHOW RMON STATISTICS 2-376  
SHOW RMON TOPN_HOSTS DATA 2-377  
SHOW ROVING_ANALYSIS_PORT 2-378  
SHOW SCHEDULE 2-380  
SHOW SCRIPT 2-381  
SHOW SECURITY AUTOLEARN 2-382  
SHOW SECURITY ETHERNET_MAP 2-383  
SHOW SECURITY INTRUDER_LIST 2-384  
SHOW SECURITY PORT 2-385  
SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED ADDRESS_TABLE 2-386  
SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED INTRUDER_TABLE 2-387  
SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK 2-388  
SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT 2-389  
SHOW SECURITY ETHERNET_MAP 2-390  
SHOW SONET STATISTICS 2-391  
SHOW SONET STATUS 2-394  
SHOW TERMINAL 2-395  
SHOW TFTP 2-396  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATION 2-398  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATUS 2-400  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_ERROR_MAC_FRAME 2-401  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_ISOLATING 2-402  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_LAST_BEACON 2-403  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_LAST_SOFT_ERROR 2-405  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_SOFT_ERROR 2-407  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_STATUS 2-408  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_THRESHOLD_EXCD 2-409  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS 2-410  
SHOW TRUNK 2-412  
SHOW VBRIDGE AFT 2-413  
SHOW VBRIDGE CONFIGURATION 2-415  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING BRIDGE_PORT 2-416  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP 2-417  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP ALL 2-418  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP BRIDGE_PORT 2-419  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC 2-420  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC ALL 2-421  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORTS 2-422  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING STATUS 2-423  
TELNET 2-424  
UPLOAD IN_BAND DEVICE CONFIGURATION 2-425  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TECHNICAL SUPPORT  
Online Technical Services A-1  
Support from Your Network Supplier A-2  
Support from 3Com A-3  
Returning Products for Repair A-4  
3COM CORPORATION LIMITED WARRANTY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABOUT THIS GUIDE  
Introduction  
This guide describes the commands used to manage 3Com devices in the 3Com  
CoreBuilder® 5000 Integrated System Hub, using the CoreBuilder 5000  
Distributed Management Module (DMM) interface. Use this guide to find specific  
information about hub management commands available from the DMM  
command-line parser. Refer to the CoreBuilder 5000 Distributed Management  
Module User Guide for instructions on installing, configuring, and using the  
module.  
If the information in the release notes shipped with your product differs from the  
information in this guide, follow the release note instructions.  
Audience  
This guide is intended for the following people at your site:  
■
Network manager or administrator  
■
Trained hardware installer or service personnel  
How to Use This Guide  
Table 1 shows the location of specific information.  
How to Use This Guide  
Table 1  
If you are looking for  
Turn to  
An overview of the DMM command line parser  
Chapter 1  
A comprehensive list of commands available for managing hubs Chapter 2  
using the DMM command line interface  
Instructions for contacting the 3Com technical support  
Appendix A  
organization and for accessing other product support services  
Conventions  
Table 2 and Table 3 list conventions used throughout this guide.  
Graphic Conventions  
Table 2  
Icon  
Notice Type  
Alerts you to  
Information note Important features or instructions  
Caution  
Warning  
Risk of personal safety, system damage, or loss of data  
Risk of severe personal injury  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
14  
ABOUT THIS GUIDE  
Text Conventions  
Table 3  
Convention  
Description  
“Enter” vs. “Type”  
When the word “enter” is used in this guide, it means type something,  
then press the Return or Enter key. Do not press the Return or Enter key  
when an instruction simply says “type.”  
Text represented as  
screen display  
This typeface is used to represent displays that appear on your  
terminal screen. For example:  
NetLogin:  
Text represented as  
commands  
This typeface is used to represent commands that you enter. For  
example:  
SETDefault !0 -IP NETaddr = 0.0.0.0  
Italics  
Italics are used to denote new terms or emphasis. In command  
“Format” sections, italics denote variables for which you provide one of  
the allowed values.  
Related Documents  
This section provides information on supporting documentation, including:  
■
3Com Documents  
■
Reference Documents  
3Com Documents The following document provide additional information on 3Com products:  
■
CoreBuilder 5000 Quick Start and Reference Guide — Provides information on  
the installation, operation, and configuration of the CoreBuilder 5000 hub.  
This guide also describes the principle features of the CoreBuilder 5000  
Fault-Tolerant Controller Module.  
■
CoreBuilder 5000 Distributed Management Module User Guide — Provides  
information on the CoreBuilder 5000 Distributed Management Module’s  
operation, installation, and configuration. This guide also describes the  
software commands associated with the Distributed Management Module.  
For a complete list of 3Com documents, contact your 3Com representative.  
Reference Documents The following documents supply related background information:  
Case, J., Fedor, M., Scoffstall, M., and J. Davin, The Simple Network  
Management Protocol, RFC 1157, University of Tennessee at Knoxville,  
Performance Systems International and the MIT Laboratory for Computer Science,  
May 1990.  
Rose, M., and K. McCloghrie, Structure and Identification of Management  
Information for TCP/IP-based Internets, RFC 1155, Performance Systems  
International and Hughes LAN Systems, May 1990.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INTRODUCTION  
1
This chapter contains the following sections:  
■
Management Command Conventions  
Management Commands  
■
Management  
Command  
Conventions  
Table 4 describes the command conventions used in this document.  
Command Conventions  
Table 4  
Convention  
Definition and Example  
System Output  
Terminal Prompt  
User Defined Input  
Couriertypeface  
System prompt is shown as CB5000>  
Indicated by bold courier text  
Understanding You manage the CoreBuilder® 5000 Distributed Management Module (DMM) by  
Command Conventions entering commands at the management prompt on the terminal console, or  
remotely using TELNET. Commands are not case-sensitive (that is, you can use  
uppercase and lowercase characters with equal effect), with the exception of the  
SET COMMUNITY command.  
Using Terminal In addition to alphanumeric characters, terminal input for the DMM includes basic  
Keystrokes keyboard functions and control sequences. For example, you can correct typing  
mistakes by pressing the Delete key or the Backspace key. Pressing Enter in the  
middle of a command entry when an argument is expected causes the DMM to  
prompt you for additional information. Terminal keystrokes and their functions are  
outlined in Table 5.  
Keystroke Functions  
Table 5  
Keystroke  
Backspace  
Ctrl+C  
Function  
Moves the cursor back one character and deletes that character.  
Terminates the current command and returns to a blank command line at any  
time.  
Ctrl+D  
Ctrl+R  
Delete  
Enter  
Closes a TELNET session.  
Retypes the previous command string on the command line.  
Same as Backspace.  
Enters the command.  
spacebar  
?
Completes a command through command completion (refer to next section).  
Displays the available command options.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION  
Using the Command Command completion allows the DMM interface to accept abbreviated command  
Completion Feature input. When using command completion, you need only enter a minimum  
number of characters to distinguish the command from other acceptable choices  
and press Space to complete the command. For example, if you type:  
sa  
Press the spacebar and the command is completed as follows:  
save  
If the characters entered are not sufficient to determine a unique command, the  
DMM waits for more characters to be entered. For example, entering the letter s  
and pressing the spacebar is not sufficient for the DMM to determine which  
command to issue because commands other than SAVE start with the letter s (for  
example, SET, SHOW).  
Management  
Commands  
Chapter 2 provides an alphabetized list of Distributed Management Module  
(DMM) commands.  
Each description includes:  
■
■
■
One or more examples outlining the proper syntax for the command  
Parameter options  
Corresponding terminal responses  
Entering Management Enter management commands at the management prompt. By default, the  
Commands management prompt is CB5000>. Refer to the SET TERMINAL PROMPT  
command in Chapter 2 for information about customizing the default  
management prompt.  
Entering Parameters The DMM management software has an intelligent parser that recognizes  
modules.  
■
If you enter an invalid parameter for a module type:  
The parser backspaces over the invalid parameter.  
■
The DMM waits for you to complete the command line with a valid  
■
parameter.  
■
If you attempt to set a parameter to the same setting it is currently configured  
for:  
A message is displayed that reiterates the setting.  
■
The parser sends a Command abortedmessage.  
■
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MANAGEMENT COMMANDS  
2
This section provides an alphabetized list of CoreBuilder® 5000 Distributed  
Management Module (DMM) commands.  
Each description includes:  
■
■
■
Format for the command, including parameter options  
Examples, including corresponding terminal responses  
Related commands  
For information on CoreBuilder 5000 Switched FastModules, refer to the  
CoreBuilder 5000 FastModule User Guide.  
For information on CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModules, refer to the  
CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User Guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-2  
?
?
Use the ? command to list available command choices and parameter options.  
Format  
any command  
?
Example To view the available management commands, use the following command  
after you log in using the administrator password:  
CB5000> ?  
Possible completions:  
bootp  
clear  
copy  
download  
logout  
maintain  
monitor  
ping  
reset  
revert  
run  
save  
set  
show  
telnet  
upload  
The ? character does not appear on the screen after you enter it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BOOTP  
2-3  
BOOTP  
Use the BOOTP command to download configuration information from the  
bootptab file on a BootP server to a DMM. BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) is a UDP/  
IP-based protocol (User Datagram Protocol/Internet Protocol) that allows a device  
to configure itself dynamically without user intervention.  
Format  
bootp  
Example The following command initiates the BootP function on the DMM:  
CB5000> bootp  
Related Commands CLEAR BOOTP  
SET BOOTP MODULE  
SET BOOTP POWER_UP_MODE  
SET BOOTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
SHOW BOOTP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-4  
CLEAR ATM  
CLEAR ATM  
Use the CLEAR ATM command to clear the ATM’s if_Name (interface name) for  
the ATM-layer interface.  
Format  
name  
clear atm  
slot  
if_name  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation. slot (1 through 17) is the slot  
number.  
name  
Use up to 63 characters for the ifName.  
Example The following command clears the ATM if_name (Test) from the ATM module in  
slot 4.  
CB5000> clear atm 4 if_name Test  
Slot 04 parameter cleared.  
Related Commands SET ATM NEIGHBOR IF_NAME  
SHOW ATM INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR BOOTP  
2-5  
CLEAR BOOTP  
Use the CLEAR BOOTP command to clear current BootP settings.  
Format  
module  
result  
clear bootp  
module  
result  
Clears any setting made using the SET BOOTP MODULE  
command.  
Clears the result stored for the last BootP operation.  
Example The following command clears BootP configuration settings from the DMM:  
CB5000> clear bootp module  
BootP module configurations cleared.  
Related Commands BOOTP  
SET BOOTP MODULE  
SET BOOTP POWER_UP_MODE  
SET BOOTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
SHOW BOOTP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-6  
CLEAR BPORT_LEC ELAN_NAME  
CLEAR BPORT_LEC  
ELAN_NAME  
Use the CLEAR BPORT_LEC ELAN_NAME command to clear the name of the  
configured LAN (ELAN) associated with the LAN Emulation Client (LEC).  
The value of the ELAN name may or may not be taken into account by the LAN  
Emulation Configuration Server (LECS) and LAN Emulation Server (LES),  
depending on the policy configured on those servers.  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
clear bport_lec  
slot.lec  
elan_name  
name  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and lec for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
name  
Specifies the name (up to 63 characters) of the LAN associated with the  
LEC.  
Example The following command clears the name of the LEC in slot 4, port 1 to Main:  
CB5000> clear bport_lec 4.1 elan_name Main  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter cleared.  
Related Commands SET BPORT_LEC ELAN_NAME  
SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR BPORT_LEC LECS_ATM_ADDRESS  
2-7  
CLEAR BPORT_LEC  
LECS_ATM_ADDRESS  
Use the CLEAR BPORT_LEC LECS_ATM_ADDRESS command to clear the  
configured ATM address of the LAN Emulation Configuration Server (LECS).  
The ATM address is 20 hexadecimal numbers separated by periods. Each  
number can range from 0 to FF. However, the following addresses are illegal:  
■
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0  
■
FF. FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF. FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF. FF.FF. FF  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
clear bport_lec  
slot. lec  
lecs_atm_address  
ATM address  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
ATM address  
Specifies the ATM address of the LAN Emulation Configuration Server  
(LECS).  
Example The following command clears the ATM address of the LECS in slot 4, port 1:  
CB5000> clear bport_lec 4.1 lecs_atm_address  
39.99.99.99.ac.00.00.00.  
00.99.99.01.02.03.04.05.06.07.08.00  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter cleared.  
Related Commands SET BPORT_LEC LECS_ATM_ADDRESS  
SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-8  
CLEAR BPORT_LEC LES_ATM_ADDRESS  
CLEAR BPORT_LEC  
LES_ATM_ADDRESS  
Use the CLEAR BPORT_LEC LES_ATM_ADDRESS command to clear the  
configured LAN Emulation Server (LES) ATM address.  
The ATM address is 20 hexadecimal numbers separated by periods. Each  
number can range from 0 to FF. However, the following addresses are illegal:  
■
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0  
■
FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
clear bport_lec  
slot.lec  
les_atm_address  
ATM address  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
ATM address  
Specifies the ATM address of the LES.  
Example The following command clears the ATM address of the LES in slot 4, port 1:  
CB5000> clear bport_lec 4.1 les_atm_address 39.00.99.99.99.99.ac.  
00.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter cleared.  
Related Commands SET BPORT_LEC LES_ATM_ADDRESS  
SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR BRIDGE_PORT NAME  
2-9  
CLEAR BRIDGE_PORT  
NAME  
Use the CLEAR BRIDGE_PORT NAME command to clear a bridge port name.  
When you enter this command, you can specify one bridge port name or all  
bridge port names.  
Format  
slot.port  
name  
clear bridge_port  
name  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot is the slot number (1 through 17) and port is the port number. For  
example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Clears all bridge port names in a particular slot.  
name  
Specifies the name (up to 32 characters) you want to identify this port.  
Example The following command clears the name finance_1 to port 3 on the  
SwitchModule in slot 5:  
CB5000> clear bridge_port 5.3 name finance_1  
Related Command SET BRIDGE_PORT NAME  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-10  
CLEAR COMMUNITY  
CLEAR COMMUNITY  
Use the CLEAR COMMUNITY command to delete an entry from the community  
table. Community tables establish groups of stations that can exchange  
information with the DMM agent.  
Format  
clear community  
all  
1...10  
all  
Clears all community table entries.  
1...10  
Clears just the entry you specify. For example, if you enter CLEAR COMMUNITY  
2, the management hub clears community table entry #2. Use the SHOW  
COMMUNITY command to display a list of numbered entries.  
Example The following command clears community table entry #5:  
CB5000> clear community 5  
Community 5 cleared.  
Related Commands SET COMMUNITY  
SHOW COMMUNITY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR COUNTER 2-11  
CLEAR COUNTER  
Use the CLEAR COUNTER command to reset to zero DMM counters or a specific  
group of DMM counters.  
The CLEAR COUNTER command does not affect counters reported by SNMP,  
which are always stored as absolute values, as specified in the SNMP standard.  
Format  
clear counter  
aft  
bridge_port  
ethernet  
fddi_mac  
fddi_port  
slot.all  
slot.port  
all  
network  
ethernet  
1 or 2  
network  
network  
fast_ethernet  
interface  
igmp_snooping  
interface  
ip_fragmentation  
packet_channel  
module  
module  
peak_rates  
100BASE_X  
repeater  
network  
port  
module  
slot.port  
slot  
all  
rmon  
ring_station  
tr_mac_layer  
tr_promiscuous  
tr_source_routing  
token_ring  
network  
network  
slot.port  
Any of the active available backplane or isolated Ethernet or Fast  
Ethernet or Token Ring networks.  
Selects a port to clear counters for. slot is the slot number (slot 1  
through slot 17) and port is the port number (port 1 through port 4).  
For example, to specify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
module.slot  
Specifies the module and the slot number in the hub.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-12  
CLEAR COUNTER  
Example 1 The following command clears Ethernet counters on Ethernet network 1:  
CB5000> clear counter ethernet ethernet_1  
Ethernet Statistics for ETHERNET_1 cleared.  
Example 2 The following command clears repeater counters on port 3, Fast Ethernet  
network 1:  
CB5000> clear counter repeater fast_ethernet_1 port 3.1  
Repeater Statistics for Port 3.1 on FAST_ETHER_1 cleared.  
Related Command SHOW COUNTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CLEAR EVENT SCRIPT 2-13  
CLEAR EVENT SCRIPT  
Format  
Use the CLEAR EVENT SCRIPT command to clear assignments for scripts to run  
when a specified RMON event occurs.  
clear event  
all  
all  
script  
index  
index  
all  
Clears all script-to-event assignments.  
index  
Specifies the index number of the RMON event that triggers the script.  
Use the SHOW RMON EVENT CONTROL command to view events listed by  
index number. Use the SHOW EVENT command to view script-to-event  
assignments listed by index number.  
Example The following command clears the assignment of script 1 to RMON event 3:  
CB5000> clear event 3 script 1  
Event Index 3 cleared.  
Related Commands SET EVENT SCRIPT  
SHOW EVENT  
SHOW RMON EVENT CONTROL  
SHOW SCRIPT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-14  
CLEAR GROUP  
CLEAR GROUP  
Use the CLEAR GROUP command to remove all groups or individual groups  
from the indicated port.  
Format  
clear  
group  
port  
group number  
all  
group number  
port  
Removes the specified group from the port.  
Removes all the groups from the specified port (1 through 40)  
Example The following command clears the group from port 1:  
CB5000> clear group group1 1  
Related Command CLEAR COUNTER BRIDGE_PORT IGMP_SNOOPING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR HOST 2-15  
CLEAR HOST  
Use the CLEAR HOST command to clear a host entry name from the host table.  
Format  
clear host  
all  
all  
host number  
Removes all host table entries.  
host  
number  
Removes just the entry you specify. For example, if you enter CLEAR HOST 2,  
the DMM removes host table entry #2. Use the SHOW HOST command to  
display a list of numbered entries.  
host = 1...20  
Example The following command clears the first host name from the host table:  
CB5000> clear host 1  
Host 1 name cleared.  
Related Commands SET HOST  
SHOW HOST  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-16  
CLEAR IP  
CLEAR IP  
Use the CLEAR IP command to clear previously entered Internet Protocol (IP)  
information associated with one or all hub networks.  
Format  
clear ip  
all  
index  
all  
Clears all IP information stored on the DMM.  
index  
Specifies the index number for the network whose IP information you  
are clearing.  
Example The following command sequence clears the IP information for ETHERNET_2:  
CB5000> show ip  
Active Default Gateway : 151.104.25.1  
Index Network  
----- ------------- ---- -----------  
Slot IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
-----------  
Default Gateway  
---------------  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ETHERNET_2  
ETHERNET_3  
ETHERNET_4  
ETHERNET_5  
ETHERNET_6  
ETHERNET_7  
ETHERNET_8  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
151.104.25.120  
151.104.25.120  
151.104.25.120  
151.104.25.120  
151.104.25.120  
151.104.25.120  
151.104.25.120  
151.104.25.120  
127.0.0.1  
ff.ff.ff.00  
ff.ff.ff.00  
ff.ff.ff.00  
ff.ff.ff.00  
ff.ff.ff.00  
ff.ff.ff.00  
ff.ff.ff.00  
ff.ff.ff.00  
ff.00.00.00  
ff.00.00.00  
ff.ff.ff.00  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
151.104.25.1  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
TOKEN_RING_1 N/A  
9
10  
11  
ISOLATED  
ISOLATED  
ETHERNET_1  
1
15  
N/A  
127.0.0.1  
151.104.25.120  
CB5000> clear ip 1  
IP Address Table entry number 1 for network ETHERNET_2 cleared.  
Related Commands SET IP  
SHOW IP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR IP ARP_CACHE 2-17  
CLEAR IP ARP_CACHE  
Use the CLEAR IP ARP_CACHE command to clear the Address Resolution  
Protocol table when ring configuration changes are made. The ARP table entries  
time out if not updated within 20 minutes.  
You should clear the ARP table if you either:  
■
Change a station's IP configuration (for example, interfaces, IP address)  
Experience difficulty in communicating with a station  
■
After the table is cleared, the DMM relearns all stations' IP-to-MAC addresses  
when the next IP-based operation is established. The ARP table is then rebuilt  
with the new information.  
Format  
clear ip arp_cache  
Example The following command clears the DMM ARP cache:  
CB5000> clear ip arp_cache  
ARP Cache Flushed.  
Related Commands SET IP  
SHOW IP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-18  
CLEAR LOG  
CLEAR LOG  
Use the CLEAR LOG command to erase the information in the event or trap log.  
Format  
event_log  
trap_log  
clear log  
event_log  
trap_log  
Clears the DMM log of fatal system errors.  
Clears the DMM log of system messages.  
Example The following command clears the fatal system error log:  
CB5000> clear log event_log  
Event log is cleared.  
Related Commands SHOW LOG EVENT_LOG  
SHOW LOG TRAP_LOG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR LOG MODULE EVENT_LOG 2-19  
CLEAR LOG MODULE  
EVENT_LOG  
Use the CLEAR LOG MODULE EVENT_LOG command to erase the event_log  
information from the SwitchModule NVRAM.  
If you are running SwitchModule code Version v1.00, the following message is  
displayed: Module’s software version does not support this feature.  
This command supports only SwitchModule Version v1. 10 or later.  
Format  
slot  
event_log  
clear log  
module  
slot  
Specifies the slot number of the SwitchModule.  
Example The following command clears SwitchModule event log information from  
SwitchModule NVRAM:  
CB5000> clear log module 2 event_log  
Module 2 event log is cleared.  
Related Command SHOW LOG MODULE EVENT_LOG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-20  
CLEAR LOGIN  
CLEAR LOGIN  
Use the CLEAR LOGIN command to remove previously entered login names.  
The DMM lets you store up to 10 user names and passwords. These provide  
access to the management software.  
Format  
all  
clear login  
index  
all  
Removes all login names.  
index  
Removes just the entry you specify. For example, if you enter CLEAR  
LOGIN 2, the removes login entry #2. Use the SHOW LOGIN command to  
display a list of numbered entries.  
index = 1...10  
Example The following command clears the first login entry:  
CB5000> clear login 1  
Login 1 cleared.  
Related Commands SET LOGIN  
SHOW LOGIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR PROTOCOLS 2-21  
CLEAR PROTOCOLS  
Use the CLEAR PROTOCOLS command to remove a protocol filter from an  
CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule.  
Format  
dsap  
clear protocols  
slot.1  
type field  
enet  
snap  
slot.1  
dsap  
enet  
snap  
Identifies the SwitchModule that is affected by this command.  
Delete a filter for packets with the protocol type DSAP.  
Delete a filter for packets with the protocol type Ethernet.  
Delete a filter for packets with the protocol type SNAP (SubNetwork  
Access Protocol).  
type field  
Specifies the type field of the protocol filter you are deleting.  
Example The following command deletes the filter for Ethernet DECnet Phase IV packets  
from the protocol forwarding table:  
CB5000> clear protocols 4.1 enet 60-03  
Filter cleared.  
Related Commands SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING  
SHOW PROTOCOLS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-22  
CLEAR RMON  
CLEAR RMON  
Use the CLEAR RMON command to clear previously entered Ethernet RMON  
control tables.  
Format  
alarm  
all  
index  
clear rmon  
event  
history  
host  
matrix  
statistics  
topN_hosts  
ethernet  
all  
index  
all  
Clear all the RMON control table entries for the specified option  
(alarm, statistics).  
index  
Index number for the RMON control table entry for the specified  
option (alarm, statistics) you are clearing.  
Example The following command clears the first control table entry in the RMON alarm  
control table:  
CB5000> clear rmon alarm 1  
Alarm 1 cleared.  
Related Commands SET RMON  
SHOW RMON CONTROL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR SCHEDULE 2-23  
CLEAR SCHEDULE  
Use the CLEAR SCHEDULE command to remove a schedule entry from the  
schedule table.  
Format  
all  
clear schedule  
all  
schedule index  
Removes all schedule entries from the schedule table.  
schedule index Removes the schedule entry you specify. For example, if you enter CLEAR  
SCHEDULE 2, the DMM removes schedule #2 from the schedule table. Use  
the SHOW SCHEDULE command to display the current schedule table.  
index = 1...10  
Example The following command clears schedule entry #3 from the schedule table:  
CB5000> clear schedule 3  
Schedule 3 cleared.  
Related Commands SET SCHEDULE  
SHOW SCHEDULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-24  
CLEAR SCRIPT  
CLEAR SCRIPT  
Use the CLEAR SCRIPT command to remove a script from the script table.  
Format  
all  
clear script  
number  
all  
Removes all scripts from the DMM.  
number  
Removes the specific script number you specify. For example, if you enter  
CLEAR SCRIPT 2, the DMM removes script #2 from the script table. Use the  
SHOW SCRIPT command to display the script table.  
number = 1... 8  
Example The following command removes the first script from the script table:  
CB5000> clear script 1  
Script 1 cleared.  
Related Commands COPY SCRIPT  
RUN SCRIPT  
REVERT/SAVE SCRIPTS  
SET ALERT SCRIPT  
SET SCRIPT  
SHOW SCRIPT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR SECURITY AUTOLEARN 2-25  
CLEAR SECURITY  
AUTOLEARN  
Use the CLEAR SECURITY AUTOLEARN command to clear entries from the  
Autolearning database.  
To remove all old MAC addresses from the Autolearning database, you must  
clear both the Autolearn Address table using the CLEAR SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
slot.ALL MAC_ADDRESS command and then clear the Security Address database  
using the CLEAR SECURITY PORT slot.ALL MAC_ADDRESS command.  
Format  
address  
clear security autolearn  
slot.port  
mac_address  
all  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot is the slot (1 through 17) and port is the port number  
(1 through 40). For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot  
6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies all ports in a slot. slot is the slot number.  
address  
MAC address you are clearing using this command. The format for  
MAC addresses is nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn.  
The address 00-00-00-00-00-00 is invalid for this command.  
Example The following command clears the MAC address 08-00-87-01-a7-b2 from the  
Autolearning database, associated with port 3 on the module in slot 7:  
CB5000> clear security autolearn 7.3 mac_address 08-00-87-01-a7-b2  
Port 07.03 address 08-00-87-01-a7-b2 cleared from autolearning  
area.  
Related Commands SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
SHOW SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-26  
CLEAR SECURITY INTRUDER_LIST  
CLEAR SECURITY  
INTRUDER_LIST  
Use the CLEAR SECURITY INTRUDER_LIST command to clear the list of port  
security intrusions.  
Format  
clear security intruder_list  
Example The following command clears the intruder list:  
CB5000> clear security intruder_list  
Security Intruder List cleared.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY INTRUDER_LIST  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR SECURITY PORT 2-27  
CLEAR SECURITY  
PORT  
Use the CLEAR SECURITY PORT command to remove a MAC address from the  
security database for a port.  
To remove all old MAC addresses from the Autolearning database, you must  
clear both the Autolearn Address table using the CLEAR SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
slot.ALL MAC_ADDRESS command and then clear the Security Address database  
using the CLEAR SECURITY PORT slot.ALL MAC_ADDRESS command.  
Removing an authorized MAC address does not automatically disable Security  
Mode. If you remove the only authorized MAC addresses for a port but do not  
disable Security Mode, the DMM prevents any station from communicating  
through the port.  
Use the SET SECURITY PORT MODE command to enable and disable Security  
Mode.  
Format  
slot.port  
slot.all  
all  
mac_address  
all  
clear security port  
mac address  
slot.port  
Removes the MAC address from the security database for the port  
identified by slot.port.  
slot is the slot number and port is the port number. For example, to  
identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
all  
Removes the MAC address from the security database for all ports in  
the identified slot.  
Removes all MAC addresses from the security database for the entire  
hub.  
mac address  
Removes the MAC address from the security database for the  
identified port. Enter the address as a series of six hexadecimal bytes  
separated by hyphens. For example, 10-00-f1-0f-0c-63.  
Example The following command clears the MAC address 07-34-24-02-0F-00 from the  
security database for all ports on the module in slot 7:  
CB5000> clear security port 7.all mac_address 07-34-24-02-0F-00  
Port 07.all security MAC address 07-34-24—02-0F-00 cleared.  
Related Commands REVERT/SAVE SECURITY  
SET SECURITY PORT ACTION_ON_INTRUSION  
SET SECURITY PORT MAC_ADDRESS  
SET SECURITY PORT MODE  
SHOW SECURITY PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-28  
CLEAR TFTP RESULT  
CLEAR TFTP RESULT  
Use the CLEAR TFTP RESULT command to clear the TFTP Result field in the  
SHOW TFTP command display.  
The DMM uses TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) to download files. The DMM  
reports the status of the download in the TFTP Result field that is displayed  
when you use the SHOW TFTP command. The CLEAR TFTP RESULT command  
overwrites the value currently stored for TFTP Result with the value CLEAR.  
Use the CLEAR TFTP RESULT command before you begin a download so you can  
check the status of the download after it has been completed.  
Format  
clear tftp result  
Example The following command clears the current TFTP Result value:  
CB5000> clear tftp result  
Tftp result cleared.  
Related Command SHOW TFTP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR TR_SURROGATE 2-29  
CLEAR  
TR_SURROGATE  
Use the CLEAR TR_SURROGATE command to clear Token Ring surrogate  
information.  
Format  
group  
clear tr_surrogate  
slot.2  
slot  
Identifies the slot where the specified TR-NMC for this operation  
resides.  
group  
Specifies the name of the Token Ring surrogate group you want to  
clear. The rem_soft_error group is the only group implemented  
currently.  
Example The following command clears the Token Ring surrogate REM soft error  
information on the TR-NMC in slot 11.2:  
CB5000> clear tr_surrogate 11.2 rem_soft_error  
Related Command SHOW TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-30  
CLEAR VBRIDGE  
CLEAR VBRIDGE  
Use the CLEAR VBRIDGE command to delete specified Address Forwarding Table  
(AFT) or Internet Grouping Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping vbridges.  
Format  
all  
mac  
clear vbridge  
aft  
1... 240  
mac address  
slot.port  
bridge_port  
learn  
all  
mgmt  
rate_limit  
igmp_snooping  
all  
ip  
number  
bridge_port  
router_port  
slot  
slot  
1....240  
Identifies the vbridge.  
all  
Deletes all user-created entries and learned addresses in the specified  
virtual bridge address table.  
mac  
Deletes entries related to a specific MAC address from the address  
table.  
mac address  
bridge_port  
slot.port  
MAC address for the AFT vbridge to be deleted.  
Deletes the user-created entries (mgmt) on a specified port.  
slot and port where the module with the vbridge to be deleted  
resides.  
number  
IP address for the IGMP snooping vbridge to be deleted.  
Example This command deletes AFT entries related to the MAC address  
8f-59-43-63-35-68 from the AFT:  
CB5000 > clear vbridge 2 aft mac 8f-59-43-63-35-68  
Clear Vbridge 2 AFT Entry 8f-59-43-63-35-68 Deleted.  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE AFT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEAR VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING 2-31  
CLEAR VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
Use the CLEAR VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING command to remove all IGMP  
Snooping knowledge on the indicated bridge port slot.port.  
Format  
clear vbridge  
vbridge number  
igmp_snooping  
ip  
all  
bridge_port  
number  
bridge_port  
router_port  
slot.subslot  
vbridge number  
Identifies the specific vbridge from which to clear the IGMP Snooping  
information.  
number  
IP address from which to clear the IGMP Snooping information.  
slot.subslot  
Identifies the specific bridge port or router port from which to clear the  
IGMP Snooping information.  
Example The following command clears the IGMP Snooping information from vbridge 10  
on port 3 of the module in slot 8, subslot 1:  
CB5000> clear vbridge 10 igmp_snooping bridge_port 8.1  
Related Command CLEAR COUNTER BRIDGE_PORT IGMP_SNOOPING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-32  
COPY SCRIPT  
COPY SCRIPT  
Use the COPY SCRIPT command to copy the contents of one script to another  
script.  
Format  
copy script  
source script index  
to  
target script index  
source script index Identifies the source script. Use the SHOW SCRIPT command to display  
a list of scripts.  
source script index = 1...8  
target script index Identifies the target script. For example, the command  
COPY SCRIPT 1 to 6 copies the contents of script 1 through script 6.  
target script index = 1...8  
Example The following command copies script 1 to script 2:  
CB5000> copy script 1 to 2  
Script 1 copied to script 2.  
Related Commands RUN SCRIPT  
REVERT/SAVE SCRIPTS  
SET ALERT SCRIPT  
SET SCRIPT  
SHOW SCRIPT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DOWNLOAD FROM_DEVICE 2-33  
DOWNLOAD  
FROM_DEVICE  
Use the DOWNLOAD FROM_DEVICE command to download operational or boot  
code from the master DMM to a standby DMM in the same hub.  
Refer to the CoreBuilder 5000 Distributed Management Module User Guide for  
detailed download procedures.  
Use this command only when 3Com Corporation issues a new Update  
Distribution Kit (UDK) diskette. The download takes 15 to 30 seconds to  
complete. (Time frames from the operational code may take about 6 minutes  
for DMM code.) Each dot displayed during the procedure indicates a packet  
received.  
If the DMM does not respond after a BOOT download, contact your 3Com  
representative for more information.  
A short window of vulnerability exists during the download of boot code to the  
DMM, during which a loss of power can leave the DMM without BOOT code,  
and therefore not operational. If the DMM does not respond after a BOOT  
download, contact your 3Com representative for more information.  
Format  
boot  
download from_device module  
slot.subslot  
operational  
slot.subslot  
Selects the slot that you want to download DMM code to. The source  
is always the hub’s master DMM. For DMM with carrier, use subslot 8  
and for DMM (without carrier), use subslot 1.  
boot  
A small program that gets each module up and running. In the DMM,  
it also handles the self-download function.  
operational  
The code that provides module functionality. Operational updates are  
more common, because they may provide additional functionality.  
Example The following command initiates the download of boot code from the master  
DMM to the standby DMM in slot 6.1:  
CB5000> download from_device module 6.1 boot  
Related Commands DOWNLOAD IN_BAND  
DOWNLOAD OUT_OF_BAND  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-34  
DOWNLOAD IN_BAND  
DOWNLOAD IN_BAND Use the DOWNLOAD IN_BAND command to load new software into the DMM.  
An in-band download takes place over the network.  
The DOWNLOAD IN_BAND command loads new software into the DMM. When  
you enter the command, the DMM requests the download from a TFTP (Trivial  
File Transfer Protocol) server on your network. The TFTP server transmits the new  
code to the DMM, and, if needed, the DMM then transmits the new code to  
the module.  
Before you use the DOWNLOAD IN_BAND command:  
■
■
Use the SET TFTP FILE_NAME command to specify the name of the file to  
download.  
Use the SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS command to specify the IP address of  
the TFTP server.  
Save all parameters (including TFTP) before downloading DMM and RCTL code.  
Traffic statistic collection and display features are disabled during a download.  
These features restart automatically after the download completes successfully.  
Any network function (such as Ping and Telnet) that attempts to communicate  
with a DMM will not succeed until the download completes successfully and the  
DMM reinitializes.  
A short window of vulnerability exists during the download of boot code to the  
DMM, during which a loss of power can leave the DMM without BOOT code,  
and therefore not operational. If the DMM does not respond after a BOOT  
download, contact your 3Com representative for more information.  
Part of the inband download procedure involves configuring TFTP parameters.  
Refer to the SET TFTP FILE_NAME and SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS commands  
in this chapter for information on using TFTP.  
Do not use the RESET MASTERSHIP command during download.  
You cannot download modules using the SLIP interface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DOWNLOAD IN_BAND 2-35  
Format  
boot  
download in_band  
module  
device  
slot.port  
operational  
trchipset  
boot  
operational  
ascii  
configuration  
module  
boot  
all  
operational  
module  
device  
Specifies download to a particular module in the hub.  
Specifies download to the DMM.  
all  
Specifies download to all modules of the selected type.  
Specifies a download of boot code.  
boot  
operational  
trchipset  
ascii  
Specifies a download of operational code.  
Specifies a download of chipset code to the TR-NMC module.  
Specifies a download of an ASCII script file.  
configuration  
Specifies a download of a binary configuration file. This command  
applies to the DMM only.  
module  
The module type that you want to download code to. Only certain  
3Com CoreBuilder 5000 modules support this operation.  
®
slot.subslot  
The location of the module where you want to download the new code.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-36  
DOWNLOAD IN_BAND  
Example The following command starts a download of operational code to the  
management hub:  
CB5000> download in_band device operational  
Please stand by for download:  
(Target will reset upon successful download completion)  
The 3Com Key Code can be obtained by completing the UDK  
fax form and faxing it to 3Com at (508) 460-6195.  
Enter Upgrade Distribution Kit Serial number: XXXXXXXX  
Enter 3Com Key Code: XXXXXXXXX  
Welcome to Boot Services version 3.0.  
1024 kBytes flash memory installed.  
Inband download in progress.  
boot>  
Opening file xmm.bin on 151.104.2.98...  
Connected to 151.104.2.98.  
Connection closed for flash erasure.  
Erasing flash... done.  
Opening file xmm.bin on 151.104.2.98...  
Connected to 151.104.2.98.  
Receiving TFTP Packets:  
............................................................  
............................................................  
..........................................  
727824 bytes received in 63.72 seconds.  
Calculating CRC... done.  
Updating checksum... done.  
Download complete.  
Related Commands DOWNLOAD OUT_OF_BAND  
SET TFTP FILE_NAME  
SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
UPLOAD IN_BAND CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DOWNLOAD OUT_OF_BAND 2-37  
DOWNLOAD  
OUT_OF_BAND  
Use the DOWNLOAD OUT_OF_BAND command to load new software onto the  
DMM. An out-of-band download uses XMODEM and takes place over a serial  
connection between a personal computer and the console port on the DMM.  
Traffic statistic collection and display features are disabled during a download.  
These features restart automatically after the download completes successfully.  
Any network function (such as Ping and Telnet) that attempts to communicate  
with a DMM will not succeed until the download completes successfully and the  
DMM reinitializes.  
Do not use the RESET MASTERSHIP command during a download.  
Format  
boot  
download out_of_band  
module  
slot.subslot  
operational  
trchipset  
boot  
device  
all  
operational  
module  
boot  
operational  
module  
device  
all  
Specifies download to a particular module in the hub.  
Specifies download to the DMM.  
Specifies download to all modules of the selected type.  
Specifies a download of boot code.  
boot  
operational  
trchipset  
ascii  
Specifies a download of operational code.  
Specifies a download of chipset code to the TR-NMC module.  
Specifies a download of an ASCII script file.  
configuration Specifies a download of a binary configuration file. This command applies  
to the DMM only.  
module  
The module type that you want to download code to. Only certain 3Com  
CoreBuilder 5000 modules support this operation.  
®
slot.subslot  
The location of the module where you want to download the new code.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-38  
DOWNLOAD OUT_OF_BAND  
Example The following command initiates a download of boot code to the DMM issuing  
the DOWNLOAD command (that is, a self-download):  
Enter the command  
once at the DMM  
“operational”  
CB5000> download out_of_band device boot  
Please stand by for download:  
(Target will reset upon successful download completion)  
Enter the command  
a second time at the  
DMM boot >  
Welcome to Boot Services version v3.0.0.  
1024 kBytes flash memory installed.  
prompt.  
boot> download out_of_band device boot  
Please initiate file transfer sequence.  
CC  
Calculating CRC... done.  
Erasing flash... done.  
Writing flash... done.  
Updating checksum... done.  
Download complete.  
The download  
process ends by  
rebooting the device.  
Booting device...  
Login:  
Related Command DOWNLOAD IN_BAND  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOGOUT 2-39  
LOGOUT  
Use the LOGOUT command to log out from either a remote or local DMM  
session.  
If you are logged in to a local session (a session with the management hub to  
which the terminal is connected), entering the LOGOUT command ends the  
session.  
If you are logged in to a remote DMM or other device, entering the LOGOUT  
command breaks the connection to the remote device and leaves you  
connected to the local device.  
Format  
logout  
Example The following command logs you out from a local session:  
CB5000> logout  
Good-Bye  
Related Commands SAVE  
REVERT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-40  
MAINTAIN  
MAINTAIN  
Use the MAINTAIN command to enter maintenance mode. Certain inventory  
related commands are available only from maintenance mode. Maintenance  
mode allows you to enter information that is written permanently in a module’s  
EEPROM. Maintenance mode gives you access to the BOOT, DOWNLOAD, SET  
INVENTORY POWER, and SHOW INVENTORY POWER commands. You must  
SAVE or REVERT all changes before entering maintenance mode.  
Only logins with super-user access can enter maintenance mode.  
You cannot enter the MAINTAIN command if you are connected to a remote  
DMM through the TELNET command. Enter the BOOT command to exit  
maintenance mode.  
The DMM does not track network statistics when in maintenance mode.  
Format  
maintain  
Example The following command allows a user with super-user privileges to enter  
maintenance mode:  
CB5000> maintain  
To enter maintenance mode, enter your current session password at the prompt  
as shown below:  
Enter current session password for user "system":  
The following information appears:  
CB5000  
Distributed Management Module (vx.xx)  
Copyright 199x 3Com Corporation  
>>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MONITOR 2-41  
MONITOR  
Use the MONITOR command to view ongoing network statistics. This command  
displays statistics for a device, network, or port. The display is updated  
periodically based on the number of minutes and seconds you assign. Press  
Ctrl+C to discontinue this process and return to the management prompt.  
The MONITOR command reports information similar to the SHOW COUNTER  
command display except that the MONITOR command display captures events  
only at the time of request. The information displayed by the SHOW COUNTER  
command is current. Refer to the SHOW COUNTER commands for descriptions  
of the displays.  
Format  
100BASE_X  
ethernet  
bridge_port  
monitor  
slot.port  
interval  
interface  
ethernet  
network  
network  
fddi_port  
fddi_mac  
1 or 2  
fast_ethernet  
interface  
repeater  
network  
network  
module  
port  
slot  
rmon  
ring_station  
tr_mac_layer  
tr_promiscuous  
tr_source_routing  
token_ring  
vbridge  
network  
vbridge  
interval  
The system-specified range of time allotted for monitoring is  
00 through 30 minutes (mm) and 05 through 59 seconds (ss). Use  
these ranges when specifying a length of time to monitor your  
network.  
slot.port  
network  
Specifies the slot (1 through 17, 1 through 10, or 1 through 7) and  
port (1 through 40) you want to monitor.  
Indicates the type and number of network to monitor:  
ethernet_1 through ethernet_8  
■
fast_ethernet_1 through fast_ethernet_4  
■
isolated  
■
vbridge  
Specifies the SwitchModule virtual bridge (1 through 240) you want to  
monitor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-42  
MONITOR  
Example The following command displays statistics every 2 minutes for traffic on  
ethernet_1:  
CB5000> monitor 2:00 ethernet ethernet_1  
Ethernet Statistics for ETHERNET_1  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Cumulative  
Last Time Interval  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
FCS Errors  
SQE Test Errors  
Alignment Errors  
Carrier Sense Errors  
Frame Too Longs  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Deferred Transmissions  
Late Collisions  
Excessive Collisions  
Single Collision Frames  
Multiple Collision Frames  
Internal MAC Receive Errors  
Internal MAC Transmit Errors  
Display will refresh every 2 minutes 0 seconds.  
Press CTRL-C to exit.  
Related Command SHOW COUNTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PING 2-43  
PING  
Use the PING command to verify that a device is active on the network.  
The PING command sends up to 255 ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol)  
request packets to the specified device. If the device is alive, it responds to each  
request packet that it receives. If the device responds to less than 100 percent  
of the request packets, the network may be dropping packets.  
If you are having trouble pinging to a remote device, make sure the device is on  
the same network (segment), or bridged or routed to that segment.  
Format  
ping  
ip address  
host  
number of packets  
ip address  
host  
Specifies the IP (Internet Protocol) address of the device to be tested.  
The format of the address is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.  
Specifies the name of the host to be tested.  
number of packets Number of request packets to send. You can use any number in the  
range of 1 through 255. The default is 1 packet.  
Example The following command sends two ping requests to IP address 133.8.9.60:  
CB5000> ping 133.8.9.60 2  
The device responds to both request packets:  
Starting ping, resolution of displayed time is 10 milli-sec  
64 bytes from 133.8.9.60: icmp_seq=0. time=10. ms  
64 bytes from 133.8.9.60: icmp_seq=1. time=20. ms  
Number transmitted=2 Number received=2 Percent loss=0  
Total time=30 Minimum time=10 Maximum time=20 Average time=20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-44  
RESET DEVICE  
RESET DEVICE  
Use the RESET DEVICE command to reset the DMM you are connected to. You  
must save or revert unsaved changes before this command executes.  
Format  
reset device  
Example The following command resets the DMM you are connected to:  
CB5000> reset device  
Resetting device...  
Distributed Management Module (vx.xx)  
Copyright(c) 199x 3Com Corporation.  
After the reset completes, the login prompt is displayed as follows:  
Login: {enter login name}  
Password: {enter password}  
Related Commands RESET MODULE  
REVERT  
SAVE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RESET HUB 2-45  
RESET HUB  
Use the RESET HUB command to perform a hub reset.  
Use this command only if a hub is not functioning properly. The hub is reset to  
its most recent saved configuration.  
You must SAVE or REVERT any unsaved changes before you execute this  
command.  
Format  
reset hub  
Example The following command resets all hardware and software in the hub:  
CB5000> reset hub  
Resetting hub.  
Related Commands RESET DEVICE  
RESET MODULE  
REVERT  
SAVE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-46  
RESET MASTERSHIP  
RESET MASTERSHIP  
Use the RESET MASTERSHIP command to force an election to take place  
between all management modules in the hub. The result of this command is to  
elect a new master management module, based on the mastership priority  
setting. The DMM-elected master provides all command and control capabilities  
in the hub. The controller places all other DMMs in the hub in standby mode.  
CoreBuilder 5000 DMMs always take precedence over ONline™ management  
modules.  
This command causes a master management module election in the hub in  
which it is installed. The management module with the highest mastership  
priority setting becomes master. You set a DMM’s mastership priority using the  
SET MODULE MASTERSHIP_PRIORITY command. A DMM always assumes  
mastership over an ONline management module installed in a CoreBuilder 5000  
hub.  
You can only enter this command from a Master DMM and you must SAVE or  
REVERT any changes before you execute this command.  
Do not enter this command from a Telnet session. Slave DMMs do not  
CAUTION:  
have network connectivity. Resetting mastership from a Telnet session may cause  
you to lose the session without being able to reconnect.  
The time it takes to complete an election depends on a management module's  
mastership priority setting. A DMM with a mastership priority value of 10  
completes a mastership election fastest. A DMM with a mastership of 1,  
however, takes about 90 seconds to complete a mastership election. Set the  
master DMM to 10 and the slave DMMs to mastership priority values of 7, 8, or  
9 to facilitate the election process.  
Format  
reset mastership  
Example The following command causes the DMM to initiate a mastership election:  
CB5000> reset mastership  
Resigning  
Related Commands RESET HUB  
SET MODULE MASTERSHIP_PRIORITY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RESET MODULE 2-47  
RESET MODULE  
Use the RESET MODULE command to perform a hardware reset of a module in  
the hub. Use this command only if a module is not functioning properly. If used  
for the main (.1) subslot, the command resets each submodule in the slot. The  
DMM resets the module in the specified slot to its last-saved configuration.  
When you enter this command for the main board in a slot (.1):  
1 The system prompts you to confirm that you want to reset all modules in the  
slot.  
2 Press yto execute the reset.  
You cannot reset either the DMM to which you are logged in or the Active  
Controller Module using this command. To reset the DMM, use the RESET  
DEVICE command. To reset the Active Controller Module, use the RESET HUB  
command. The RESET HUB command resets all modules, including the Controller  
Module.  
Format  
slot.subslot  
reset module  
slot  
Indicates the slot to reset: 1 through 19.  
Indicates the subslot to reset: 1 through 7.  
subslot  
Example The following command resets the main board, and any boards in subslots, on  
the module in slot 6:  
CB5000> reset module 6.1  
Resetting this module will reset all of the modules in this slot.  
Do you wish to continue ? (y/n) : y  
Resetting module 6.1.  
Related Commands RESET HUB  
SHOW MODULE ALL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-48  
REVERT  
REVERT  
Use the REVERT command to return to the configuration settings that were in  
effect as of the last save. You can revert all settings or just the settings of a  
functionally related group of parameters. For example, if you enter the REVERT  
ALERT command, any SET ALERT changes you made (after the last SAVE) are  
abandoned. In addition, REVERT ALERT only affects the ALERT option (all other  
parameter groups are unchanged).  
Format  
alert  
revert  
all  
bootp  
community  
device  
group  
host  
ip  
login  
module_port  
schedule  
scripts  
security  
security_advanced  
terminal  
tftp  
Example 1 The following command reverts the DMM’s terminal configuration:  
CB5000> revert terminal  
Reverting terminal parameters.  
Example 2 The following command reverts all settings to the most recently saved DMM  
terminal configuration:  
CB5000> revert all  
Reverting all parameters.ed  
Related Command SAVE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RUN SCRIPT 2-49  
RUN SCRIPT  
Use the RUN SCRIPT command to run a specified script file.  
Format  
run script  
index  
index  
Identifies the script to be run. Use the SHOW SCRIPT command for a  
numbered list of scripts. The options are 1 through 8.  
Example The following command runs script 1:  
CB5000> run script 1  
[command output for script 1 is displayed]  
Related Commands SET SCRIPT  
SHOW SCHEDULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-50 SAVE  
SAVE  
Use the SAVE command to save the current configuration values established by  
the SET command.  
Parameter values established by the SET command are effective immediately but  
are not saved in non-volatile memory. Use the SAVE command to save these  
values in non-volatile memory. When the hub is reset, due to user command or  
power cycling, the hub reinitializes using the values in non-volatile memory.  
The SAVE ALL command saves all of the configuration values made using the  
SET command.  
You can save all settings or just the settings of a functionally related group of  
parameters. Entering a SAVE command with a specific option saves only the  
portion of the configuration that applies to the option. For example, SAVE TFTP  
saves only TFTP parameters.  
When the SAVE command is executed on the master DMM in a hub that also  
has slave DMMs, the saved settings are also saved on the slave DMM. Do not  
execute any RESET DEVICE, HUB, or MASTERSHIP commands, or power down  
any management modules or the hub itself for at least 2 minutes after you  
enter the SAVE command. Also, if a SAVE command is executed on a slave  
DMM, the settings that are saved are only saved locally on the slave. If a  
subsequent save is issued on the master, the slave acquires those settings. If a  
SAVE command is executed on a slave, and it becomes master before any SAVE  
commands are executed on the current master, it then teaches its settings to  
the now slave DMMs.  
Format  
alert  
save  
all  
bootp  
community  
device  
group  
host  
ip  
login  
module_port  
schedule  
scripts  
security  
security_advanced  
terminal  
tftp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SAVE 2-51  
Example 1 The following command saves the DMM’s current configuration settings:  
CB5000> save all  
Saving all parameters.  
Example 2 The following command saves the current module and port configuration  
settings:  
CB5000> save module_port  
Saving module and port parameters.  
Related Command REVERT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-52 SET  
SET  
Use the SET command to change configuration values. Parameter values  
established by the SET command are effective immediately but are not  
permanently saved. The SET command parameters have options of their own.  
The following pages describe these options in detail.  
Format  
command heading  
set  
command heading Chooses the parameter to set:  
alert  
atm  
bootp  
bport_lec  
bport_mau  
bridge_port  
clock  
community  
device  
group  
host  
inventory  
ip  
login  
module  
network  
port  
power  
protocols  
rmon  
schedule  
script  
security  
security_advanced  
sonet  
terminal  
tftp  
tr_surrogate  
trunk  
vbridge  
Related Command SHOW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET ALERT 2-53  
SET ALERT  
Use the SET ALERT command to configure a DMM action when certain events  
(see parameter descriptions below) occur. DMM actions include:  
■
Sending alerts (traps) to a designated trap receiver (for example, a 3Com  
CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule)  
■
Displaying alert messages on the screen of a locally connected terminal  
You must configure the trap receiver through the community table (SET  
COMMUNITY command) so the DMM knows where to send traps.  
Format  
authentication  
bridge_port  
change  
disable  
enable  
set alert  
all  
slot  
port_up_down  
stp_state  
console_display  
hello  
disable  
enable  
new_environment  
script  
port_up_down  
disable  
enable  
filter  
authentication  
bridge_port  
Enables or disables authentication traps.  
The DMM issues an authentication trap when an SNMP manager tries  
to read from or write to the management hub and the user’s  
community name is not valid for the attempted operation.  
The factory setting is authentication traps enabled.  
Enables or disables bridge port port up and down and STP state  
aerts.  
The DMM issues a port_up_down trap for a bridge port if the bridge  
port starts or stops operating. This is independent of repeater  
port_up_down alerts. The DMM also issues an stp_state alert when  
the spanning tree instance for a bridge port has a topology change.  
change  
Enables or disables change traps.  
The DMM issues a change trap when a change to the management  
hub’s configuration occurs.  
The factory setting is change traps enabled.  
Enables or disables trap displays on the local terminal.  
The factory setting is console_display enabled.  
console_display  
Hub up and hub down traps are displayed on the screen even if  
console_display is disabled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-54 SET ALERT  
hello  
Enables or disables hello traps.  
The DMM issues a hello trap when the DMM is reset, and then once  
every minute until it receives a valid SNMP message. If the DMM has  
not received a valid SNMP message after 4 hours and 15 minutes, it  
stops sending hello traps.  
The factory setting is hello traps enabled.  
new_environment Enables or disables new formatting of environmental alerts.  
The DMM issues an environmental alert when there is a status  
change in fans, power supplies, hub temperature, voltage levels, or  
power reserve.  
script  
Displays a message on the locally connected terminal (screen) when  
the DMM executes a script. The DMM never transmits a script alert  
message.  
The factory setting is script messages disabled.  
Enables, disables, or filters port_up_down traps.  
port_up_down  
The DMM sends a port_up_down trap whenever a port on the stack  
starts operating (goes up) or stops operating (goes down). The table  
that follows shows how you can configure the port_up_down trap.  
The factory setting is port_up_down traps disabled.  
Disables the specified trap.  
disable  
enable  
filter  
Enables the specified trap.  
Applies to port_up_down traps only. Refer to the following table.  
Port_Up_Down Setting Result  
enable  
The DMM generates port up and port down alerts for all ports in  
the hub.  
disable  
filter  
The DMM generates no port up and port down alerts.  
The DMM generates port up and port down alerts according to  
the alert setting for each port.  
Use the SET PORT ALERT command to configure port up and  
port down alerts for specific ports.  
Example 1 The following command disables the DMM from sending traps when it executes  
a script:  
CB5000> set alert script disable  
Alert SCRIPT set to DISABLE.  
Example 2 The following command enables the DMM to send a trap whenever a user  
makes a configuration change to the DMM:  
CB5000> set alert change enable  
Alert CHANGE set to ENABLE.  
Example 3 The following command disables the DMM from displaying trap messages on  
the terminal connected to the DMM:  
CB5000> set alert console_display disable  
Alert CONSOLE_DISPLAY set to DISABLE.  
Related Commands SET PORT ALERT  
SHOW ALERT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET ATM ILMI 2-55  
SET ATM ILMI  
Use the SET ATM ILMI command to configure the Interim Local Management  
Interface (ILMI) ATM attributes associated with the module.  
Format  
ilmi  
set atm  
slot  
option  
option  
admin_vbridge  
max_burst_size  
peak_cell_rate  
option  
pvc  
option  
option  
option  
req_retries  
req_timeout  
sust_cell_rate  
option  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
admin_vbridge  
option  
Specifies the vbridge to be used for administrative purposes.  
Choose from a range of 1 through 240.  
max_burst_size  
option  
Specifies the maximum burst size (in cells) for ILMI operations.  
Choose from a range of 1 through 100. The default value is 11.  
peak_cell_rate  
Specifies the peak cell rate as a percentage of line rate for ILMI  
operations.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 100. The default value is 5.  
pvc  
Specifies (in vpi/vci format) the PVC Virtual Path Identifier/Virtual  
Channel Identifier (VPI/VCI) to be used for ILMI operations.  
option  
The format for this option is value/value. The default value is 0/16.  
Specifies the number of retries associated with ILMI operations.  
Choose from a range of 0 through 4. The default value is 2.  
Specifies the timeout in seconds for ILMI operations.  
req_retries  
option  
req_timeout  
option  
Choose from a range of 5 through 60. The default value is 5.  
sust_cell_rate  
Specifies the sustained cell rate as a percentage of line rate for ILMI  
operations.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 100. The default value is 1.  
Example The following command sets the ILMI maximum burst size at 20 cells for the  
module in slot 4:  
CB5000> set atm 4 ilmi max_burst_size 20  
Slot 04 parameter set.  
Warning: Change does not take effect until module is reset.  
Related Command SHOW ATM ILMI CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-56 SET ATM LEARP_QUIET_TIME  
SET ATM  
LEARP_QUIET_TIME  
Use the SET ATM LEARP_QUIET_TIME command to specify the LAN Emulation  
Address Resolution Protocol (LE-ARP) quiet time.  
The LE-ARP quiet time is the period of time that the LAN Emulation Client (LEC),  
after failing to resolve a Media Access Control/Asynchronous Terminal Mode  
(MAC/ATM) address binding using LE-ARP, refrains from issuing further LE-ARP  
requests for the MAC address. Choose a value of 0 to disable this mode of  
operation.  
Format  
set atm  
slot  
option  
learp_quiet_time  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
option  
Choose from a range of 0 through 60. The default value is 5.  
Example The following command sets the learp_quiet time to 20 seconds for the module  
in slot 4:  
CB5000> set atm 4 learp_quiet_time 20  
Slot 04 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW ATM INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET ATM NEIGHBOR IF_NAME 2-57  
SET ATM NEIGHBOR  
IF_NAME  
Use the SET ATM NEIGHBOR IF_NAME command to specify the value of the  
ifName for the peer ATM device’s ATM-layer interface.  
Normally, this value is provided automatically by the peer through the Interim  
Local Management Interface (ILMI). However, if the peer’s ILMI does not provide  
this value, you can use this command to configure the value for network  
management purposes.  
The peer interface’s ifName is advertised in the ATM Backbone SwitchModule’s  
RFC1695 ATM MIB.  
Format  
neighbor  
set atm  
slot  
if_name  
option  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Use up to 63 characters for the ifName.  
option  
Example The following command sets the neighbor if_name for the peer ATM device in  
slot 4 to Test:  
CB5000> set atm 4 neighbor if_name Test  
Slot 04 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW ATM INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-58 SET ATM NEIGHBOR IP_ADDRESS  
SET ATM NEIGHBOR  
IP_ADDRESS  
Use the SET ATM NEIGHBOR IP_ADDRESS command to specify an IP address for  
the peer ATM device to which SNMP requests on UDP port 161 may be  
directed.  
Normally, this value is provided automatically by the peer through the Interim  
Local Management Interface (ILMI). However, if the peer’s ILMI does not provide  
this value, you can use this command to configure the value for network  
management purposes.  
The peer IP address is advertised in the ATM Backbone SwitchModule’s RFC1695  
ATM MIB.  
The ATM NEIGHBOR IP address is four decimal numbers separated by periods.  
Each number can range from 0 to 255. However, the following addresses are  
illegal:  
■
0.0.0.0  
■
255.255.255.255  
Format  
ip_address  
neighbor  
set atm  
slot  
option  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
option  
Use 4 decimal numbers separated by periods for the IP address.  
Example The following command sets the neighbor ip_address for the peer ATM device  
in slot 4 to 02.04.80.20:  
CB5000> set atm 4 neighbor ip_address 02.04.80.20  
Slot 04 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW ATM INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET ATM NUM_LECS 2-59  
SET ATM NUM_LECS  
Use the SET ATM NUM_LECS command to specify the number of LAN  
Emulation Clients (LECs) you expect to support on this module. The system uses  
the value you select for resource allocation sizing during initialization. The value  
you select takes effect after module reset.  
Format  
option  
set atm  
slot  
num_lecs  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Choose from a range of 1 through 64.  
option  
Example The following command sets the num_lecs in slot 4 to 20:  
CB5000> set atm 4 num_lecs 20  
Slot 04 parameter set.  
Warning: Change does not take effect until module is reset.  
Related Command SHOW ATM INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-60 SET ATM NUM_VCCS  
SET ATM NUM_VCCS  
Use the SET ATM NUM_VCCS command to specify the number of virtual circuits  
you expect to support on this module. The system uses the value you select for  
resource allocation sizing during initialization.  
VCCS is an abbreviation for Virtual Channel Connections.  
Format  
option  
set atm  
slot  
num_vccs  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Choose from a range of 128 through 512.  
option  
Example The following command configures the num_vccs in slot 4 to 128:  
CB5000> set atm 4 num_vccs 128  
Slot 04 parameter set.  
Warning: Change does not take effect until module is reset.  
Related Command SHOW ATM INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET ATM Q93B 2-61  
SET ATM Q93B  
Use the SET ATM Q93B command to specify the values of Q93B timers.  
CAUTION: Do not change the default settings for this command. Any changes  
you make may cause interoperability problems with other ATM equipment.  
Format  
set atm  
q93b  
t303  
t308  
t309  
option  
option  
option  
slot  
t310  
t313  
option  
option  
t316  
t317  
t322  
option  
option  
option  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
t303  
Specifies (in seconds) the t303 value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for User  
Network Interface (UNI) version t3.0/3.1 is 4/4.  
t308  
Specifies (in seconds) the t308 value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for UNI  
Version 3.0/3.1 is 30/30.  
t309  
Specifies (in seconds) the t309 value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for UNI  
Version 3.0/3.1 is 90/10.  
t310  
Specifies (in seconds) the t310 value.  
Version 3.0/3.1 is 10/10.  
option  
t313  
Specifies (in seconds) the t313 value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for UNI  
Version 3.0/3.1 is 4/4.  
t316  
Specifies (in seconds) the t316 value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for UNI  
Version 3.0/3.1 is 120/120.  
t317  
Specifies (in seconds) the t317 value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for UNI  
Version 3.0/3.1 is 60/60.  
t322  
Specifies (in seconds) the t322 value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for UNI  
Version 3.0/3.1 is 4/4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-62 SET ATM Q93B  
Example The following command sets the ATM Q93b timer to 2 seconds:  
CB5000> set atm 4 q93b t303 2  
Slot 04 parameter set.  
Warning: Change does not take effect until module is reset.  
Related Command SHOW ATM Q93B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET ATM QSAAL 2-63  
SET ATM QSAAL  
Use the SET ATM QSAAL command to specify the values of QSAAL parameters.  
3Com recommends that you do not change the default settings for this  
command. Any changes may cause interoperability problems with other ATM  
equipment.  
Format  
qsaal  
option  
set atm  
slot  
cc  
idle  
option  
option  
keepalive  
max_cc_retries  
option  
option  
option  
option  
option  
max_pd_retries  
no response  
poll  
stat_max_range  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
cc  
Specifies (in seconds) the cc value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for User  
Network Interface (UNI) Version 3.0/3.1 is 2/1.  
idle  
Specifies (in seconds) the idle value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for UNI  
Version 3.0/3.1 is 15/15.  
keepalive  
Specifies (in seconds) the keepalive value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for UNI  
version 3.0/3.1 is 1/2.  
max_cc_retries  
option  
Specifies (in seconds) the max_cc_retries value. Range is 1 through 4.  
Choose from a range of 1 through 4. The default value is 4.  
max_pd_retries  
Specifies (in seconds) the max_pd_retries value. Range is 1 through  
25.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 25. The default value is 25.  
Specifies (in seconds) the no_response value.  
no_response  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 300. The default value for UNI  
Version 3.0/3.1 is 10/7.  
poll  
Specifies (in milliseconds) the poll value.  
option  
Choose from a range of 100 through 10000. The default value for  
UNI Version 3.0/3.1 is 100/750.  
stat_max_ranges  
Specifies (in seconds) the stat_max_ranges value. Range is 1 through  
67.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 67. The default value is 67.  
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definitions of  
parameters and additional information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-64 SET ATM QSAAL  
Example The following command sets the ATM QSAAL idle value to 2:  
CB5000> set atm 4 qsaal idle 20  
Slot 04 parameter set. Setting saved.  
Warning: Change does not become operational until module is reset.  
Related Command SHOW ATM QSAAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET ATM SIGNAL 2-65  
SET ATM SIGNAL  
Use the SET ATM SIGNAL command to specify parameters for the signalling  
Virtual Channel Connection (VCC). The parameters you set take effect at the  
next module reset.  
Format  
max_burst_size  
peak_cell_rate  
sust_cell_rate  
signal  
option  
option  
option  
set atm  
slot  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Specifies the maximum burst size (in cells).  
max_burst_size  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 100. The default value is 7.  
Specifies the peak cell rate as a percentage of line rate.  
Choose from a range of 1 through 100. The default value is 5.  
Specifies the sustained cell rate as a percentage of line rate.  
Choose from a range of 1 through 100. The default value is 1.  
peak_cell_rate  
option  
sust_cell_rate  
option  
Example The following command sets the maximum ATM signal burst size in cells to 9:  
CB5000> set atm 4 signal max_burst_size 9  
Slot 04 parameter set.  
Related Command SET ATM ILMI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-66 SET ATM UNI_VERSION  
SET ATM  
UNI_VERSION  
Use the SET ATM UNI_VERSION command to specify the User Network Interface  
(UNI) version you want to use. The default setting is 3_1. The version you  
specify takes effect at the next module reset.  
Format  
3_0  
3_1  
uni_version  
set atm  
slot  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Specifies UNI Version 3.0.  
3_0  
3_1  
Specifies UNI Version 3.1.  
Example The following command sets the ATM version to 3.0:  
CB5000> set atm 4 uni_version 3.0  
Slot 04 parameter set.  
Warning: Change does not take effect until module is reset.  
Related Command SHOW ATM ILMI CONFIGRATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET ATM VPI_VCI_BITS 2-67  
SET ATM VPI_VCI_BITS Use the SET ATM VPI_VCI_BITS command to specify the number of valid bits for  
the Virtual Path Identifier/Virtual Channel Identifier (VPI/VCI) field. The total  
number of VPI and VCI bits must not exceed 9.  
Format  
vpi/vci  
vpi_vci_bits  
set atm  
slot  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
vpi/vci  
Choose the number of valid bits for the Virtual Path Identifier/Virtual  
Channel Identifier (VPI/VCI) field. You can choose from one of the  
following ranges:  
0 through 9  
■
1 through 8  
■
2 through 7  
■
3 through 6  
■
The default value is 0 for VPI and 9 for VCI.  
Example The following command sets the ATM VPI bits to 3 and the VCI bits to 8:  
CB5000> set atm 4 vpi_vci_bits 3/8  
Slot 04 parameter set.  
Warning: Change does not take effect until module is reset.  
Related Command SHOW ATM ILMI CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-68 SET BOOTP MODULE  
SET BOOTP MODULE  
Use the SET BOOTP MODULE command to specify an NMC (or A-ENMC  
interface) to use as the BootP interface. BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) is a  
UDP/IP-based protocol (User Datagram Protocol/Internet Protocol) that allows a  
device to configure itself dynamically without user intervention. This command  
applies to the DMM and the Advanced DMM/Controller modules.  
Format  
set bootp module  
slot.subslot  
slot.subslot  
slot is the slot number in the hub. subslot is the subslot on the  
module in the specified slot. For example, to identify subslot 4 of slot  
6, enter 6.4  
Example The following command specifies slot 5, subslot 1 as the BootP interface:  
CB5000> set bootp module 5.1  
Related Commands CLEAR BOOTP  
SET BOOTP POWER_UP_MODE  
SET BOOTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
SHOW BOOTP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BOOTP POWER_UP_MODE 2-69  
SET BOOTP  
POWER_UP_MODE  
Use the SET BOOTP POWER_UP_MODE command to define whether or not the  
DMM issues a BootP request upon power-up.  
Format  
disable  
enable  
set bootp power_up_mode  
disable Configures the DMM to not issue a BootP request upon power-up.  
enable Configures the DMM to issue a BootP request upon power-up.  
Example The following command causes the DMM to issue a BootP request each time it  
powers up:  
CB5000> set bootp power_up_mode enable  
BootP power_up_mode set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands CLEAR BOOTP  
SET BOOTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
SHOW BOOTP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-70 SET BOOTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
SET BOOTP  
SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
Use the SET BOOTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS command to define the BootP server  
IP address to which the DMM sends BootP requests. If you do not specify an IP  
address, the DMM sends the request to the broadcast address.  
Format  
set bootp server_ip_address  
ip address  
ip address  
IP address of the BootP server. Enter the address as a series of four  
decimal bytes separated by periods. For example, 192.122.19.4.  
The factory setting is 255.255.255.255, which is a broadcast address.  
Example The following command specifies that the DMM send BootP requests to IP  
address 127.3.6.58:  
CB5000> set bootp server_ip_address 127.3.6.58  
BootP IP address set to 127.3.6.58.  
Related Commands CLEAR BOOTP  
SET BOOTP POWER_UP_MODE  
SHOW BOOTP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_LEC BUS_RATE_LIMIT 2-71  
SET BPORT_LEC  
BUS_RATE_LIMIT  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC BUS_RATE_LIMIT command to set the BUS rate from  
the DMM. BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
option  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
bus_rate_limit  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
option  
Specifies the BUS rate limit in packets/seconds. Values range from  
0 through 65535. Default value is 5000 packets/sec. A value of 0 (zero)  
means no limit.  
Example The following command sets the LEC in slot 4, port 1 to a BUS rate limit of  
5000:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 bus_rate_limit 5000  
Bridge Port 04.01 bud rate limit parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-72 SET BPORT_LEC CONFIG_MODE  
SET BPORT_LEC  
CONFIG_MODE  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC CONFIG_MODE command to specify how the LAN  
Emulation Client (LEC) port acquires its LAN emulation configuration parameters  
– automatically or manually.  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
config_mode  
automatic  
manual  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
automatic  
manual  
Specifies that the LEC attempts to acquire its LAN emulation configuration  
parameters from a LAN Emulation Configuration Server (LECS).  
Specifies that the LEC’s LAN emulation parameters are configured locally.  
Example The following command sets the LEC in slot 4, port 1 to automatically configure  
from a LECS:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 config_mode automatic  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_LEC ELAN_NAME 2-73  
SET BPORT_LEC  
ELAN_NAME  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC ELAN_NAME command to supply the name of the  
emulated LAN (ELAN) associated with the LAN Emulation Client (LEC).  
The value of the ELAN name may or may not be taken into account by the LAN  
Emulation Configuration Server (LECS) and LAN Emulation Server (LES),  
depending on the policy configured on those servers.  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
elan_name  
name  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
name  
Specifies the name (up to 63 characters) of the LAN associated with the  
LEC.  
Example The following command sets the elan_name of the LEC in slot 4, port 1 to  
Main_lec:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 elan_name  
Enter bport_lec 4.1 elan_name:  
Main_LEC  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-74 SET BPORT_LEC ELAN_TYPE  
SET BPORT_LEC  
ELAN_TYPE  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC ELAN_TYPE command to specify the emulated LAN  
(ELAN) type associated with the LAN Emulation Client (LEC).  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
elan_type  
unspecified  
802.3  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
unspecified  
802.3  
Allows the LEC to determine the type of emulated LAN when the LEC  
attempts to join the emulated LAN.  
The IEEE 802.3 LAN is the only supported emulated LAN type.  
Example The following command sets the LEC in slot 4, port 1 to type 802.3:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 elan_type 802.3  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set. Setting saved.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_LEC FRAME 2-75  
SET BPORT_LEC  
FRAME  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC FRAME command to specify two parameters for the  
emulated LAN:  
■
Maximum frame size  
■
Maximum unknown frame count  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
slot.lec  
option  
option  
frame  
max_frame_size  
set bport_lec  
max_unkwn_frame_count  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
max_frame_  
size  
Specifies the maximum frame size (in octets) for the emulated LAN.  
option  
You can choose from one of the following options:  
1516  
■
4544  
■
unspecified  
■
Unspecified allows the LECs to determine the maximum frame size when  
the LEC tries to join the emulated LAN.  
You can create an FDDI-like LAN emulation by configuring the LAN type  
as IEEE 802.3 and then setting the maximum frame size to 4544.  
max_unkwn_  
frame_count  
Specifies the maximum number of frames sent by a LEC to the Broadcast  
and Unknown Server (BUS) for a given unicast LAN destination within a  
specified maximum unknown time period.  
option  
You can choose from a range of 1 through 10 frames.  
Example The following command sets the maximum frame size of the LEC in slot 4,  
port 1 to 1516:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 frame max_frame_size 1516  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Commands SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
SET BPORT_LEC TIME  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-76 SET BPORT_LEC LEC_DEFAULTS  
SET BPORT_LEC  
LEC_DEFAULTS  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC LEC_DEFAULTS command to restore the LAN Emulation  
attributes of a LAN Emulation Client (LEC) to the default values listed below.  
This command is only effective when the LEC has been disabled by executing  
the SET BPORT_LEC MODE command.  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
lec_defaults  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
lec_defaults  
The default settings for the LEC.  
Attributes  
config_mode  
elan_type  
Value  
automatic  
unspecified  
max_frame_size  
elan_name  
unspecified  
Zero-length string  
("admin" for LEC 1)  
Zero-length ATM address  
Zero-length ATM address  
<max vccs on module>  
120 sec  
les_atm_address  
lecs_atm_address  
num_elan_vccs  
control_timeout  
max_unknown_frame_count  
max_unknown_frame_time  
vcc_timeout  
1
1
sec  
1200 sec  
1
max_retry_count  
aging_time  
300 sec  
forward_delay_time  
expected_arp_resp_time  
flush_timeout  
15  
1
sec  
sec  
sec  
sec  
sec  
4
path_switch_delay  
connect_complete_timer  
6
4
Example The following command sets the default setting of the LEC in slot 4, port 1:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 lec_defaults  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set. Setting saved.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_LEC LECS_ATM_ADDRESS 2-77  
SET BPORT_LEC  
LECS_ATM_ADDRESS  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC LECS_ATM_ADDRESS command to specify the ATM  
address of the LAN Emulation Configuration Server (LECS) when configuration  
mode is set to automatic.  
The ATM address is 20 hexadecimal numbers separated by periods. Each  
number can range from 0 to FF. However, the following addresses are illegal:  
■
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0  
■
FF. FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF. FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF. FF.FF. FF  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
lecs_atm_address  
ATM address  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
ATM address  
Specifies the ATM address of the LAN Emulation Configuration Server  
(LECS).  
Example The following command sets the ATM address of the LECS in slot 4, port 1:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 lecs_atm_address 39.99.99.99.ac.00.00.00.  
00.99.99.01.02.03.04.05.06.07.08.00  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-78 SET BPORT_LEC LES_ATM_ADDRESS  
SET BPORT_LEC  
LES_ATM_ADDRESS  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC LES_ATM_ADDRESS command to specify the LAN  
Emulation Server (LES) ATM address when configuration mode is set to manual.  
The ATM address is 20 hexadecimal numbers separated by periods. Each  
number can range from 0 to FF. However, the following addresses are illegal:  
■
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0  
■
FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
les_atm_address  
ATM address  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
ATM address  
Specifies the ATM address of the LES.  
Example The following command sets the ATM address of the LES in slot 4, port 1:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 les_atm_address 39.00.99.99.99.99.ac.  
00.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_LEC LINK_TRAP 2-79  
SET BPORT_LEC  
LINK_TRAP  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC LINK_TRAP command to enable or disable link traps for  
a LAN Emulation Client (LEC) port.  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
set bport_lec  
link_trap  
enable  
disable  
slot.lec  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
enable  
disable  
Enables link traps for a LEC port.  
Disables link traps for a LEC port.  
Example The following command enables link traps for the LEC in slot 4, port 1:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 link_trap enable  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC STATUS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-80 SET BPORT_LEC MODE  
SET BPORT_LEC MODE Use the SET BPORT_LEC MODE command to cause an idle LAN Emulation Client  
(LEC) to join the emulated LAN (ELAN) of which it is configured to be a member  
or to cause an active LEC to disconnect from its emulated LAN.  
This command controls the ability of the LEC to operate on an emulated LAN.  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
mode  
enable  
disable  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
enable  
disable  
Causes an idle LEC to attempt to join the emulated LAN of which it is  
configured to be a member.  
Causes an active LEC to disconnect from its emulated LAN.  
Example The following command enables an active LEC in PHY in slot 4, port 1 to  
disconnect from its emulated LAN:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 mode enable  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Commands SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
SET BRIDGE_PORT VBRIDGE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_LEC MAX_RETRY_COUNT 2-81  
SET BPORT_LEC  
MAX_RETRY_COUNT  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC MAX_RETRY_COUNT command to specify the  
maximum number of retries for a LAN Emulation Address Resolution Protocol  
(LE-ARP) request following the first failed attempt.  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
max_retry_count  
option  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
option  
Specify 0 if you do not want the system to retry following the first failed  
LE-ARP request attempt.  
Specify 1 to set the system to retry one time following the first failed  
LE-ARP request attempt.  
Specify 2 to set the system to retry two times following the first failed  
LE-ARP request attempt.  
Example The following command sets the maximum number of LE-ARP request retry  
attempts for a LAN Emulation Client (LEC) in slot 4, port 1 to 2:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 max_retry_count 2  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-82 SET BPORT_LEC TIME  
SET BPORT_LEC TIME  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC TIME command to specify timeout options for LAN  
Emulation Client (LEC) ports.  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
option  
option  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
time  
aging_time  
connect_complete_timer  
control_timeout  
option  
option  
expect_arp_resp_time  
option  
option  
flush_timeout  
forward_delay_time  
max_unknown_frame_time  
path_switch_delay  
vcc_timeout  
option  
option  
option  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64  
LAN Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM  
Backbone SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the  
ATM Backbone SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
aging_time  
Specifies the aging time (in seconds) for entries in the LAN  
Emulation Address Resolution Protocol (LE-ARP) cache.  
option  
Choose from a range of 10 through 300.  
connect_complete_  
timer  
Specifies the time (in seconds) within which data or a  
READY_IND message is expected from the calling party.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 10.  
control_timeout  
Specifies the time (in seconds) used for most LAN Emulation  
request/response control interactions.  
option  
Choose from a range of 10 through 300.  
expect_arp_resp_  
time  
Specifies the maximum time (in seconds) that a LEC expects a  
LE-ARP response cycle to last.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 30.  
flush_timeout  
Species the timeout (in seconds) for a flush response after a  
flush request has been sent.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 4.  
forward_delay_time  
Specifies the aging time (in seconds) for entries in the LE-ARP  
cache when a LAN Emulation topology change is indicated.  
option  
Choose from a range of 4 through 30.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_LEC TIME 2-83  
max_unknown_frame_ Specifies the time (in seconds) in which a LEC will send no more  
time  
than the maximum unknown frame count frames to the  
Broadcast and Unknown Server (BUS) for a given unicast LAN  
destination.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 10.  
path_switch_delay  
Time (in seconds) since sending a frame to the BUS after which  
the LEC may assume the frame has been delivered or discarded.  
You can use this attribute to bypass the flush protocol.  
option  
Choose from a range of 1 through 8.  
vcc_timeout  
Timeout (in seconds) after which a Data Direct VCC should be  
released if it has not been used to transmit or receive data  
frames.  
option  
Choose from a range of 0 through 2147483647.  
Example The following command sets the flush response timeout period for the LEC in  
slot 4, port 1 to 3 seconds:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 time flush_timeout 3  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-84 SET BPORT_LEC NUM_ELAN_VCCS  
SET BPORT_LEC  
NUM_ELAN_VCCS  
Use the SET BPORT_LEC NUM_ELAN_VCCS command to specify the maximum  
number of virtual circuits available to the LAN Emulation Client (LEC).  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
option  
num_elan_vccs  
set bport_lec  
slot.lec  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
option  
Specifies the maximum number of virtual circuits available to the LEC. You  
can choose from 128 to Max VCCs. Where Max VCCs is equal to whatever  
is defined using the SET ATM NUM_VCCS command.  
Example The following command sets the maximum number of virtual circuits available  
to the LEC in slot 4, port 1 to 128:  
CB5000> set bport_lec 4.1 num_elan_vccs 128  
Bridge Port 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Commands SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
SHOW ATM INTERFACE  
SET ATM NUM_VCCS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_MAU ALERT_FILTER 2-85  
SET BPORT_MAU  
ALERT_FILTER  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU ALERT_FILTER command to configure bridge ports to  
generate or filter port up/down traps.  
Format  
set bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
alert_filter  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port.mau Identifies the MAU for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the port  
number. The mau variable may be 1 (if no additional MAUs are configured)  
or 2 (for redundant ports). For example, to identify MAUs on port 4 on the  
module in slot 6, enter 6.4.1  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all port MAUs in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Disables alert filtering and allows traps to be generated from the port MAU.  
Enables alert filtering that filters out traps from the port MAU.  
Example The following command enables filtering on port 3 mau 1 of the SwitchModule  
in slot 10:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 3.10.1 alert_filter enable  
Mau 03.10.1 Alert Filter set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-86 SET BPORT_MAU AUTO_NEGOTIATE  
SET BPORT_MAU  
AUTO_NEGOTIATE  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU AUTO_NEGOTIATE command to enable or disable  
autonegotiation on CoreBuilder 5000 100BASE-TX SwitchModules. By default,  
autonegotiation is enabled on 100BASE-TX SwitchModules.  
The SwitchModule executes the autonegotiation process when you:  
■
■
■
Restart the hub or SwitchModule  
Plug a new connector into a SwitchModule port  
Restart autonegotiation using the SET BPORT_MAU AUTO_NEGOTIATE  
RESTART command  
Format  
set bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
auto_negotiate  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
restart  
slot.port.mau Identifies the port.mau for this operation.  
slot is the slot number (1 through 17) and port (1 through 4) is the port  
number. The mau variable may be 1 (if no additional MAUs are configured)  
or 2 (for redundant ports). For example, to identify port 4 on the module in  
slot 6, enter 6.4.1  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all port.maus in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Disables autonegotiation.  
Enables autonegotiation. Autonegotiation enables the port to:  
Detect whether the device to which it is connected is in half-duplex or  
■
full-duplex mode. The SwitchModule port adjusts its duplex mode to  
match the other device.  
Report an error through the SwitchModule LEDs if the SwitchModule port  
■
cannot connect to the other device.  
restart  
Executes the autonegotiation process on the SwitchModule.  
Example The following command enables autonegotiation on port mau 4 of the  
SwitchModule in slot 6, then executes the autonegotiation process:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 6.4.1 auto_negotiate enable  
CB5000> set bport_mau 6.4.1 auto_negotiate restart  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_MAU AUTO_POLARITY 2-87  
SET BPORT_MAU  
AUTO_POLARITY  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU AUTO_POLARITY command to instruct  
CoreBuilder 5000 10BASE-T SwitchModules to automatically switch the polarity  
of twisted-pair cabling. By default, autopolarity is enabled on 10BASE-T  
SwitchModules.  
Format  
set bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
auto_polarity  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port.mau Identifies the MAU for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the  
port number. Use 1 for the mau variable. For example, to identify a  
MAU on port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4.1  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all MAUs in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Disables autopolarity.  
Enables autopolarity. Autopolarity enables the MAU to automatically  
switch the polarity of twisted-pair cabling. If, for instance, you  
erroneously reverse the polarity of some twisted-pair cabling while  
assembling it, autopolarity enables you to automatically detect this  
problem and reverse the polarity.  
Example The following command disables autopolarity on mau 1 of port 1 on a  
CoreBuilder 5000 10BASE-T SwitchModule in slot 1:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 1.1.1 auto_polarity disable  
Port 01.01 Auto Polarity set to DISABLE.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-88 SET BPORT_MAU CONFIGURATION  
SET BPORT_MAU  
CONFIGURATION  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU CONFIGURATION command to configure the protocol  
you want a 10BASE-FB/FL SwitchModule MAU to use. By default, 10BASE-FB/FL  
SwitchModule MAUs are set to autosense, which detects and adjusts to the  
protocol (either 10BASE-FB or 10BASE-FL) being used on the network.  
Format  
set bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
configuration  
autosense  
fb_force  
slot.all  
fl_force  
slot.port.mau  
Identifies the MAU for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 20) is the  
port number. Use 1 for the mau variable. For example, to identify port  
4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4.1  
slot.all.mau  
fb_force  
Specifies that all MAUs in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Forces the port to always use the 10BASE-FB protocol.  
Forces the port to always use the 10BASE-FL protocol.  
fl_force  
autosense  
Causes the port to detect the protocol in use on the link and adjust to  
match the protocol.  
Example The following command forces mau 1 of port 2 on a 10BASE-FB/FL  
SwitchModule in slot 6 to use the 10BASE-FB protocol:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 6.2.1 configuration fb_force  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_MAU DUPLEX_MODE 2-89  
SET BPORT_MAU  
DUPLEX_MODE  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU DUPLEX_MODE command to enable simultaneous  
two-way data flow on a 100BASE-FX SwitchModule MAU. By default, Fast  
Ethernet SwitchModule ports run in half-duplex mode.  
Full-duplex mode disables Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection  
(CSMA/CD), so enable full-duplex mode only when the SwitchModule MAU is  
connected to a single device (no collision domain exists).  
When autonegotiation is enabled on a 100BASE-TX SwitchModule, 100BASE-TX  
SwitchModule MAUs are capable of changing to full-duplex mode automatically.  
If autonegotiation is disabled on a 100BASE-TX SwitchModule, you can use the  
SET BPORT_MAU DUPLEX_MODE command to manually set the 100BASE-TX  
MAU to full-duplex mode.  
Format  
set bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
duplex_mode  
full  
slot.all  
half  
slot.port.mau  
Identifies the MAU for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 4) is the  
port number. The mau variable may be 1 or 2 (for redundant ports).  
For example, to identify MAU 1 on port 4 on the module in slot 6,  
enter 6.4.1  
slot.all  
full  
Specifies that all MAUs in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Enables full-duplex mode on the MAU.  
half  
Enables half-duplex mode on the MAU.  
Example The following command enables full-duplex mode on mau 1 of port 4 on a  
100BASE-FX SwitchModule in slot 2:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 2.4.1 duplex_mode full  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-90 SET BPORT_MAU HIGH_POWER  
SET BPORT_MAU  
HIGH_POWER  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU HIGH_POWER command to configure high or normal  
power transmission levels on a 10BASE-FB/FL SwitchModule MAU. By default,  
10BASE-FB/FL SwitchModule MAUs transmit at the normal power setting.  
Format  
set bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
high_power  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port.mau  
Identifies the MAU for this operation.  
slot is the slot number and port (1 through 20) is the port number.  
Use 1 as the mau variable. For example, to identify MAU 1 on port 4  
on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4.1  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all MAUs in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Disables high power and enables normal power.  
Enables high power and disables normal power.  
Example The following command enables high power transmission on mau 1 of port 3  
on a 10BASE-FB/FL SwitchModule in slot 5:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 5.3.1 high_power enable  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_MAU LINK_INTEGRITY 2-91  
SET BPORT_MAU  
LINK_INTEGRITY  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU LINK_INTEGRITY command to enable or disable link  
integrity for MAUs on 10BASE-T SwitchModules. By default, link integrity is  
enabled on 10BASE-T SwitchModule MAUs.  
In general, enable link integrity for all MAUs on your 10BASE-T SwitchModule  
as stated in the 10BASE-T standard. You must disable link integrity to connect  
to older non-10BASE-T equipment.  
Not all pre-10BASE-T equipment works with link integrity enabled.  
You must enable or disable link integrity at both ends of the connection. If the  
settings at each end of the connection differ, the MAU with link integrity  
enabled reports a link integrity error.  
Format  
set bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
link_integrity  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port.mau  
Identifies the MAU for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the  
port number. Use 1 as the mau variable. For example, to identify MAU  
1 on port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4.1  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all MAUs in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Disables link integrity.  
Enables link integrity.  
Example The following command disables link integrity on mau 1 on port 1 on the  
10BASE-T module in slot 5:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 5.1.1 link_integrity disable  
Link integrity set to DISABLED.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-92 SET BPORT_MAU PACE_MODE  
SET BPORT_MAU  
PACE_MODE  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU PACE_MODE command to increase Ethernet  
transmission predictability. PACE allows multimedia applications using voice  
®
and video traffic to transmit over standard Ethernet LANs with minimum jitter.  
Enable PACE only on a connection between a SwitchModule MAU and a single  
end-station, switch, bridge, or router. Enable PACE when a SwitchModule MAU  
is connected to a repeater.  
PACE_MODE is available only to the 10BASE-T SwitchModule and to ports 1 to  
16 on the Ethernet Backplane SwitchModule.  
Format  
set bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
pace_mode  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port.mau  
Identifies the MAU for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the  
port number. Use 1 as the mau variable. For example, to identify port  
4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4.1  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all MAUs in the slot are affected by this operation.  
®
Disables PACE. By default, PACE is disabled.  
Enables PACE.  
Example The following command enables PACE on mau 1 of port 1 of the 10BASE-T  
module in slot 2:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 2.1.1 pace_mode enable  
MAU 02.01 PACE Mode set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_MAU MODE 2-93  
SET BPORT_MAU  
MODE  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU MODE command to:  
■
Enable or disable a port MAU at the physical layer  
Create primary and secondary Fast Ethernet ports  
■
This command is most useful on a SwitchModule port that is physically or  
logically configured to have more than one MAU. For example, use this  
command to disable one of the two FDDI port MAUs on a SwitchModule FDDI  
port.  
When used on a port with only one MAU (such as a SwitchModule 10BASE-T  
port), the SET BPORT_MAU MODE command has the same functionality as the  
SET BRIDGE_PORT INTERFACE and SET BRIDGE_PORT STP BRIDGE_MODE  
commands (disables the port).  
After a reset, backplane ports are disabled by default. The only exception to this  
default is if you save the enabled setting to NVRAM on the DMM by entering  
the SAVE command. In this case, after a module reset the backplane port is  
enabled.  
To enable an Ethernet backplane port, enter the command SET BPORT_MAU  
<slot.bport.mau> MODE ENABLE or SET PORT <slot.port> MODE ENABLE. After  
the port is enabled, you can access the corresponding Ethernet backplane.  
When used to create redundant links by configuring Fast Ethernet ports as  
primary and secondary; if the primary port goes down, the secondary port takes  
over and the link remains active.  
You configure redundant pairs as follows:  
■
Ports 1 and 2 are a redundant pair  
Ports 3 and 4 are a redundant pair  
■
When you configure a redundant pair of ports, management programs view the  
two ports as one port with 2 MAUs. To configure redundant ports, use the SET  
BPORT_MAU MODE command. When you define one port as the primary port,  
the second port automatically becomes the backup port.  
Variables PRIMARY and SECONDARY are available only to Fast Ethernet  
SwitchModules.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-94 SET BPORT_MAU MODE  
Format  
set bport_mau  
mode  
slot.port.mau  
disable  
slot.all  
enable  
backup  
primary  
slot.port.mau  
Identifies the MAU for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the  
port number. The mau variable may be 1 or 2 (for redundant ports).  
For example, to identify mau 1 of port 4 on the module in slot 6,  
enter 6.4.1  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all MAUs in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Disables the port MAU.  
Enables the port MAU. This is the default setting when you install the  
module.  
Example This command disables mau2 on port 4.1:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 4.1.2 mode disable  
Mau 04.01.02 Admin State set to DISABLED.  
For the changes to take effect, you must save the configuration and reset the  
SwitchModule. When you reset the SwitchModule, it reconfigures as one logical  
bridge port (port 4.1) on which two MAUs exist.  
To determine which portmau is primary or secondary, enter the SHOW  
BPORT_MAU VERBOSE command and examine the General Information field.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET BPORT_MAU REMOTE_DIAGNOSTICS 2-95  
SET BPORT_MAU  
REMOTE_DIAGNOSTICS  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU REMOTE_DIAGNOSTICS command to enable or  
disable remote diagnostics sensing on a 10BASE-FB/FL SwitchModule port MAUs  
operating in 10BASE-FL mode. Enable remote diagnostics when a 10BASE-FL  
SwitchModule port MAU is connected to a pair of 10BASE-FL ports configured  
for redundancy.  
Remote diagnostics forces a SwitchModule 10BASE-FL port to stop transmitting  
if it stops receiving signalling from a remote primary port. When transmission  
ceases, the remote primary port detects that the link is down and switches to its  
redundant (backup) port, reenabling the fiber link.  
By default, remote diagnostics is disabled.  
Format  
set bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
remote_diagnostics  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port.mau  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 20) is the  
port number. Use 1 as the mau variable. For example, to identify port  
4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4.1  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all ports in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Disables remote diagnostics.  
Enables remote diagnostics.  
Example The following command enables remote diagnostics on 10BASE-FL  
SwitchModule port 4 in slot 5:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 5.4.1 remote_diagnostics enable  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-96 SET BPORT_MAU RESET_MODE  
SET BPORT_MAU  
RESET_MODE  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU RESET_MODE command to:  
■
Create redundant links by configuring SwitchModule ports as primary and  
backup.  
■
Disable redundancy mode on a port pair and return the ports to  
non-redundant mode or enable redundancy mode.  
To determine whether a port is configured as part of a redundant pair, enter the  
SHOW BPORT_MAU command.  
Options DISABLE and ENABLE are available only when a port is operating in  
redundant mode.  
When you configure a redundant pair of ports, management applications view  
the two ports as one port with two MAUs.  
Format  
set bport_mau  
reset_mode  
slot port.mau  
.
backup  
disable  
slot.all  
enable  
primary  
slot.port.mau  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the  
port number. The mau variable may be 1 or 2 (for redundant ports).  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4.1  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports in the slot are affected by this operation.  
backup  
If the primary port goes down; the backup port takes over and the  
link remains active.  
disable  
Disables redundancy mode on a port pair and returns the ports to  
non-redundant mode.  
enable  
Enables port redundancy mode.  
primary  
The active port of the pair of redundant ports.  
Example This command defines port 4.1 as the primary port. Port 4.2 automatically  
becomes the backup port.  
CB5000> set bport_mau 4.1.1 reset_mode primary  
Mau 04.01.01 set to PRIMARY.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BPORT_MAU SQUELCH 2-97  
SET BPORT_MAU  
SQUELCH  
Use the SET BPORT_MAU SQUELCH command to establish Squelch Mode as  
either normal or low for ports on 10BASE-T SwitchModules. By default, the  
squelch level is set to normal to conform to the 10BASE-T standard.  
In general, 3Com recommends using normal squelch. Ensure the squelch level at  
both ends of the link matches. If you change the squelch level at the  
SwitchModule, you must change the squelch setting at the transceiver also.  
If your network experiences too many illegally short packets (runts) in low  
squelch mode, change the setting back to normal.  
Format  
set bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
squelch  
low  
slot.all  
normal  
slot.port.mau  
Selects a port for squelch mode setting.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot ID and port (1 through 24) is the port  
number. Use 1 as the mau variable. For example, to specify port 4 on  
the slot with slot ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Selects a slot for squelch mode setting. For example, to specify all  
ports on the slot with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
low  
Sets squelch mode to low (sensitive). Ports are able to receive weaker  
signals, allowing longer link distances. Increases the achievable link  
distance, but with the added risk of losing packets to impulse noise.  
normal  
Sets squelch mode to normal. Ports receive signals compliant with the  
10BASE-T standard.  
Example The following command sets port 1 in slot 5 to a low squelch level:  
CB5000> set bport_mau 5.1.1 squelch low  
Squelch set to LOW.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_MAU VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-98 SET BRIDGE_PORT INTERFACE  
SET BRIDGE_PORT  
INTERFACE  
Use the SET BRIDGE_PORT INTERFACE command to enable or disable interface  
functions on SwitchModule bridge ports.  
Format  
set bridge_port  
slot.port  
interface  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the port  
number. For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all ports in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Disables interface functions but leaves the physical interface enabled.  
Enables interface functions.  
Example The following command disables port 6 on the SwitchModule in slot 4:  
CB5000> set bridge_port 4.6 interface disable  
Related Commands SET BPORT_MAU MODE  
SET BRIDGE_PORT STP BRIDGE_MODE  
SHOW BRIDGE_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BRIDGE_PORT MONITOR 2-99  
SET BRIDGE_PORT  
MONITOR  
Use the SET BRIDGE_PORT MONITOR command to configure a SwitchModule  
port as a source port in a roving port analysis configuration. When you enter  
the SET BRIDGE_PORT MONITOR command, the port you specify begins to  
mirror traffic to the monitor sink port or backplane you have previously  
specified.  
Format  
set bridge_port  
slot.port  
monitor  
disable  
enable  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the  
port number. For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6,  
enter 6.4  
You can enable traffic monitoring on the following types of ports:  
10 Mbps Ethernet SwitchModule ports.  
■
100 Mbps Ethernet SwitchModule ports when traffic is mirrored to  
■
a local 100 Mbps Ethernet monitor or system sink.  
disable  
enable  
Disables the port from mirroring traffic to the monitor or system sink.  
Enables the port to begin mirroring traffic to the monitor or system  
sink.  
Example The following command enables port 3 on the SwitchModule in slot 2 to mirror  
traffic to a monitor or system sink:  
CB5000> set bridge_port 2.3 monitor enable  
Related Commands SET MODULE MONITOR_SINK  
SET MODULE SYSTEM_SINK  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-100 SET BRIDGE_PORT NAME  
SET BRIDGE_PORT  
NAME  
Use the SET BRIDGE_PORT NAME command to assign a name to a  
SwitchModule bridge port.  
Format  
name  
set bridge_port  
slot.port  
slot.all  
name  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the port  
number. For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter  
6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports in the slot are affected by this operation.  
The name (up to 32 characters) you want to identify this port.  
name  
Example The following command assigns the name finance_1 to port 3 on the  
SwitchModule in slot 5:  
CB5000> set bridge_port 5.3 name finance_1  
Related Command SHOW BRIDGE_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BRIDGE_PORT SMT 2-101  
SET BRIDGE_PORT  
SMT  
Use the SET BRIDGE_PORT SMT command to configure FDDI SwitchModule port  
values. These values affect the FDDI ring Target Token Rotation Time (TTRT).  
Refer to the CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User Guide for more information  
about SwitchModule FDDI port values.  
Format  
set bridge_port  
slot.port  
smt  
tmax_lower_bound  
treq_maximum  
tmax lower bound  
treq maximum  
slot.all  
tvx_lower_bound  
tvx lower bound  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
The maximum port numbers are:  
4 for FDDI SwitchModule (3C96604M-F)  
■
14 for 10BASE-T and FDDI SwitchModule (3C96614M-FTP)  
12 for 10BASE-FB/FL and FDDI SwitchModule (3C96612M-FF)  
■
■
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the  
port number. For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6,  
enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports in the slot are affected by this operation.  
tmax lower bound  
Value from 10.4860 through 1342.1777. The default value is  
167.77216. This value that determines the boundaries for the Treq.  
treq maximum  
Value from 0 through 1342.1777. The default value is 165.00736.  
This is the value that each FDDI station issues for the TTRT election  
process.  
tvx lower bound  
Value from 0.02048 through 5.24288. The default value is 2.519040.  
This value that resets to 0 when the beginning of a frame is detected.  
Example The following command sets the treq_maximum value to 1000 for  
SwitchModule FDDI port 1 in slot 6:  
CB5000> set bridge_port 6.1 smt treq_maximum 1000  
Related Command SHOW BRIDGE_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-102 SET BRIDGE_PORT STP BRIDGE_MODE  
SET BRIDGE_PORT STP  
BRIDGE_MODE  
Use the SET BRIDGE_PORT STP BRIDGE_MODE command to disable the  
Spanning Tree Protocol on a SwitchModule port. Disable Spanning Tree only  
when no physical loops exist, such as when a port is directly connected to an  
end station.  
To determine the current status of Spanning Tree on a port, enter the SHOW  
BRIDGE_PORT VERBOSE command and examine the Bridge Port Mode field.  
Format  
stp  
set bridge_port  
slot.port  
bridge_mode  
disable  
slot.all  
normal  
quick_forward  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the  
port number. For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6,  
enter 6.4  
slot.all  
disable  
normal  
Specifies that all ports in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Disables the Spanning Tree Protocol on a SwitchModule port.  
Enables the Spanning Tree Protocol on a SwitchModule port. By default,  
Spanning Tree is enabled on SwitchModule ports.  
quick_forward  
Quick forwarding causes a port to skip the Listening and Learning states  
and go directly to the Forwarding state. A port in quick forward mode  
still receives and transmits BPDUs and can, if necessary, enter the  
blocking state to prevent loops.  
Example 1 The following command disables Spanning Tree on port 4 of the SwitchModule  
in slot 14:  
CB5000> set bridge_port 14.4 stp bridge_mode disable  
Example 2 The following command configures quick forward mode on a port.  
CB5000> set bridge_port 6.5 stp bridge_mode quick_forward  
Bridge Port 06.05 Bridge Mode set to QUICK_FORWARD. Setting saved.  
This command causes port 6.5 to go directly to the forwarding stage.  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE STP MODE  
SHOW BRIDGE_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BRIDGE_PORT STP PATH_COST 2-103  
SET BRIDGE_PORT STP  
PATH_COST  
Use the SET BRIDGE_PORT STP PATH_COST command to configure a Spanning  
Tree Protocol path cost parameter for a SwitchModule bridge port. For more  
information about Spanning Tree, refer to the CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule  
User Guide.  
Format  
stp  
set bridge_port  
slot.port  
path_cost  
path cost  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the port  
number. For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports in the slot are affected by this operation.  
path cost  
Value from 1 through 65535. The default value is 1000 divided by the speed  
of the link. For example, 1000 divided by FDDI link speed (100 Mbps) equals a  
path cost value of 10.  
Example The following command assigns a path cost value of 65000 to port 12 on the  
SwitchModule in slot 3:  
CB5000> set bridge_port 3.12 stp path_cost 65000  
Related Commands SET BRIDGE_PORT STP PRIORITY  
SHOW BRIDGE_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-104 SET BRIDGE_PORT STP PRIORITY  
SET BRIDGE_PORT STP  
PRIORITY  
Use the SET BRIDGE_PORT STP PRIORITY command to assign a Spanning Tree  
Protocol priority value to a SwitchModule bridge port. For more information  
about Spanning Tree, refer to the CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User Guide.  
Format  
stp  
set bridge_port  
slot.port  
priority  
priority  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the port  
number. For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports in the slot are affected by this operation.  
priority  
Value is an even number from 0 through 254. The default value is 128.  
Example The following command assigns a priority value of 200 to port 10 on the  
SwitchModule in slot 3:  
CB5000> set bridge_port 3.10 stp priority 200  
Related Commands SET BRIDGE_PORT STP PATH_COST  
SHOW BRIDGE_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET BRIDGE_PORT VBRIDGE 2-105  
SET BRIDGE_PORT  
VBRIDGE  
Use the SET BRIDGE_PORT VBRIDGE command to assign a SwitchModule bridge  
port to a virtual bridge or create a new virtual bridge.  
Format  
vbridge  
set bridge_port  
slot.port  
vbridge  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the  
port number. For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6,  
enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports in the slot are affected by this operation.  
vbridge  
Value from 1 through 240. If you assign a vbridge number that is not  
yet used as a virtual bridge number, you create a new virtual bridge  
that is automatically enabled to switch traffic.  
Example The following command assigns all ports on the SwitchModule in slot 3 to  
virtual bridge 2:  
CB5000> set bridge_port 3.all vbridge 2  
Related Commands SHOW VBRIDGE CONFIGURATION  
SHOW BRIDGE_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-106 SET CLOCK  
SET CLOCK  
Use the SET CLOCK command to set the time, date, and day of the DMM’s  
internal clock. Set the internal clock during installation, and then for time  
changes due to daylight savings time (U.S.A.) and leap years. The clock has its  
own battery and keeps time even if power fails.  
The DMM saves the clock information automatically when you set it. You do not  
need to use the SAVE command.  
Format  
set clock  
hh:mm yy/mm/dd day  
hh:mm  
Hours and minutes. hh = 0 through 23; mm = 0 through 59.  
yy/mm/dd  
Year, month, and day.  
yy = 00 through 99, mm = 1 through 12, dd = 1 through 31.  
day  
Day of the week (for example, monday).  
Example The following command sets the internal clock to 05:53 am, for Friday,  
October 8, 1999:  
CB5000> set clock 05:53 99/08/10 friday  
Clock set to 05:53 Fri 08 October 99  
Related Command SHOW CLOCK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET COMMUNITY 2-107  
SET COMMUNITY  
Use the SET COMMUNITY command to create entries in the SNMP community  
table. The SNMP community table defines access privileges for SNMP managers.  
The community table contains a maximum of 10 entries. A community entry  
name cannot exceed 15 characters. Community names are case-sensitive. For  
example, Silver and silver are different community names.  
Format  
all  
all  
set community  
all  
name  
address  
read_only  
read_trap  
read_write  
trap  
all  
Specifies that this operation is to apply to all communities in the  
community table.  
name  
all  
Specifies the name of the community to which this operation applies.  
A wildcard IP address to be added to the community table.  
A specific IP address to be added to the specified community.  
address  
Enter an IP address as a series of four decimal bytes separated by  
periods. For example, 192.122.19.4.  
all  
The community can display and modify DMM monitoring and  
configuration data. Receives alerts from the DMM agent.  
read_only  
read_trap  
read_write  
trap  
The community can display but not modify DMM monitoring and  
configuration data.  
The community can display but not modify DMM monitoring and  
configuration data and receive traps from the DMM agent.  
The community can display and modify DMM monitoring and  
configuration data.  
The community can receive alerts from the DMM agent.  
Example The following command creates a community named public, and specifies that  
all workstations in this community have read_only access to the DMM:  
CB5000> set community public all read_only  
Community set.  
Related Commands CLEAR COMMUNITY  
SHOW COMMUNITY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-108 SET DEVICE CONTACT  
SET DEVICE CONTACT  
Format  
Use the SET DEVICE CONTACT command to enter one line of up to  
78 alphanumeric characters. You can use this command to store a service  
person's name, location, company, and telephone number.  
set device contact  
Example The following command informs the DMM that you want to enter contact  
information:  
CB5000> set device contact  
Enter one line of text:  
>
Enter the desired information such as name, company, and telephone number:  
>Susan Wu, 696-522-1219  
Contact changed.  
Related Commands SAVE DEVICE  
SHOW DEVICE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS 2-109  
SET DEVICE  
DIAGNOSTICS  
Use the SET DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS command to enable or disable diagnostics  
during startup (or reboot) of the DMM. Disabling diagnostics saves time during  
reboot of the DMM, but does not confirm correct operation.  
The factory setting is diagnostics enabled.  
Format  
set device diagnostics  
disable  
enable  
disable  
enable  
Disables diagnostics upon reboot.  
Enables diagnostics upon reboot.  
Example The following command causes diagnostics to run during reset of the DMM:  
CB5000> set device diagnostics enable  
DIAGNOSTICS option ENABLED.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-110 SET DEVICE DIP_CONFIGURATION  
SET DEVICE  
DIP_CONFIGURATION  
Use the SET DEVICE DIP_CONFIGURATION command to select if you want  
media modules in the hub to boot up either:  
■ Under the software settings stored on the DMM that you configured using  
the SET command  
■ Under the hardware DIP switch settings on the module, or, if supported,  
under the software settings stored on the module  
The factory setting is DISABLE. This causes modules to boot using the  
configuration stored on the DMM. This is also the optimal setting for using the  
DMM’s staging feature. Refer to your CoreBuilder 5000 Media Module User  
Guide for more information.  
When the DEVICE DIP_CONFIGURATION command is set to ENABLE, configure  
the media module to boot using DIP switch or NVRAM configuration, whichever  
is supported and preferred. Refer to your CoreBuilder 5000 Media Module User  
Guide for more information.  
When DIP configuration is enabled on CoreBuilder 5000 Token Ring modules,  
and there is a conflict between the ring speed DIP settings on different modules  
set to the same network, there is no way to determine which ring speed will be  
selected. This is because the DMM controls network speed resolution.  
Format  
set device dip_configuration  
disable  
enable  
Indicates in which state you want media modules to boot up:  
Disable (factory setting)  
■
Enable  
■
Example The following command causes media modules to operate from the DMM  
configuration settings rather than the module DIP switch or NVRAM settings:  
CB5000> set device dip_configuration disable  
DIP CONFIGURATION option disabled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET DEVICE LOCATION 2-111  
SET DEVICE LOCATION Use the SET DEVICE LOCATION command to enter one line of up to  
78 alphanumeric characters describing the location of the DMM.  
Format  
set device location  
Example The following command informs the DMM that you want to enter the hub  
location:  
CB5000> set device location  
Enter one line of text:  
>
Enter the desired text:  
>Lisbon, Building 1, Floor 3  
Location changed.  
Related Commands SAVE DEVICE  
SHOW DEVICE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-112 SET DEVICE MAC_ADDR_ORDER  
SET DEVICE  
MAC_ADDR_ORDER  
Use the SET DEVICE MAC_ADDR_ORDER command to specify the bit order in  
which the command interface displays MAC addresses. Token Ring networks  
generally use noncanonical address formats.  
Here is an example of a MAC address in noncanonical format:  
10-00-01-02-03-04  
In canonical format, the same address is:  
08-00-80-40-c0-20  
08 is 10 in reverse bit order  
00 is 00 in reverse bit order  
80 is 01 in reverse bit order  
40 is 02 in reverse bit order  
c0 is 03 in reverse bit order  
20 is 04 in reverse bit order  
Format  
set device mac_addr_order  
canonical  
noncanonical  
canonical  
Sets the command interface to display MAC addresses in canonical  
format.  
noncanonical  
Sets the command interface to display MAC addresses in noncanonical  
format.  
Example The following command sets the command interface to display MAC addresses  
in canonical format:  
CB5000> set device mac_addr_order canonical  
MAC Address Order option set to CANONICAL.  
Related Commands SAVE DEVICE  
SHOW DEVICE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET DEVICE NAME 2-113  
SET DEVICE NAME  
Use the SET DEVICE NAME command to assign the DMM a unique name of up  
to 31 alphanumeric characters. (To make identification of the DMM easier,  
assign the same name to the terminal prompt.)  
Format  
name  
set device name  
name  
The name (up to 31 characters) you want to identify this device.  
Example The following command sets the DMM’s name to Bart:  
CB5000> set device name Bart  
Device name changed.  
Related Commands SAVE DEVICE  
SET TERMINAL PROMPT  
SHOW DEVICE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-114 SET DEVICE RESET_MASTERSHIP  
SET DEVICE  
RESET_MASTERSHIP  
Use the SET DEVICE RESET_MASTERSHIP command to determine if the DMM  
causes a mastership election when inserted into a hub. Because the setting is  
stored in non-volatile RAM, you can set this option in one hub, and set it to  
take effect when you insert the module in a second hub.  
Format  
enable  
disable  
set device reset_mastership  
enable  
disable  
DMM forces a mastership election when introduced into a hub. This may be  
useful if you want the module you are inserting to become the hub master.  
DMM does not force a mastership election. This setting ensures that the  
DMM is a slave when inserted into a hub. This is the default.  
Example The following command causes the DMM to force a mastership election if the  
DMM is removed and inserted into any hub:  
CB5000> set device reset_mastership enable  
RESET MASTERSHIP option enabled.  
Related Commands SAVE DEVICE  
SHOW DEVICE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET DEVICE TRAP_RECEIVE 2-115  
SET DEVICE  
TRAP_RECEIVE  
Use the SET DEVICE TRAP_RECEIVE command to configure the DMM to receive  
alerts (traps) from other SNMP devices on the network. You must also add the  
DMM’s IP address to the community tables of all other SNMP devices.  
Format  
disable  
enable  
set device trap_receive  
disable  
enable  
Disables the trap receive function.  
Enables the trap receive function. The factory setting is enable.  
Example The following command enables the DMM to receive traps from other SNMP  
devices on the network:  
CB5000> set device trap_receive enable  
TRAP option ENABLED.  
Related Commands SAVE DEVICE  
SHOW DEVICE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-116 SET GROUP MODE  
SET GROUP MODE  
Format  
Use the SET GROUP MODE command to enable or disable all the ports in a port  
group.  
set group  
group  
mode  
disable  
enable  
group  
Specifes a group (group1 to group8).  
For example, the command SET GROUP GROUP6 MODE DISABLE  
disables all ports in group6.  
disable  
enable  
Disables all ports in the group.  
Enables all ports in the group.  
Example The following command disables the ports in group4:  
CB5000> set group group4 mode disable  
Port 04.09 set to DISABLED.  
Port 04.10 set to DISABLED.  
Port 04.12 set to DISABLED.  
Related Commands SET GROUP NAME  
SET GROUP PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET GROUP NAME 2-117  
SET GROUP NAME  
Use the SET GROUP NAME command to assign a name (up to 16 alphanumeric  
characters) to a port group. After you assign a group name, you must identify a  
group using this name, not by the group number. For example, if you rename  
Group1 to Eng1, you must refer to the group as Eng1 in future management  
commands.  
Format  
set group  
group  
group  
name  
name  
Specifies a group.  
For example, the command SET GROUP GROUP6 NAME FINANCE renames  
group6 as Finance.  
name  
New name for the group, up to 16 characters in length.  
Example The following command renames group1 to Eng1:  
CB5000> set group group1 name Eng1  
Group1 named to Eng1.  
Related Commands SET GROUP MODE  
SET GROUP PORT  
SHOW GROUP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-118 SET GROUP NETWORK  
SET GROUP NETWORK Use the SET GROUP NETWORK command to assign a port group to a network.  
Format  
set group  
group  
network  
network  
group  
Specifies a group.  
The network to which you are assigning the port groups.  
network  
Example The following command assigns group1 to ethernet 1:  
CB5000> set group group1 network ethernet 1  
Group1 set to Ethernet _1.  
Related Commands SET GROUP MODE  
SET GROUP PORT  
SHOW GROUP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET GROUP PORT 2-119  
SET GROUP PORT  
Use the SET GROUP PORT command to assign ports to a port group. After the  
port groups are established, you can use the SET GROUP MODE command to  
enable or disable all of the ports in a port group.  
Format  
set group  
group  
port  
slot.port  
group  
Specifies a group name.  
slot.port  
Identifies the port to be assigned to the group.  
slot.port identifies the port.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot ID and port is the port number. For  
example, to identify port 4 on the 6, enter 6.4  
Example The following command assigns port 1 on slot 5 to group1:  
CB5000> set group group1 port 5.1  
Port 5.1 set to group1  
Related Commands SET GROUP NAME  
SET GROUP MODE  
SHOW GROUP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-120 SET HOST  
SET HOST  
Use the SET HOST command to assign host names to IP addresses. Doing this  
allows you to use the name or the IP address to identify a device. The host table  
can contain up to 20 entries. You can then use the name in place of the  
address for PING and TELNET commands.  
Format  
set host  
name  
ip address  
name  
The name to associate with the IP address. The name must begin with a  
letter. The remainder of the address can be either letters or numbers.  
ip address  
The IP address. Enter the address as a series of four decimal bytes  
separated by periods. For example, 192.122.19.4.  
Example The following command assigns the name Calvin to IP address 153.17.9.2:  
CB5000> set host Calvin 153.17.9.2  
Host name ip address set.  
Related Commands CLEAR HOST  
SHOW HOST  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET INVENTORY NOTEPAD 2-121  
SET INVENTORY  
NOTEPAD  
Use the SET INVENTORY NOTEPAD command to enter up to 55 characters of  
text in the notepad area that is displayed by the SHOW HUB VERBOSE  
command.  
The SET INVENTORY command is rejected if:  
■ The specified module is an ONline System Concentrator module  
■ The slot/subslot is empty  
■ The CoreBuilder 5000 hub or module's inventory EEPROM is invalid  
Format  
set inventory  
module  
hub  
slot.subslot  
notepad  
slot.subslot  
Identifies the module for this operation.  
Example 1 The following commands enter the installation date for the module in slot 8:  
CB5000> maintain  
>> set inventory module 8.1 notepad  
Enter note-pad: Module installed in hub 10/08/99.  
Do you want to enter this into module 8.1's EEPROM? (y/n) y  
Completed.  
>> boot  
Example 2 The following commands enter a repair date for the hub:  
CB5000> maintain  
>> set inventory hub notepad  
Enter note-pad: Fixed 10/08/99  
Do you want to enter this into the HUB's EEPROM? (y/n) y  
Completed.  
>> boot  
Related Command SHOW INVENTORY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-122 SET IP ACTIVE_ DEFAULT_GATEWAY  
SET IP ACTIVE_  
DEFAULT_GATEWAY  
Use the SET IP ACTIVE_DEFAULT_GATEWAY command to set which default  
gateway is active currently when there are multiple default gateways configured  
for this DMM.  
The active default gateway is the IP address of the gateway (for example, a  
router) that receives and forwards packets whose addresses are unknown to the  
local network. Use the default gateway to communicate with the DMM from  
different IP networks. Use this command to establish the desired active default  
gateway.  
Only one gateway at a time is active. By default, the gateway selected is the  
Default Gateway assigned to the first interface that you assign to a network.  
This Default Gateway assignment changes only when you actively set a default  
gateway or when the interface that determined the Default Gateway loses  
network connectivity. If the DMM loses its connection to the active default  
gateway, it automatically searches all networks until it finds a new valid  
gateway.  
Format  
set ip active_default_gateway  
ip address  
ip address  
Internet Protocol (IP) address in the following format: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn  
Example The following command sets the gateway with the IP address 131.05.08.58 to  
be the active default gateway for the DMM:  
CB5000> set ip active_default_gateway 131.05.08.58  
Active Default Gateway changed.  
Related Commands SET IP DEFAULT_GATEWAY  
SHOW IP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET IP DEFAULT_GATEWAY 2-123  
SET IP  
DEFAULT_GATEWAY  
Use the SET IP DEFAULT_GATEWAY command to specify the IP address of a  
device (usually a router) that forwards packets to destinations other than the  
local IP network.  
Use the SET IP DEFAULT_GATEWAY command to specify a default gateway if the  
DMM will be sending alert packets (SNMP traps) to management workstations  
on other IP networks.  
You must reset the DMM for the new default gateway addresses to take effect.  
Format  
isolated_1 through _11  
token_ring_1 through _10  
ethernet_1 through _8  
ip address  
set ip default_gateway  
fast_ethernet_1 through 4  
all  
vbridge 1 through 240  
ip address  
IP address of the default gateway. Enter the address as a  
series of four decimal bytes separated by periods. For  
example, 192.122.19.4.  
isolated_1 through_11  
Default gateway address applies to an isolated network.  
token_ring_1 through_10  
Default gateway address applies to the specified Token Ring  
network.  
ethernet_1 through_8  
Default gateway address applies to the specified Ethernet  
network.  
fast_ethernet_1 through_4 Default gateway address applies to the specified Fast  
Ethernet network.  
all  
Default gateway address applies to all hub networks.  
vbridge 1 through 240  
Default gateway address applies to a virtual bridge network.  
Example The following command configures a default gateway for virtual bridge 3:  
CB5000> set ip default_gateway 123.123.4.6 vbridge 3  
Default Gateway associated with VBRIDGE 3 set to 123.123.4.6.  
Related Commands SHOW IP  
SET IP ACTIVE_DEFAULT_GATEWAY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-124 SET IP IP_ADDRESS  
SET IP IP_ADDRESS  
Use the SET IP IP_ADDRESS command to set the IP (Internet Protocol) address  
for the DMM. The DMM must have an IP address if you plan in-band or  
SLIP-based management of the hub.  
The IP address is four decimal numbers separated by periods. Each number can  
range from 0 to 255. However, the following addresses are illegal:  
■ 0.0.0.0  
■ 255.255.255.255  
If you do not plan to connect your network to the Internet, you can use any  
address that meets the above requirements.  
If you do plan to connect to the Internet, you must obtain a range of IP  
addresses for use by your organization. To obtain a range of addresses, apply to  
the Network Information Center (NIC):  
■ U.S.A. mail:  
SAIC  
7990 Boeing Court  
Vienna, VA 22183  
ATT: Network Information Center  
U.S.A.  
■ E-mail:  
[email protected]  
[email protected]  
■ Web Site:  
www.nic.mil  
■ Telephone:  
(703) 821-6266 (Outside U.S.A.)  
(800) 365-3642 (U.S.A.)  
3Com factory-sets the DMM with the IP address 127.0.0.1.  
Set only one IP address per DMM. This approach makes IP connections more  
reliable.  
Before you set an IP address for a network, you must set up a subnet mask  
using the SET IP SUBNET_MASK command.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET IP IP_ADDRESS 2-125  
Format  
ip address  
all  
set ip ip_address  
slip  
token_ring_1 through _10  
ethernet_1 through _8  
fast_ethernet_1 through_4  
isolated_1 through _11  
isolated  
vbridge 1 through 240  
ip address  
IP address of the DMM. Enter the address as a series of four  
decimal bytes separated by periods. For example,  
192.122.19.4.  
all  
Specifies that the DMM use this IP address on all hub  
networks.  
slip  
Specifies that the DMM use this IP address on SLIP  
connections.  
token_ring_1 through 10 Specifies that the DMM use this IP address on the token ring  
network.  
ethernet_1 through 8  
Specifies that the DMM use this IP address on the Ethernet  
network.  
fast_ethernet_1 through 4 Specifies that the DMM use this IP address on the Fast  
Ethernet network.  
isolated_1 through 11  
isolated  
Specifies that the DMM use this IP address on the specified  
isolated network.  
Specifies that the DMM use this IP address on the isolated  
network.  
vbridge 1 through 240  
Specifies that the DMM uses this IP address on a virtual  
bridge.  
Example The following command assigns an IP address to the DMM for the token_ring_1  
network:  
CB5000> set ip ip_address 151.5.31.60 token_ring_1  
IP Address associated with token_ring_1 set to 151.5.31.60.  
Related Commands SAVE IP  
SHOW IP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-126 SET IP SUBNET_MASK  
SET IP SUBNET_MASK  
Use the SET IP SUBNET_MASK command to specify the subnet mask used for  
your class of Internet device.  
In general, the subnet mask defines the network portion (which is masked) from  
the host portion of the decimal dot notation IP address. The host address is the  
group of unique characters on the right (Host ID).  
Format  
all  
set ip subnet_mask  
mask  
slip  
token_ring_1 through _10  
ethernet_1 through _8  
fast_ethernet_1 through _8  
isolated_1 through _11  
isolated  
vbridge 1 through 240  
mask  
all  
Mask in hexadecimal bytes (xx.xx.xx.xx).  
Specifies that the DMM use this subnet mask on all networks.  
slip  
Specifies that the DMM use this subnet mask on SLIP  
connections.  
token_ring_1 through_10  
ethernet_1 through_8  
Specifies that the DMM use this subnet mask on the token  
ring network.  
Specifies that the DMM use this subnet mask on the Ethernet  
network.  
fast_ethernet_1 through_8 Specifies that the DMM use this subnet mask on the Fast  
Ethernet network.  
isolated_1 through_11  
isolated  
Specifies that the DMM use this subnet mask on the specifed  
isolated network.  
Specifies that the DMM use this subnet mask on the isolated  
network.  
vbridge 1 through 240  
Specifies that the DMM use this subnet mask on virtual  
bridge networks.  
Example The following command sets the subnet mask for a class C device for all  
networks:  
CB5000> set ip subnet_mask FF.FF.FF.0 all  
Device subnet mask changed.  
Related Commands SET IP DEFAULT_GATEWAY  
SET IP IP_ADDRESS  
SHOW IP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET LOGIN 2-127  
SET LOGIN  
Use the SET LOGIN command to add users to and change passwords for the  
CoreBuilder 5000 command interface. Any user can use this command to  
modify his or her own password. You must be logged in as super user to use  
this feature to create new logins.  
The DMM allows up to 10 login names, so that you can authorize several users  
with differing privileges. Passwords are case sensitive (that is, myname and  
MYNAME are two different passwords).  
You can assign user names at three access levels.  
Newly set passwords are effective immediately. You are not prompted for a  
password until you log out and then try to log back in. You must enter the  
SAVE LOGIN command for the new user login names to be permanently saved.  
If you lose or forget a user password, the super user can use the CLEAR LOGIN  
and SET LOGIN commands to remove, then re-create the user name.  
The factory setting is a single super-user account with the user name system  
and no password.  
A newly created login account is not available for use until you save it.  
Format  
set login  
user  
administrator  
super_user  
password  
access  
super_user  
user  
Creates a user login.  
The user can use the following commands:  
All SHOW commands  
■
(except SHOW COMMUNITY)  
CLEAR RMON  
■
CLEAR COUNTERS  
■
SET RMON  
■
MONITOR  
■
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-128 SET LOGIN  
administrator  
Creates an administrator login.  
The administrator can use all user login commands plus the following  
commands:  
All SET commands  
■
(except SET COMMUNITY, SET LOGIN, and SET IP)  
All CLEAR commands  
■
(except CLEAR LOGIN and CLEAR COMMUNITY)  
TELNET  
■
MAINTAIN  
■
DOWNLOAD  
■
RESET  
■
All REVERT and SAVE commands  
■
(except COMMUNITY, LOGIN, and IP)  
super_user  
password  
Creates a super-user login. The super user can use all commands.  
Changes the password of the current user.  
access  
super_user  
Because the DMM allows only one super-user login at a time, the  
software includes a special SET LOGIN ACCESS SUPER_USER command. If  
a super user logs in and is granted only user privileges, that user can  
issue the SET LOGIN ACCESS SUPER_USER command with the following  
implications:  
The current super user is logged out of the DMM.  
■
The super user who enters the command immediately assumes  
■
super-user privileges.  
The new super user assumes responsibility for all unsaved changes  
■
from the logged out super-user session.  
This command can also be used to override sessions where  
communications have failed, but the super user remains logged in.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET LOGIN 2-129  
Example 1 The following command allows a super user to establish a new administrator  
name and password:  
CB5000> set login administrator  
You are prompted as follows:  
Enter current session password for user “admin”:{enter password}  
Enter Login Name: {enter name you select}  
Enter Login Password: {enter new password}  
Verify - re-enter password:{re-enter password}  
Login successfully entered.  
Login account will not be activated until it is saved.  
Example 2 The following command changes the password of the user logged in currently:  
CB5000> set login password  
You are prompted as follows:  
Enter current password for user “system”: {enter password}  
Enter your password:  
New password: {enter new user password}  
Verify: {re-enter new user password}  
User password changed.  
Related Commands CLEAR LOGIN  
SAVE LOGIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-130 SET MODULE ANALYZER  
SET MODULE  
ANALYZER  
Use the SET MODULE ANALYZER command when setting up a roving port  
analysis configuration on a CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule. The SET MODULE  
ANALYZER command specifies the port or processor you want to use as the  
analyzer (destination) for mirrored traffic.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
analyzer  
port  
local_port  
processor  
system_analyzer  
none  
slot.1  
1 through 17. Indicates the slot number of the module you are  
configuring.  
local_port  
Specifies that the module mirrors packets to a port on the same  
module.  
port  
1 through 24. Specifies the port you want to define as the local_port.  
analyzer  
Specifies that the module mirrors traffic across the PacketChannel  
backplane to the port you enable as the system analyzer.  
processor  
none  
Specifies that the module mirrors traffic to across the PacketChannel  
backplane to the SwitchModule processor you enable as the system  
analyzer.  
Specifies no traffic.  
Example The following command configures port 2 on the SwitchModule in slot 6 as the  
analyzer:  
CB5000> set module 6.1 analyzer local_port 2  
Module 06 Analyzer set to BRIDGE PORT 2  
Related Commands SET BRIDGE_PORT MONITOR  
SET MODULE SYSTEM_ANALYZER  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE ARP_RESOLVE_ METHOD 2-131  
SET MODULE  
ARP_RESOLVE_  
METHOD  
Use the SET MODULE ARP_RESOLVE_METHOD command to specify whether  
routing information is included in Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) requests  
sent by the Token Ring Network Monitor Card (TR-NMC).  
Format  
arp_resolve_method  
slot.2  
set module  
non_source_route  
source_route  
slot.2  
Selects the TR-NMC for which you want to enable or disable  
routing information in ARP requests. Valid values are hub slot 1  
through 17, subslot 2.  
non_source_route  
source_route  
TR-NMC does not include the routing information (RI) field in ARP  
requests.  
TR-NMC includes the routing information (RI) field in ARP requests.  
This is the factory-default setting.  
Example The following command includes routing information in ARP requests sent from  
the TR-NMC in slot 3.2:  
CB5000> set module 3.2 arp_resolve_method source_route  
ARP resolve method set to source_route.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-132 SET MODULE AUTOPARTITION_ THRESHOLD  
SET MODULE  
AUTOPARTITION_  
THRESHOLD  
Use the SET MODULE AUTOPARTITION_THRESHOLD command to assign the  
number of collisions the DMM allows before automatically partitioning a port.  
This command is available for the 3Com ONline 24-port 10BASE-T Module  
and the 12-port 10BASE-T Module.  
The factory default is 63, which is the proper setting for most environments.  
The 10BASE-T specification lists a minimum of 31 collisions prior to partitioning,  
but 31 collisions can cause ports to partition more frequently than necessary.  
The additional options (127 and 255) are for debugging purposes, and therefore  
not recommended for use in live networks.  
This command is not available for use with the CoreBuilder 5000 24-Port,  
20-Port, 40-Port, 36-Port 10BASE-T Modules or the EtherFlex Module.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
autopartition_threshold  
threshold  
slot.1  
Selects a module for setting the autopartition threshold. Valid values  
are slot 1 through 17, subslot 1.  
threshold  
Sets the autopartition threshold:  
31_collision  
■
63_collisions  
■
127_collisions  
■
255_collisions  
■
Example The following command sets the collision threshold of the ONline 24-port  
Module in slot 7 to a maximum of 63 collisions. If this threshold is exceeded for  
a port, that port is partitioned.  
CB5000> set module 7.1 autopartition_threshold 63_collisions  
Auto-partition threshold set to 63 COLLISIONS.  
Related Commands SHOW PORT  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE BCN_THRESHOLD 2-133  
SET MODULE  
BCN_THRESHOLD  
Use the SET MODULE BCN_THRESHOLD to set the number of times that a  
CoreBuilder 5000 Token Ring port, which was removed from the ring by beacon  
recovery software, is allowed to reenter the ring.  
The CoreBuilder 5000 hub implements beacon recovery by wrapping ports as  
needed. The port is unwrapped when a transition of phantom is detected.  
The beacon threshold is the number of times that a phantom transition is  
allowed to cause a port to unwrap. When the threshold is exceeded, the port  
remains wrapped, with a status of BCN THRES ERROR, until you disable and  
then reenable the port.  
The threshold is reset whenever a port successfully inserts into the ring, or when  
the module is reset.  
This command is not available if beacon recovery is disabled (SET NETWORK  
TOKEN_RING BCN_RECOVERY).  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
bcn_threshold  
threshold  
slot.1  
Identifies the module for this operation.  
threshold  
Number of phantom transitions caused by beaconing to allow before the  
DMM shuts down the port.  
threshold = 0 through 255. The factory setting is 7.  
Example The following command sets the beacon threshold to 2:  
CB5000> set module 4.1 bcn_threshold 2  
Threshold set to 2.  
Related Commands SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING BCN_RECOVERY  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-134 SET MODULE CABLE_IMPEDANCE  
SET MODULE  
CABLE_IMPEDANCE  
Use the SET MODULE CABLE_IMPEDANCE command to set the impedance level  
for Token Ring module lobe ports. This command is available for the 3Com  
ONline 20-Port Token Ring Module.  
The impedance level for unshielded cable is usually 100 ohms. The impedance  
level for shielded cable is usually 150 ohms.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
cable_impedance  
impedance  
slot.1  
Selects a module to set impedance levels.  
Sets the impedance level. Valid values are:  
impedance  
100ohm  
■
150ohm  
■
Example The following command sets the cable impedance of the module in slot 1 to  
100 ohms:  
CB5000> set module 1.1 cable_impedance 100ohm  
Cable impedance set to 100 OHM.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE CONNECTOR_ NETWORK 2-135  
SET MODULE  
CONNECTOR_  
NETWORK  
Use the SET MODULE CONNECTOR_NETWORK command to assign a connector  
to a network. This command is available for the ONline 24-Port 10BASE-T  
Module and CoreBuilder 5000 connector-switched modules.  
The connector-switched modules provide bank-level configuration flexibility  
using the TriChannel™ architecture. You can assign either of the two 50-pin  
connectors (36-Port Module has three 50-pin connectors), or the entire module,  
to any of the Ethernet networks available for modules (or isolated) on the  
CoreBuilder 5000 backplane.  
For example, with the ONline 24-Port 10BASE-T Module, assigning one  
connector to ISOLATED_1 and the other connector to ISOLATED_2 creates two  
isolated 12-port subnetworks. Assigning both connectors to the same isolated  
network creates a single 24-port isolated network.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
connector_  
connector  
_network  
network  
slot.1  
Selects a module to assign. Valid values are hub slot 1 through 17,  
subslot 1.  
connector  
network  
Selects the connector to which this command applies. Valid values are  
1, 2 or 3.  
Selects a network to assign the connector to. Valid values are:  
ethernet_1 through ethernet_8  
■
isolated_1 though isolated_8  
■
Example The following command sets all ports associated with connector 1 on the  
24-Port 10BASE-T Module in slot 7 to Ethernet network 3:  
CB5000> set module 7.1 connector_1_network ethernet_3  
Module 7.01 connector 1 network ID set to ETHERNET 3.  
Related Commands SET MODULE  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-136 SET MODULE CROSSOVER  
SET MODULE  
CROSSOVER  
Use the SET MODULE CROSSOVER command to enable or disable crossover  
mode for port 8 of ONline Ethernet 10BASE-T Modules  
(Model Numbers 5108M-TP and 5108M-UTP).  
Enabling crossover mode allows you to connect port 8 of the ONline 10BASE-T  
module directly to a 10BASE-T transceiver. This is the default setting for all  
10BASE-T ports.  
To connect port 8 of the ONline 10BASE-T module directly to any port on  
another 10BASE-T module or 10BASE-T hub, disable crossover mode.  
When connecting two 10BASE-T modules, one port must be crossed over and  
the other port must be uncrossed. You can achieve this by using port 8 on one  
of the modules and disabling crossover, or by leaving crossover enabled and  
using an external crossover adapter.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
crossover  
disable  
enable  
slot.1  
Selects the module for which you want to enable or disable crossover  
mode. Valid values are hub slot 1 through 17, subslot 1.  
Enables or disables crossover mode for the chosen port. Valid values are:  
disable  
■
enable  
■
Example The following command sets the crossover mode of the module in slot 1 to  
enable:  
CB5000> set module 1.1 crossover enable  
Crossover set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE DLM_MODE 2-137  
SET MODULE  
DLM_MODE  
Use the SET MODULE DLM_MODE command to enable or disable DLM  
(Dynamically Loadable Module) mode on an A-ENMC. You must enable DLM  
mode before the A-ENMC can run DLMs. The factory default is DLM mode  
disabled.  
Format  
set module  
slot.subslot  
dlm_mode  
disable  
enable  
slot.subslot  
Identifies the slot and subslot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number in the hub and subslot (2 through 7) is  
the subslot number on the module in the specified slot. For example, to  
identify subslot 4 of slot 15, enter 15.4  
disable  
enable  
Disables DLM mode.  
Enables DLM mode.  
Example The following command enables DLM mode on the A-ENMC in subslot 4 of the  
module in slot 15:  
CB5000> set module 15.4 dlm_mode enable  
Related Command SHOW DLM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-138 SET MODULE DOT5_GROUP  
SET MODULE  
DOT5_GROUP  
Use the SET MODULE DOT5_GROUP command to enable or disable Token Ring  
(dot5) statistics collection as defined in the IEEE 802.5 Token Ring Management  
Information Base (MIB). This command applies to the Token Ring Network  
Monitor Card (TR-NMC).  
Format  
set module  
slot.2  
dot5_group  
disable  
enable  
slot.2  
Selects the TR-NMC on which you want to enable or disable Token Ring  
(dot5) statistics collection. Valid values are hub slot 1 through 17,  
subslot 2.  
Enables or disables Token Ring (dot5) statistics collection for the chosen TR-NMC. Valid  
values are:  
disable  
■
enable  
■
Example The following command enables IEEE 802.5 MIB statistics collection on the  
TR-NMC in slot 3.2:  
CB5000> set module 3.2 dot5_group enable  
Module Group set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SHOW COUNTER  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE EARLY_TOKEN_ RELEASE 2-139  
SET MODULE  
EARLY_TOKEN_  
RELEASE  
Use the SET MODULE EARLY_TOKEN_RELEASE command to enable or disable  
early token release (ETR) mode on the Token Ring Network Monitor Card  
(TR-NMC).  
Early token release allows a transmitting adapter to release a new token as soon  
as it has completed frame transmission, whether or not the frame header has  
returned to that adapter. This option is valid for 16 Mbps Token Ring networks  
only.  
Format  
set module  
slot.2  
early_token_release  
disable  
enable  
slot.2  
Selects the TR-NMC on which you want to enable or disable early token  
release mode. Valid values are hub slot 1 through 17, subslot 2.  
Enables or disables early token release mode for the chosen TR-NMC. Valid values are:  
disable  
■
enable  
■
Example The following command enables early token release mode on the TR-NMC in  
slot 3.2:  
CB5000> set module 3.2 early_token_release enable  
Early token release set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-140 SET MODULE EXTERNAL_WRAP  
SET MODULE  
EXTERNAL_WRAP  
Use the SET MODULE EXTERNAL_WRAP command to enable or disable external  
wrap mode on the Token Ring Network Monitor Card (TR-NMC).  
An External Wrap Test performs a lobe wrap out to the cable, but the system  
does not insert the adapter (phantom not raised). This feature is provided for  
diagnostic use.  
Disable the TR-NMC interface before changing this setting.  
Format  
set module  
slot.2  
external_wrap  
enable  
disable  
slot.2  
Selects the TR-NMC on which you want to enable or disable external  
wrap mode. Valid values are hub slot 1 through 17, subslot 2.  
Enables or disables external wrap mode for the chosen port. Valid values are:  
disable  
■
enable  
■
Example The following command enables external wrap mode on the TR-NMC in  
slot 3.2:  
CB5000> set module 3.2 external_wrap enable  
External wrap set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SET MODULE INTERFACE  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE FIFO_FILL_LEVEL 2-141  
SET MODULE  
FIFO_FILL_LEVEL  
Use the SET MODULE FIFO_FILL_LEVEL command to change the FIFO fill level.  
This command applies only to certain older ONline Ethernet Twisted Pair  
Modules (Model Number 5108M-UTP).  
The FIFO fill level controls the number of received bits loaded into the internal  
FIFO buffer before the bits are unloaded. The factory-set FIFO fill level is 8 bits.  
To increase the achievable link distance by approximately 20 meters, set the FIFO  
fill level to 7 bits (a savings of one bit or 100 ns). This savings allows connection  
to a device that might be too far away otherwise. However, if jitter is a  
problem, set the FIFO fill level to 8 bits.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
fifo_fill_level  
number of bits  
slot.1  
Selects the module for which you want to set the fill level. Valid values are  
hub slot 1 through 17, subslot 1.  
number of bits Sets the number of bits. Valid values are 7 and 8.  
Example The following command sets the FIFO fill level for the module in slot 1 to 7:  
CB5000> set module 1.1 fifo_fill_level 7  
Fifo fill level set to 7.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-142 SET MODULE HOST_STATISTICS  
SET MODULE  
HOST_STATISTICS  
Use the SET MODULE HOST_STATISTICS command to enable RMON host  
statistics collection on an Ethernet Network Monitor Card (ENMC).  
The SET MODULE HOST_STATISTICS command enables or disables RMON host  
statistics collection on an Ethernet Network Monitor Card. Disabling RMON host  
statistics collection frees ENMC resources for other tasks. The default setting is  
disabled.  
Format  
set module  
slot.subslot  
host_statistics  
enable  
disable  
slot.subslot  
Selects the ENMC on which you want to enable or disable RMON host  
statistics collection. Valid values are hub slot 1 through 17, subslot 2  
through 7.  
Enables or disables RMON host statistics collection. Valid values are:  
disable  
■
enable  
■
Example The following command enables RMON statistics collection on the ENMC in  
subslot 4 of the DMM-EC in slot 15:  
CB5000> set module 15.4 host_statistics enable  
Rmon hosts table for module 15.04 set to ENABLE.  
Related Commands SET MODULE PROBE_MODE  
SHOW RMON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE IGMP_SNOOPING 2-143  
SET MODULE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
Use the SET MODULE IGMP_SNOOPING command to enable or disable IGMP  
Snooping on a module. After you enter this command, it does not take affect  
until the module is rebooted. The sole purpose of this command is to allow the  
FTE based modules to share FTE Forwarding memory based on snooping versus  
non-snooping bridges.  
Format  
igmp_snooping  
enable  
disable  
set module  
slot.subslot  
slot.1  
Selects the module on which you want to enable or disable IGMP  
snooping. Valid values are hub slot 1 through 17, subslot 1.  
enable  
disable  
Enables IGMP snooping on the specifed module.  
Disables IGMP snooping on the specifed module.  
Example The following command enables IGMP Snooping on the module in slot 15:  
CB5000> set module 15.1 igmp_snooping enable  
IGMP Snooping set to ENABLED.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-144 SET MODULE INTERFACE  
SET MODULE  
INTERFACE  
Use the SET MODULE INTERFACE command to enable or disable the network  
interface on Network Monitor Cards.  
The A-ENMC has two network interfaces.  
Before you enable an interface:  
■ Assign the Network Monitor Card (or A-ENMC interface) to a network  
■ Set IP parameters for the network it is assigned to (using SET IP commands)  
This command allows you to set certain NMCs to be active, while others are set  
explicitly to standby mode.  
This option is not available when the TR-NMC is installed on a module-switched  
Token Ring module. If you want an NMC to act as a standby for a module  
installed on a module-switched module, you must set the standby module  
(residing on another host card) to the same network.  
Format  
module_interface_n  
set module  
slot.subslot  
interface  
enable  
disable  
standby  
slot.subslot  
Selects the NMC you want to enable, disable, or set to standby. Valid  
values are hub slot 1 through 17, subslot 2 through 7.  
module_interface_n Selects one of the two interfaces on the A-ENMC. This command  
option is available only if the subslot you entered contains an  
A-ENMC.  
n = 1 or 2  
enable  
disable  
standby  
Enables interface on the network it is assigned to.  
Disconnects the interface from a network.  
Interface assumes role of any failed (hardware failure, host module  
removed) or too heavily burdened active Network Monitor Card of  
the same protocol. When activated, the standby card assumes all IP  
parameters, and begins to monitor statistics on the network to which  
the now inactive card had been assigned. A TR-NMC in this state is  
not inserted in the ring or included in ring maps.  
Example 1 The following command enables the ENMC in subslot 4 of the DMM-EC in  
slot 15:  
CB5000> set module 15.4 interface enable  
Interface Mode set to ENABLED.  
Example 2 The following command enables slot 5, subslot 1, A-ENMC interface 2:  
CB5000> set module 5.1 module_interface_2 interface enable  
Related Commands SET MODULE NETWORK  
SET IP  
SHOW INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE INTERNAL_WRAP 2-145  
SET MODULE  
INTERNAL_WRAP  
Use the SET MODULE INTERNAL_WRAP command to enable or disable internal  
wrap mode on the Token Ring Network Monitor Card (TR-NMC).  
Use this command to indicate whether or not this module's Token Ring adapter  
performs an Internal Wrap Test, which wraps data internal to the Token Ring  
adapter (MAC Wrap). This feature is provided for diagnostic use.  
Format  
set module  
slot.2  
internal_wrap  
setting  
slot.2  
Selects the TR-NMC on which you want to enable or disable internal  
wrap mode. Valid values are hub slot 1 through 17, subslot 2.  
setting  
Enables or disables internal wrap mode for the chosen port. Valid values  
are:  
disable  
■
enable  
■
Example The following command enables internal wrap mode on the TR-NMC in slot 3.2:  
CB5000> set module 3.2 internal_wrap enable  
Internal wrap set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-146 SET MODULE LOCALLY_ ADMINISTERED_ ADDRESS  
SET MODULE  
LOCALLY_  
ADMINISTERED_  
ADDRESS  
Use the SET MODULE LOCALLY_ADMINISTERED_ADDRESS command to specify  
a locally administered MAC address for a TR-NMC. The TR-NMC rejects the  
command if you specify an illegal address (for example, if the MAC address you  
enter is a broadcast address or if the locally-administered bit is not 1).  
Format  
set module  
slot.2  
locally_administered_address  
mac address  
slot.2  
Identifies the TR-NMC for this operation.  
mac address  
New locally administered MAC address for the identified hub. Enter the  
address as a series of six hexadecimal bytes separated by hyphens (for  
example, 10-00-f1-0f-0c-63). This address must be unique on your  
network.  
Example The following command sets the MAC address of the module in slot 2.2 to a  
new value:  
CB5000> set module 2.2 locally_administered_address  
48-03-e3-8f-02-00  
Locally administered address set.  
Related Commands SET MODULE MAC_ADDRESS_TYPE  
SHOW MODULE VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE LOW_LIGHT_WARNING 2-147  
SET MODULE  
LOW_LIGHT_WARNING  
Use the SET MODULE LOW_LIGHT_WARNING command to enable a warning  
when the light level received is weak. This command pertains to the ONline  
Ethernet Fiber Modules (Model Number 5104M-FIB) only.  
A low light condition does not affect network operation. Enable low light  
detection during system setup to see if any fiber connections are close to  
reaching their distance limits. If they are, the status LED on the Ethernet Fiber  
module blinks 6 times to indicate the condition, and the status is reported to  
the DMM. After the network is running successfully, there is less need for this  
type of detection.  
You can disable the low light detection if you are aware that the light level is  
low, but prefer not to have a blinking status indicator signaling the condition.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
low_light_warning  
setting  
slot.1  
The slot and subslot containing the module you are sending this  
command to.  
setting  
The possible settings are:  
enable  
■
disable  
■
Example The following command enables the low light warning on the module in slot 1:  
CB5000> set module 1.1 low_light_warning enable  
Low-light warning set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-148 SET MODULE MAC_ADDRESS_TYPE  
SET MODULE  
MAC_ADDRESS_TYPE  
Use the SET MODULE MAC_ADDRESS_TYPE command to specify whether a  
TR-NMC is to use its factory-set MAC address (burned_in) or a user-defined  
MAC address (locally_administered).  
The DMM rejects this command if the MAC address to be used is an illegal  
value.  
Format  
set module  
slot.2  
mac_address_type  
burned_in  
locally_administered  
slot.2  
Identifies the TR-NMC for this operation.  
Selects the factory-set MAC address.  
burned_in  
The factory setting is for the TR-NMC to use its factory-set MAC  
address rather than a locally administered MAC address.  
locally_administered  
Selects the locally administered MAC address.  
Example The following command specifies that the TR-NMC in slot 7.2 use the  
factory-set MAC address:  
CB5000> set module 7.2 mac_address_type burned_in  
Mac address set to burned_in.  
Related Commands SET MODULE LOCALLY_ADMINISTERED_ ADDRESS  
SHOW MODULE VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE MAC_PATH 2-149  
SET MODULE  
MAC_PATH  
Use the SET MODULE MAC_PATH command to change the transmission path  
through the ONline FDDI Management Modules.  
This command allows you to switch from the Primary FDDI ring to the  
Secondary FDDI ring. This has the same effect as physically switching the A and  
B port connections.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
mac_path  
primary  
secondary  
slot.1  
Hub slot containing the FDDI module you are configuring.  
primary  
Switches port from the secondary ring to the primary  
ring.  
secondary  
Switches port from the primary ring to the secondary  
ring.  
Example The following command establishes a secondary backplane path for an FDDI  
module in slot 10:  
CB5000> set module 10.1 mac_path secondary  
Mac path set to secondary.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-150 SET MODULE MASTERSHIP_PRIORITY  
SET MODULE  
MASTERSHIP_PRIORITY  
Use the SET MODULE MASTERSHIP_PRIORITY command to establish the order in  
which installed management modules assume command of the hub when the  
current hub master fails or resigns.  
A master management module has configuration control, management  
responsibilities, and fault detection capabilities for the entire hub. This command  
allows you to assign a priority level to your management modules.  
The management module with the highest priority is elected as a master for  
that hub. Set the master DMM to the highest priority level, which is 10. This  
causes other management modules in the hub to become stand-bys  
(CoreBuilder 5000) or slaves (ONline). If you assign the same mastership priority  
to two DMMs in the same hub, the election for a master is arbitrary.  
CoreBuilder 5000 DMMs always assume mastership over ONline management  
modules.  
Mastership election completion time is dependent on a management module's  
mastership priority setting. Set a master DMM to 10 and standby DMMs to  
mastership priority values of 7, 8, or 9 to facilitate the election process.  
SET MODULE MASTERSHIP_PRIORITY sets the mastership priority. You must  
enter the RESET MASTERSHIP command if you want to force election of a new  
hub master.  
Format  
set module  
slot.subslot  
mastership_priority  
priority  
slot.subslot  
The slot of the DMM you are changing the mastership priority for:  
DMM - slot.1  
■
DMM-EC - slot.8  
■
ADMM - slot.2  
■
priority  
The election priority that the module has during a mastership election.  
Valid values are 1 through 10, with 10 being the highest priority. The  
default is 10.  
Example The following command sets the mastership priority level for the module in  
slot 6 to level 1:  
CB5000> set module 6.1 mastership_priority 1  
Mastership priority set to 1.  
Related Command RESET MASTERSHIP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE MAXIMUM_VBRIDGE 2-151  
SET MODULE  
MAXIMUM_VBRIDGE  
Use the SET MODULE MAXIMUM_VBRIDGE command to adjust the maximum  
number of virtual bridges you can use on a CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule.  
The max vbridge values you can assign depend in part on the memory model  
setting you configure for the Switchmodule. If you set memory model to Small,  
you cannot set max vbridge to 256. All other max vbridge assignments are valid  
for any memory model setting.  
To assign a max vbridge value of 256, the SwitchModule must have an installed  
8 MB or 16 MB memory upgrade SIMM.  
You must save the setting and reboot the SwitchModule for the change to take  
effect.  
For more information about configuring the maximum vbridge value, refer to  
CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User Guide.  
the  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
maximum_vbridge  
max vbridge  
slot.1  
Slot containing the SwitchModule you are configuring.  
max vbridge  
Value that is a power of 2. The following values are valid: 1, 2, 4, 8,  
16, 32, 64, 128, and 256.  
The default setting is 32.  
Example The following command configures module 6 to the specified vbridge setting.  
You must reset the SwitchModule using the RESET MODULE command for the  
maximum vbridge change to take effect. The system displays the warning  
message in the example to remind you to reset the module.  
CB5000> set module 6.1 maximum_vbridge 256  
Administrative Maximum Vbridge set to 256  
Warning: change does not take effect until module is reset.  
CB5000> save all  
Related Commands SHOW MODULE  
SET MODULE MEMORY_MODEL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-152 SET MODULE MEMORY_MODEL  
SET MODULE  
MEMORY_MODEL  
Use the SET MODULE MEMORY_MODEL command to adjust the amount of  
DRAM (dynamic random access memory) that a CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule  
allocates to address learning and to RMON. Increasing the setting increases the  
table capacity for RMON processing on the SwitchModule.  
You must save the setting and reboot the SwitchModule for the change to take  
effect.  
For more information about altering the memory module setting, refer to the  
CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User Guide.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
memory_model  
small  
medium  
large  
slot.1  
Slot containing the SwitchModule you are configuring.  
DRAM allocation for address learning and RMON = 3.5 MB.  
small  
This is the default setting. No memory upgrade SIMM necessary to use  
this setting.  
If you set memory model to Small, you cannot set the maximum  
virtual bridge to a value to greater than 128 for this SwitchModule.  
medium  
large  
DRAM allocation for address learning and RMON = 3.0 MB.  
No memory upgrade SIMM necessary to use this setting.  
DRAM allocation for address learning and RMON = 2.0 MB.  
You can set the memory model to Large only if you have installed an  
8 MB or 16 MB memory upgrade SIMM on the SwitchModule.  
Example The following command changes the memory model setting to medium for the  
SwitchModule in slot 5:  
CB5000> set module 5.1 memory_model medium  
CB5000> save all  
Related Commands SHOW MODULE  
SET MODULE MAXIMUM_VBRIDGE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE MODULE_BYPASS 2-153  
SET MODULE  
MODULE_BYPASS  
Use the SET MODULE MODULE_BYPASS command to insert or bypass ONline  
Token Ring MAU Modules in a ring.  
You must use this command to insert the module into the ring initially. When  
you insert a Token Ring module in a hub with an active network management  
module, the module is automatically placed into bypass mode so that  
unauthorized users cannot insert into the network.  
Refer to the specific Token Ring Installation Guide for more information on  
insert and bypass mode.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
module_bypass  
bypass  
insert  
slot.1  
Slot containing the Token Ring module you are configuring.  
bypass  
Traffic still goes through the Ring-In and Ring-Out ports on the  
module, but does not travel to the eight media ports.  
insert  
Insert Token Ring modules into the ring to which the Ring-In and  
Ring-Out cables are connected.  
Example The following command inserts the Token Ring MAU Module in slot 5 into the  
ring it is connected to:  
CB5000> set module 5.1 module_bypass insert  
Module 5.01 INSERTED.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-154 SET MODULE MONITOR_ CONTENTION  
SET MODULE  
MONITOR_  
CONTENTION  
Use the SET MODULE MONITOR_CONTENTION command to determine if a  
TR-NMC participates in active monitor contention if the opportunity arises. If the  
need to determine a new active monitor arises, the TR-NMC still detects and  
initiates the process regardless of this setting.  
Format  
set module  
slot.2  
monitor_contention  
enable  
disable  
slot.2  
Indicates the slot number of the module you are configuring.  
enable  
TR-NMC participates fully in the active monitor election process, and accepts  
the role of active monitor if elected.  
disable  
TR-NMC detects and initiates the active monitor contention process, but  
cannot be elected active monitor.  
Example The following command enables active monitor contention on the TR-NMC in  
slot 3.2:  
CB5000> set module 3.2 monitor_contention enable  
Contention set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE NETWORK 2-155  
SET MODULE  
NETWORK  
Use the SET MODULE NETWORK command to assign each module or  
submodule to one of the selected networks that are available for the module  
type (Token Ring, Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, or FDDI), or isolate the module.  
Modules assigned to the same network form a segment. Modules assigned to  
different networks are on different segments and cannot communicate unless  
the networks are connected using a bridge or router. Each isolated module  
forms its own segment that isolates the traffic on that module from all other  
modules in the hub.  
If you switch ONline Token Ring modules from one ring to another ring, the  
rings are momentarily joined. To avoid this situation, switch modules to an  
isolated network before switching modules to another ring.  
When modules are network-selectable per port, refer to the SET PORT  
NETWORK command.  
Changing the Network Monitor Card network assignment clears all network  
statistics to zero.  
If you change a module network assignment and the new network is on a  
different IP network (the old and new networks are separated by a router), then  
any IP stations attached to the module must be configured with new IP  
addresses.  
Format  
network  
network  
set module  
slot.subslot  
module_interface_n  
slot.subslot  
Identifies the slot and subslot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number in the hub and subslot is the  
subslot number on the module in the specified slot. For example, to  
identify subslot 4 of slot 6, enter 6.4  
module_interface_n Selects one of the two interfaces on the A-ENMC. This command  
option is only available if the subslot you entered contains an  
A-ENMC.  
n =1 or 2  
network  
The backplane (hub-wide) or isolated (local to module) network that  
you want to assign the module to.  
Example 1 The following command assigns the media module in slot 1 to Ethernet  
network 3:  
CB5000> set module 1.1 network ethernet_3  
Module 1.1 network id set to ETHERNET_3.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-156 SET MODULE NETWORK  
Example 2 The following command assigns the Ethernet Network Monitor Card attached to  
subslot 5 in a Distributed Management Module for Ethernet in hub slot 4 to  
Ethernet network 1:  
CB5000> set module 4.5 network ethernet_1  
Module 04.05 network id set to ETHERNET_1.  
Limitations on NMC Network Monitor Card network assignments have the following limitations:  
Network Assignments  
■
You cannot assign two NMCs to the same network (for example, Ethernet_1)  
if both interfaces are enabled.  
■
You cannot assign two NMCs with the same IP address, regardless of  
network assignment.  
The following scenarios describe these limitations in greater detail:  
1 If you have an active NMC on Ethernet_1 and you try to set another NMC to  
Ethernet_1, or try to enable a disabled NMC on that network, the following  
message is displayed:  
Interface module x.y already enabled for this network  
Multiple Enabled Interface cards cannot be on the same network  
Command aborted.  
2 If you have an NMC on a network with an active (non-loopback) IP address, and  
same IP address  
you try to set another NMC to a different network with the  
(or  
try to enable a disabled one on that network), the following message is  
displayed:  
Interface module x.y already enabled for ip address 151.xxx.x.xxx  
Multiple Enabled Interface cards cannot share one ip address  
Command aborted.  
3 If you try to set an IP address for a network that has an enabled NMC on it,  
and there is already an enabled NMC with that IP address, the following  
message is displayed:  
Interface module x.y already enabled for ip address 151.xxx.x.xxx  
Multiple Enabled Interface cards cannot share one ip address  
Command aborted.  
You cannot assign a TR-NMC attached to a CoreBuilder 5000 module-switched  
Token Ring module to a network. A TR-NMC on this module is automatically  
assigned to the same network as the host module.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODULE PER_ PORT_COUNTERS_ CONNECTOR 2-157  
SET MODULE PER_  
PORT_COUNTERS_  
CONNECTOR  
Use the SET MODULE PER_PORT_COUNTERS_CONNECTOR command to select  
which connector to monitor ports statistics on for the 3Com ONline 24-Port  
10BASE-T Module.  
Format  
slot.subslot  
per_port_counters_connector  
connector  
set module  
slot.subslot  
The slot of the module that you are configuring.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number for the module in the hub and  
subslot is the subslot number on the module in the specified slot.  
connector  
The number of the connector (1 or 2) whose per-port statistics you  
want to monitor.  
Example The following command sets the per-port counters connector to 2 on the  
ONline 24-Port 10BASE-T Module in slot 3.1:  
CB5000> set module 3.1 per_port_counters_connector 2  
Module 3 port counters set to Connector 2.  
Related Commands SET MODULE CONNECTOR NETWORK  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-158 SET MODULE PHY_AUTOMATIC_ FAILOVER  
SET MODULE  
PHY_AUTOMATIC_  
FAILOVER  
Use the SET MODULE PHY_AUTOMATIC_FAILOVER command in a dual port  
configuration to enable or disable the switching over of one physical port to  
another physical port in the event that the physical port currently in use  
experiences Loss of Frame or Loss of Signal errors.  
A PHY is a physical port. Dual ports provide physical redundancy in the event a  
physical link or ATM switch fails.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
phy_automatic_failover  
enable  
disable  
slot.1  
1 through 17. Indicates the slot number of the module you are configuring.  
enable  
Enables the switching over of the PHY when Loss of Frame or Loss of Signal  
errors occur.  
disable  
Disables the switching over of the PHY when Loss of Frame or Loss of  
Signal errors occur.  
Example The following command enables the switching over of one PHY to another  
when a Loss of Frame or Loss of Signal error occurs:  
CB5000> set module 4.1 phy_automatic_failover enable  
Phy Automatic Failover set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SET MODULE PHY_SELECTION  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE PHY_SELECTION 2-159  
SET MODULE  
PHY_SELECTION  
Use the SET MODULE PHY_SELECTION command to specify the preferred PHY  
when two PHYs are installed and are operational.  
A PHY is a physical port. Dual ports provide physical redundancy in the event a  
physical link or ATM switch fails.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
phy_selection  
1
2
slot.1  
1 through 17. Indicates the slot number of the module you are configuring.  
1
2
Selects PHY 1.  
Selects PHY 2.  
Example The following command selects PHY 2 as the preferred PHY:  
CB5000> set module 4.1 phy_selection 2  
Phy Configuration Select set to 2.  
Warning: change does not take effect until module is reset.  
Related Commands SET MODULE PHY_AUTOMATIC_FAILOVER  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-160 SET MODULE PROBE_MODE  
SET MODULE  
PROBE_MODE  
Use the SET MODULE PROBE_MODE command to add and delete control table  
entries for the following RMON groups:  
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Statistics  
Host  
Matrix  
History  
Host Top N  
Events  
Alarms  
Enabling or disabling probe mode causes the Ethernet Network Monitor Card  
(ENMC) to reset.  
Setting an ENMC to probe mode prevents the ENMC from collecting per-port  
statistics.  
Format  
set module  
slot.subslot  
probe_mode  
enable  
disable  
slot.subslot  
The slot and subslot of the ENMC that you are configuring.  
enable  
Enables the ENMC’s ability to act as an RMON probe. Enabling probe  
mode disables the ENMC’s ability to collect per-port statistics.  
disable  
Disables the ENMC’s ability to act as an RMON probe. Disabling probe  
mode enables the ENMC’s ability to collect per-port statistics.  
Example The following command enables probe mode on the ENMC module in slot 1.2:  
CB5000> set module 1.2 probe_mode enable  
Changing the probe mode causes this card to reset.  
Also, any unsaved module changes will be saved.  
Do you wish to continue ? (y/n) : y  
Related Commands SET RMON  
SHOW RMON  
SHOW COUNTER RMON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE RING_SPEED 2-161  
SET MODULE  
RING_SPEED  
Use the SET MODULE RING_SPEED command to set the module to run at a ring  
speed of 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps.  
You can change the speed of a module only under the following conditions:  
■
The module is isolated from other hubs (SET NETWORK).  
■
No stations are connected to the module or all ports are disabled (SET PORT  
MODE).  
This command does not set the ring speed for module-switched  
CoreBuilder 5000 Token Ring modules.  
Format  
set module  
slot.subslot  
ring_speed  
4mbps  
16mbps  
slot.sublsot  
4mbps  
Identifies the module for this operation.  
Selects a ring speed of 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps. The factory setting is  
16mbps.  
16mbps  
Example The following command sets the module in slot 5 to a ring speed of 16 Mbps:  
CB5000> set module 5.1 ring_speed 16mbps  
Ring Speed set to 16 MBPS.  
Related Commands SAVE MODULE  
SHOW MODULE  
SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING RING_SPEED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-162 SET MODULE RMON_statistics group  
SET MODULE  
RMON_statistics group  
Use the SET MODULE RMON_statistics group command to enable or disable  
Token Ring RMON statistics collection groups on the Token Ring Network  
Monitor Card (TR-NMC). You must set the SET MODULE RMON_GROUP  
command to ENABLE for an individual group setting to take effect.  
Enabling RMON groups consumes system resources. Enable only those groups  
that provide useful information about your network.  
Format  
rmon_stats group  
set module  
slot.2  
enable  
disable  
slot.2  
The slot and subslot of the TR-NMC you are configuring.  
stats group  
The statistics group you are enabling or disabling with the command.  
The options are:  
host_stats  
■
mac_layer_stats  
■
promiscuous_stats  
■
ring_station_stats  
■
src_routing_stats  
■
enable  
disable  
Enables the TR-NMC’s ability to collect the selected RMON statistics  
group.  
Disables the TR-NMC’s ability to collect the selected RMON statistics  
group. Disable is the default selection.  
Example The following command enables RMON host statistics collection on the TR-NMC  
in slot 3.2:  
CB5000> set module 3.2 rmon_host_stats enable  
RMON Host Statistics set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SHOW COUNTER RMON  
SET MODULE INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE RMON_GROUP 2-163  
SET MODULE  
RMON_GROUP  
Use the SET MODULE RMON_GROUP command to enable or disable Token Ring  
RMON statistics collection on the Token Ring Network Monitor Card (TR-NMC).  
This command enables RMON groups. Separate individual commands enable or  
disable collection of individual RMON groups.  
Enabling RMON groups consumes system resources. Enable only those groups  
that provide useful information about your network.  
Format  
set module  
slot.2  
rmon_group  
disable  
enable  
slot.2  
Indicates the module that you are initiating RMON statistics on.  
Disables RMON statistics collection.  
disable  
enable  
Enables RMON statistics collection.  
Example The following command enables RMON MIB statistics collection on the TR-NMC  
in slot 3.2:  
CB5000> set module 3.2 rmon_group enable  
RMON group set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SET MODULE RMON_statistics group  
SET MODULE SURROGATE_GROUP  
SHOW COUNTER RMON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-164 SET MODULE SPEED_THRESHOLD  
SET MODULE  
SPEED_THRESHOLD  
Use the SET MODULE SPEED_THRESHOLD command to set the number of  
consecutive times that a station is allowed to retry inserting into the ring at an  
incorrect ring speed before the DMM removes the port from the ring.  
Speed detection prevents stations from inserting into a ring at the incorrect  
speed. When an incorrect speed station is detected:  
1 The module wraps the port and sets the port status to SPEED MISMATCH.  
2 The module retries speed detection the next time the station tries to insert into  
the ring.  
The module counts the number of times that a station attempts to insert into  
the ring at an incorrect ring speed. When the threshold is exceeded, the port  
remains wrapped with a status of SPD THRES ERROR until you disable and then  
reenable the port. The next time the station attempts to insert into the ring, the  
module unwraps the port and clears the SPD THRES ERROR status.  
When a port successfully inserts into the ring, the module resets the speed  
detection counter for that port.  
Use the SET PORT SPEED_DETECT command to enable or disable this feature.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
speed_threshold  
threshold  
slot.1  
Identifies the module for this operation.  
threshold  
The speed threshold for the ports on the identified module. Valid values are  
0 through 255.  
A value of 0 allows an infinite number of retries.  
The factory setting is 7.  
Example The following command sets the speed threshold to 3 for the module in slot  
3.1:  
CB5000> set module 3.1 speed_threshold 3  
Threshold set to 3.  
Related Commands SAVE MODULE_PORT  
SET PORT SPEED_DETECT  
SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MODULE SURROGATE_GROUP 2-165  
SET MODULE  
SURROGATE_GROUP  
Use the SET MODULE SURROGATE_GROUP command to enable or disable the  
Token Ring Surrogate function on the Token Ring Network Monitor Card  
(TR-NMC). In addition to this command, you must use the SET TR_SURROGATE  
commands to enable or disable individual groups.  
Enabling Token Ring Surrogate groups consumes system resources. Enable only  
those groups that provide useful information about your network.  
Format  
set module  
slot.2  
surrogate_group  
disable  
enable  
slot.2  
Identifies the TR-NMC for this operation.  
Disables the Token Ring Surrogate function.  
Enables the Token Ring Surrogate function.  
disable  
enable  
Example The following command enables Token Ring Surrogate groups on the TR-NMC  
in slot 3.2:  
CB5000> set module 3.2 surrogate_group enable  
Surrogate Group set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SET TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-166 SET MODULE SYSTEM_ANALYZER  
SET MODULE  
SYSTEM_ANALYZER  
Use the SET MODULE SYSTEM_ANALYZER command to enable or disable  
mirroring or monitoring.  
Format  
set module  
slot.1  
system_analyzer  
disable  
enable  
slot.1  
Identifies the module for this operation.  
Disables the System Analyzer function.  
Enables the System Analyzer function.  
disable  
enable  
Example The following command enables monitoring mode on module 7.1:  
CB5000> set module 7.1 system_analyzer enable  
WARNING: Only one Module may have System ANALYZER set to ENABLE.  
If any other Module had System analyzer set to ENABLE, previously,  
that Module will now have System ANALYZER set to DISABLE.  
Module 07 System Analyzer set to ENABLED.  
In this command, module 7.1 specifies module 7, subslot 1. This command  
enables SwitchModule 7 as the system analyzer.  
Related Command SET MODULE ANALYZER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING BCN_RECOVERY 2-167  
SET NETWORK  
TOKEN_RING  
BCN_RECOVERY  
Use the SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING BCN_RECOVERY command to enable or  
disable beacon recovery. Disable beacon recovery only as a troubleshooting tool  
to prevent rings from self-healing before you can isolate the problem or faulty  
device.  
If beacon recovery is disabled, the Beacon LED does not light when the ring is  
beaconing.  
Format  
set network token_ring  
network  
bcn_recovery  
disable  
enable  
network  
Identifies the network for this operation:  
token_ring_1 through token_ring_10  
■
isolated slot  
■
isolated_1 slot through isolated _11 slot  
■
disable  
enable  
Disables beacon recovery.  
Enables beacon recovery. The factory setting is enable.  
Example The following command disables beacon recovery on backplane network  
token_ring_1:  
CB5000> set network token_ring token_ring_1 bcn_recovery disable  
Beacon Recovery set to DISABLED.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-168 SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING MISMATCH_ RESOLUTION  
SET NETWORK  
TOKEN_RING  
MISMATCH_  
RESOLUTION  
Use the SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING MISMATCH_RESOLUTION command to  
allow CoreBuilder 5000 Token Ring Passive Media Modules to perform  
address-to-port mapping when splitters and fan-out devices are used.  
Mismatch resolution performs address-to-port mapping when you use a splitter  
or fan-out device on a CoreBuilder 5000 Token Ring port. The SET NETWORK  
TOKEN_RING MISMATCH_RESOLUTION command enables or disables the  
mismatch resolution algorithm on the media cards for the specified network.  
This setting is saved automatically, and is not affected by the SAVE or REVERT  
commands.  
Format  
set network token_ring  
mismatch_resolution  
token_ring_1...  
token_ring_10  
disable  
enable  
isolated_1.slot...  
isolated_10.slot  
isolated.slot  
Identifies the module for this operation for isolated networks.  
slot  
disable  
Disables mismatch resolution. Media cards do not attempt to resolve  
the mapping to the port level  
enable  
Enables mismatch resolution. Media cards attempt address-to-port  
mapping  
Example The following command enables the mismatch resolution mechanism on  
backplane network token_ring_3:  
CB5000> set network token_ring token_ring_3 mismatch_resolution  
enable  
Value set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW RING_MAP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING MODE 2-169  
SET NETWORK  
TOKEN_RING MODE  
Use the SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING MODE command to toggle entire rings  
between isolated (module-level) and backplane (hub-wide) Token Ring networks.  
This command is valid for port-switched modules only. This setting is saved  
automatically, and is not affected by the SAVE or REVERT commands. The  
command affects only the specified slot and cannot be used to isolate every  
module in the hub.  
You can implement each of the 10 available token rings on 3Com  
CoreBuilder 5000 port-switching media modules either on a backplane  
(hub-wide) or an isolated (module-level) network. Use this command to toggle  
sets of ports between backplane and isolated. You may toggle only rings  
1 through 10.  
Format  
mode  
slot  
set network token_ring  
token_ring_1...  
token_ring_10  
backplane  
isolated  
iso slot  
isolated_1 ...  
isolated_10  
slot  
Identifies the module for this operation.  
Identifies the isolated network the command affects.  
iso slot  
Example 1 The following command assigns all ports assigned to isolated_3 (module-level  
ring) in module 7 to token_ring_3 (backplane ring):  
CB5000> set network token_ring isolated_3 7 mode backplane  
Network mode set to BACKPLANE.  
Example 2 The following command assigns all ports from slot 7 that are assigned to  
token_ring_3 (backplane ring) to isolated_3 (module-level ring) in module 7:  
CB5000> set network token_ring token_ring_3 mode isolated 7  
Network mode set to ISOLATED.  
If you entered the command shown in the examples, all ports assigned to  
network isolated_3 join backplane network token_ring_3, as shown in the  
figure that follows.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-170 SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING MODE  
isolated_1  
isolated_4  
Port  
1
2
3
4
5
Token_Ring_2  
Token_Ring_3  
6
7
8
9
Token_Ring_5  
Token_Ring_6  
Port  
10  
Switch  
Matrix  
RI-1  
RO-1  
RI-2  
isolated_7  
Token_Ring_8  
Token_Ring_9  
Token_Ring_10  
RO-2  
isolated_11  
Related Commands SET MODULE NETWORK  
SET PORT NETWORK  
SHOW BACKPLANE_PATHS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET NETWORK TOKEN_ RING PURGE_ON_INSERT 2-171  
SET NETWORK  
TOKEN_ RING  
PURGE_ON_INSERT  
Use the SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING PURGE_ON_INSERT command to enable or  
only  
disable the purge_on insert feature for Token Ring modules  
.
Whenever a station is inserted into the ring (by plugging it into one of the ports  
on a TR module), a Ring Purge frame is sent out onto the ring for notification.  
A ring purge frame will always be generated when a station is inserted into a  
ring.  
Format  
purge_on_insert  
set network token_ring  
network  
enable  
disable  
network  
Identifies the network for this operation:  
token_ring_1 through token_ring_10  
■
isolated slot  
■
isolated_1 slot through isolated _11 slot  
■
enable  
disable  
Enables the purge_on insert feature. Enable is the default value.  
Disables the purge_on insert feature.  
Example The following command disables the purge_on_insert feature on backplane  
network token_ring_1:  
CB5000> set network token_ring token_ring_1 purge_on_insert disable  
Purge on insert set to enable.  
Related Command SHOW NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-172 SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING RING_SPEED  
SET NETWORK  
TOKEN_RING  
RING_SPEED  
Use the SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING RING_SPEED command to set the ring  
speed for any CoreBuilder 5000 Token Ring backplane (hub-wide) or isolated  
(module-level) network. Any module, port, trunk, or daughtercard assigned to  
the network is set automatically to the speed of the network.  
This setting is saved automatically, and is not affected by the SAVE or REVERT  
commands.  
When DIP configuration is enabled, and there is a conflict between the ring  
speed DIP settings on different modules set to the same network, there is no  
way to determine which speed will be selected. This is because the DMM  
controls network speed resolution.  
Format  
set network token_ring  
slot  
ring_speed  
4_mbps  
token_ring_1...  
token_ring_10  
16_mbps  
isolated_1  
isolated_10  
slot  
Identifies the module for this operation.  
Sets the ring speed to 4 Mbps.  
4_mbps  
16_mbps  
Sets the ring speed to 16 Mbps.  
Example The following command sets the ring speed for backplane network  
token_ring_4 to 16 Mbps:  
CB5000> set network token_ring token_ring_4 ring_speed 16_mbps  
Value set to 16 MBPS.  
Related Commands SET MODULE RING_SPEED  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT ACTIVE_CONNECTOR 2-173  
SET PORT  
ACTIVE_CONNECTOR  
Use the SET PORT ACTIVE_CONNECTOR command to activate the correct  
connector on the front panel of the ONline Token Ring Bridge Module. Choose  
the connector according to the media (UTP or STP) you are using.  
The setting for this command is saved automatically after you enter the  
command.  
It is not necessary to issue the SAVE command. Consequently, the REVERT  
command cannot be used. You must reenter the SET command to change the  
setting.  
Format  
set port  
slot.2  
active_connector  
db9  
rj45  
slot.2  
db9  
The slot (1 through 17) and port (the port is always 2) to which you  
are issuing this command.  
Selects the DB-9 connector. This is the default setting. Shielded  
twisted pair (STP) cable attaches using a DB-9 connector.  
rj45  
Selects the RJ-45 connector. Unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable  
attaches using an RJ-45 connector.  
Example The following command assumes the Token Ring Bridge Module in slot 11 is  
using unshielded twisted pair cable. In this case, set the port 2 connector to  
RJ-45.  
CB5000> set port 11.2 active_connector rj45  
Port 11.02 active connector set to RJ45.  
Related Command SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-174 SET PORT ALERT_FILTER  
SET PORT  
ALERT_FILTER  
Use the SET PORT ALERT_FILTER command to enable or disable filtering of port  
up/down trap generation for a specific port. This command works in  
conjunction with the SET ALERT PORT_UP_DOWN FILTER command. The order in  
which you enter these two commands does not matter.  
After the PORT ALERT_FILTER has been set for a port, you must enter the SET  
ALERT PORT_UP_DOWN FILTER command to filter or not filter port up and port  
down traps on a per port basis, to be transmitted from the DMM to the  
designated trap receiver.  
If the filter is enabled, no traps are generated. If the filter is disabled, traps are  
generated.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
alert_filter  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the  
port number on the specified module. For example, to identify port 4  
on the 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports in the module are affected by this operation.  
Disables filtering of port_up_down traps for the identified port.  
The factory setting is disabled.  
disable  
enable  
Enables filtering of port_up_down traps for the identified port.  
Example The following command enables port_up_down traps for port 2 on the module  
in slot 6:  
CB5000> set port 6.2 alert_filter enable  
Port 06.02 Alert Filter set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SET ALERT  
SHOW ALERT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT AUTO_POLARITY 2-175  
SET PORT  
AUTO_POLARITY  
Use the SET PORT AUTO_POLARITY command to instruct the 3Com  
CoreBuilder 5000 24-Port 10BASE-T Module and CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet  
modules to automatically switch the polarity of twisted-pair cabling.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
auto_polarity  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 40) is the  
port number on the specified module. For example, to identify port 4  
on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all ports on the module are affected by this operation.  
Disables auto polarity.  
Enables auto polarity. Auto polarity enables the module to  
automatically switch the polarity of twisted-pair cabling. If, for  
instance, you erroneously reverse the polarity of some twisted-pair  
cabling while assembling it, auto polarity enables you to automatically  
detect this problem and reverse the polarity.  
Example The following command enables auto polarity on port 1 of the  
CoreBuilder 5000 24-Port 10BASE-T Module in slot 1:  
CB5000> set port 1.1 auto_polarity enable  
Port 01.01 Auto Polarity set to ENABLE.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-176 SET PORT AUTOSENSE  
SET PORT AUTOSENSE Use the SET PORT AUTOSENSE command to enable or disable the automatic  
sensing feature. This command applies to the CoreBuilder 5000 EtherFlex  
Module (Model Number 6104M-MOD) with a 10BASE-FB/FL I/O Card.  
The autosense feature automatically determines the protocol (FB or FL) being  
used on the network.  
If autosensing is enabled, the protocol running on the port is shown by the  
media sense field of the SHOW MODULE command, and not the media  
configuration field.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
autosense  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port is the port number on the specified module. For example, to  
identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports on the module are affected by this operation.  
disable  
Disables the automatic sensing feature. When it is disabled, the media  
configuration field shows whether the port is using FB or FL protocol.  
enable  
Enables the automatic sensing feature. When it is enabled, the media  
sense field shows whether the port is using the FB or FL protocol. The  
FB/FL chip on the Fiber I/O card uses the media module sense to  
determine the protocol on the line (either FB or FL).  
Example The following command enables the autosensing feature on all ports on the  
Etherflex module located in slot 1:  
CB5000> set port 1.all autosense enable  
AUTOSENSE mode set to ENABLE.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT COLLISION 2-177  
SET PORT COLLISION  
Use the SET PORT COLLISION command to establish if normal or alternate  
collision mode is used for that port on the ONline Ethernet Transceiver Module.  
ONline Ethernet Transceiver Module Installation Guide  
Refer to the  
for more  
information on collision mode and the Ethernet Transceiver module.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
collision  
alternate  
normal  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 3) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 3 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.3  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports on the module are affected by this operation.  
Specifies alternate mode. Used primarily with non-IEEE 802.3 devices.  
alternate  
normal  
Specifies normal mode. Default setting, used primarily with IEEE 802.3  
devices and repeaters.  
Example The following command sets port 3 in slot 6 to normal collision mode:  
CB5000> set port 6.3 collision normal  
Collision set to NORMAL.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-178 SET PORT FAN_OUT_MODE  
SET PORT  
FAN_OUT_MODE  
Use the SET PORT FAN_OUT_MODE command to make a CoreBuilder 5000  
Token Ring port compatible with fan-out devices such as the IBM 8228. The  
fan-out function allows multiple stations to attach to a single port.  
This feature requires that you have loaded Token Ring Media Module code  
Version v1.2 or later.  
This feature is required because not all fan-out devices assert phantom  
(phantom indicates the presence of a station). When fan-out mode is disabled  
(the default), CoreBuilder 5000 Token Ring ports automatically wrap and  
unwrap based on the detection of phantom. In this mode, a fan-out device  
requires an adapter to assert phantom before it is allowed to insert into the  
ring. When fan-out mode is enabled, the port unwraps regardless of the  
presence of phantom.  
CAUTION: Enabling fan-out mode with no station or fan-out device attached  
breaks the ring and causes beaconing. This problem must be avoided because  
beacon recovery briefly disrupts all users on the ring.  
Because phantom is ignored when fan-out mode is enabled, the only way to  
clear a BEACON_WRAP or WRONG_SPEED condition when a port is in fan-out  
mode is to disable, then reenable the port. Ring speed detection does not  
operate when a port is in fan-out mode. Beacon recovery wraps fan-out devices  
that contain wrong speed stations.  
When you disable a port, fan-out mode is automatically disabled. This forces  
you to explicitly enable fan-out mode when you reenable the port. This extra  
step helps prevent you from enabling fan-out mode with no device attached.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
fan_out_mode  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 24) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports on the module are affected by this operation.  
Disables fan-out mode for the identified port.  
The factory setting is all ports disabled.  
disable  
enable  
Enables fan-out mode for the identified port.  
Example The following command disables fan-out mode on port 6.2:  
CB5000> set port 6.2 fan_out_mode disable  
Port 06.02 fan_out_mode set to DISABLED.  
Related Commands SET PORT NETWORK  
SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT FORCE_ CONFIGURATION 2-179  
SET PORT FORCE_  
CONFIGURATION  
Use the SET PORT FORCE_CONFIGURATION command to force a network to use  
fiber backbone (FB) or fiber link (FL) signaling. This command applies to the  
CoreBuilder 5000 EtherFlex Module (Model Number 6104M-MOD) with a  
10BASE-FB/FL I/O Card.  
Because the Ethernet fiber ports in your configuration can be FB or FL, this  
command allows your network to be compatible with your existing equipment.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
force_configuration  
fb_mode  
fl_mode  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports on the module are affected by this operation.  
Enables fiber backbone mode.  
fb_mode  
fl_mode  
Enables fiber link mode.  
Example The following command forces the network to use fiber backbone signaling for  
port 1 in slot 3.1:  
CB5000> set port 3.1 force_configuration fb_mode  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-180 SET PORT HALF_STEP  
SET PORT HALF_STEP  
Use the SET PORT HALF_STEP command to establish if half-step or full-step  
mode is used for that port on the ONline Ethernet Transceiver Module.  
ONline Ethernet Transceiver Module Installation Guide  
Refer to the  
for more  
information on half-step mode and the Ethernet Transceiver Module.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
half_step  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub and  
port (1 through 3) is the port number on the specified module. For  
example, to identify port 3 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.3  
slot.all  
Specifies that all ports on the module are affected by this operation.  
disable  
Disables half-step signaling. Full-step signaling is used instead. Full-step  
signaling is used primarily with non-IEEE 802.3 and earlier Ethernet devices.  
enable  
Enables half-step signaling. Half-step signaling is used primarily with  
IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet Version 2.0 devices and repeaters. This is the  
default setting.  
Example The following command sets port 2 in slot 7 to full-step mode:  
CB5000> set port 7.2 half_step disable  
Half_step set to DISABLED.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT HIGH_POWER 2-181  
SET PORT  
HIGH_POWER  
Use the SET PORT HIGH_POWER command to enable or disable a port from  
receiving or transmitting at high power. This command pertains to ONline  
Ethernet Port-Switching Fiber Modules (Model Numbers 5102M-FP and  
5104M-FP) only.  
This command allows you to increase the distance between connections by  
setting both ends of the link to high power. You must set this port to normal  
power (high_power disabled) to connect to certain ORnet fiber products (Model  
Numbers 9301T, 9308, 9314, and 9301A).  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
high_power  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 3) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all ports on the module are affected by this operation.  
Disables receiving or transmitting at high power.  
Enables receiving or transmitting at high power.  
Example The following command enables high power on port 1 on the module in slot 5:  
CB5000> set port 5.1 high_power enable  
High power optics ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-182 SET PORT LINK_INTEGRITY  
SET PORT  
LINK_INTEGRITY  
Use the SET PORT LINK_INTEGRITY command to enable or disable link integrity  
for ports on Ethernet 10BASE-T Modules.  
In general, enable link integrity for all ports on your 10BASE-T module as stated  
in the 10BASE-T standard. You must disable link integrity to connect to older  
non-10BASE-T equipment.  
Not all pre-10BASE-T equipment works with link integrity enabled.  
You must enable or disable link integrity at both ends of the connection. If the  
settings at each end of the connection differ, the port with link integrity enabled  
reports a link integrity error.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
link_integrity  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 4) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4.  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all ports in the slot are affected by this operation.  
Disables link integrity.  
Enables link integrity.  
Example The following command enables link integrity on port 1 of the 10BASE-T  
module in slot 5:  
CB5000> set port 5.1 link_integrity enable  
Link integrity set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT LOW_LIGHT_WARNING 2-183  
SET PORT  
LOW_LIGHT_WARNING  
Use the SET PORT LOW_LIGHT_WARNING command to enable a warning that is  
displayed when the light level received is weak. This command pertains to  
ONline Ethernet Port-Switching Fiber Modules (Model Numbers 5102M-FP and  
5104M-FP) only.  
A low light condition does not affect network operation. Enable low light  
detection during system setup to see if any fiber connections are close to  
reaching their distance limits. If they are, the status LED on the Ethernet Fiber  
Module blinks six times to indicate the condition, and the status is reported to  
the DMM.  
You can disable the low light detection if you are aware that the light level is  
low, but prefer not to have a blinking status indicator signaling the condition.  
If you have enabled redundant ports on the ONline Ethernet Fiber Modules  
(Model Number 5104M-FIB), disabling low light warning allows the module to  
switch over to the backup port more quickly when the primary port fails.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
low_light_warning  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 4) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all ports on the module are affected by this operation.  
Disables low light warning.  
Enables low light warning.  
Example The following command enables the low light warning on port 1 of the module  
in slot 12:  
CB5000> set port 12.1 low_light_warning enable  
Low light warning set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SHOW PORT  
SET PORT HIGH_POWER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-184 SET PORT MODE  
SET PORT MODE  
Use the SET PORT MODE command to turn ports on or off.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
mode  
disable  
enable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies that all ports on the module are affected by this operation.  
Disables the identified port.  
Enables the identified port.  
The factory setting is all ports enabled.  
Example The following command disables (turns off) port 2 on the module in slot 6:  
CB5000> set port 6.2 mode disable  
Port 06.02 set to DISABLED.  
Related Commands SET PORT NETWORK  
SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT MODE LOCAL/REMOTE 2-185  
SET PORT MODE  
LOCAL/REMOTE  
Use the SET PORT MODE LOCAL or REMOTE command to set an ONline  
Terminal Server port to local or remote access.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
mode  
local  
slot.all  
remote  
slot.port  
Selects a port for local or remote access.  
slot (1 through 17) is the number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 32) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to specify port 4 on the module with ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
local  
Selects a module for local or remote access. For example, to specify all  
ports on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
Selects local access. Connections can be made to the server through  
this port (for example, terminals). This is the default setting.  
remote  
Selects remote access. Connections can be made from the server to an  
external device (for example, dial-out modems).  
Example The following command sets port 2 in slot 6 to local access. Connections can be  
made to the server through this port.  
CB5000> set port 6.2 mode local  
Port 6.02 set to LOCAL.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-186 SET PORT MODE REDUNDANT/NON_REDUNDANT  
SET PORT MODE  
REDUNDANT/  
NON_REDUNDANT  
Use the SET PORT MODE REDUNDANT or NON_REDUNDANT command to  
establish redundancy between two ports on 10BASE-T modules or 100BASE-TX  
Workgroup FastModules.  
Initiating redundancy on ONline modules can cause a network loop in the  
unlikely event that:  
■ Both the management module and the power fail concurrently  
■ Ports of both the primary and redundant links are enabled using DIP  
switches  
To prevent a potential network loop, disable either the primary or backup port  
through the DIP switch settings, then use the SET PORT MODE command to  
enable that port. This looping problem does not occur with CoreBuilder 5000  
media modules.  
When setting redundancy, you can configure a 100BASE-TX to be compatible  
with a 10BASE-T.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
mode  
redundant  
slot.port  
non_redundant  
slot.port  
Selects a port for redundant or non-redundant mode.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to specify port 4 in slot 6, enter 6.4  
non_redundant  
redundant  
Selects non_redundant mode. When you remove port redundancy,  
you do not need to indicate the second slot.port. Using this command  
on any port in redundant mode removes that port from the  
redundancy relationship.  
Selects redundant mode. When you enter the SET PORT MODE  
REDUNDANT command for two ports, the first port in the command  
line becomes the primary link, and the second port becomes the  
backup or redundant link. If the primary link fails, the redundant link  
is activated automatically, thereby preventing a network failure.  
Example The following command establishes port 1 in slot 6 as the primary port and  
port 3 in slot 6 as the backup port:  
CB5000> set port 6.1 mode redundant 6.3  
Port 06.01 set to REDUNDANT PRIMARY.Port 06.03 set to REDUNDANT  
BACKUP.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT MODE DIAGNOSTICS 2-187  
SET PORT MODE  
DIAGNOSTICS  
Use the SET PORT MODE REMOTE_DIAGNOSTICS/NON_REMOTE_DIAGNOSTICS  
command to establish remote diagnostics on a port. Remote diagnostics allow  
the port to detect failures on both its transmits and receive wire pairs. Use this  
command when you are connecting two ports on 10BASE-T and 100BASE-T  
modules to a Fault-Tolerant 10BASE-T Transceiver Module  
(Model Number 5102T-TPFT) or establishing remote diagnostics on  
CoreBuilder 5000 24-Port, 20-Port, 40-Port, and 36-Port Modules and the  
EtherFlex Module.  
This command is most useful when you also have redundant ports set up to the  
transceiver. When you establish remote diagnostics and redundancy between  
two ports:  
1 The first port becomes the primary link while the second port becomes the  
backup or redundant link.  
2 If the primary link fails, the redundant link is activated automatically, thereby  
preventing a network failure.  
The cross-module redundancy feature enables you to set ports in different  
modules as redundant pairs. For example, you can use a port in one 10BASE-T  
module as a primary link and a 10BASE-T port in another module as the backup  
link.  
You must have link integrity enabled on both ports on the transceiver and on  
both ports on the module for this command to work correctly.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
mode  
non_remote_diagnostics  
remote_diagnostics  
slot.port  
slot (1 through 17) is the and port (1 through 40) is the port  
number on the specified module. For example, to specify port 4  
on the slot with slot ID 6, enter 6.4  
non_remote_diagnostics Remote diagnostics disabled. Use this mode when there is not a  
remote diagnostics-capable device at the far end of the  
connection  
remote_diagnostics  
Remote diagnostics enabled. Use this option when there is a  
remote diagnostics-capable device at the other end of the  
connection.  
Example The following command establishes remote diagnostics on port 5 in slot 16:  
CB5000> set port 16.5 mode remote_diagnostics  
Port 16.05 REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-188 SET PORT MODE REMOTE_FAILURE_ SIGNALING  
SET PORT MODE  
REMOTE_FAILURE_  
SIGNALING  
Use the SET PORT MODE REMOTE_FAILURE_SIGNALING command to establish  
Remote Failure Signaling on redundant fiber links.  
You can enable Remote Failure Signaling (RFS) for any of the four ports on the  
ONline FOIRL and 10BASE-FL modules. When you connect two FOIRL Modules  
and enable redundancy between two ports on one of the modules, you must  
enable RFS on the corresponding ports of the other module.  
For example, if you:  
■
Enable redundancy between ports 1 and 2 on FOIRL Module #1 and these  
ports are connected to ports 1 and 2 on Module #2, you must enable RFS  
on ports 1 and 2 on Module #2.  
■
Disable redundancy on the corresponding port or disable the port itself, RFS  
disables automatically.  
Refer to the ONline Ethernet FOIRL Module Installation Guide for more  
information on RFS mode and the ONline Ethernet FOIRL and 10BASE-FL  
modules.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
mode  
remote_failure_signaling  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Selects a port for remote failure signaling mode.  
slot (1 through 17) is the number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 4) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to specify port 4 on the with ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Selects a slot for remote failure signaling mode. For example, to  
specify all ports on the slot with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
Example The following command establishes Remote Failure Signaling for port 3 in slot 9:  
CB5000> set port 9.3 mode remote_failure_signaling  
Port 09.03 set to REMOTE FAILURE SIGNALING.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT MODE SHUTDOWN 2-189  
SET PORT MODE  
SHUTDOWN  
Use the SET PORT MODE SHUTDOWN command to test fault detection at the  
remote end of a link.  
This command applies to the following modules:  
■
CoreBuilder 5000 100BASE-TX Workgroup FastModule (Model  
Number 6512M-TX)  
■
■
■
CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet 10BASE-FB Module (Model Number 6110M-FBP)  
CoreBuilder 5000 EtherFlex Module (Model Number 6104M-MOD)  
CoreBuilder 5000 10BASE-T 20-Port and 40-Port Modules (Model  
Numbers 6120M-TPP and 6140M-TPP)  
■
CoreBuilder 5000 10BASE-T 36-Port Module (Model Number 6136M-TP)  
The SET PORT MODE SHUTDOWN command causes the port at the remote end  
of its link to lose its diagnostic signaling and therefore detect a fault.  
When you place a port in shutdown mode, the port is disabled and the  
following occurs:  
■
For twisted-pair ports, link integrity is disabled  
■
For fiber ports, diagnostic light signaling over the link is disabled  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
mode  
shutdown  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Selects a port for shutdown mode.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port is the port number on the specified module. For example, to  
specify port 4 on the with ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Selects a module for shutdown mode. For example, to specify all ports  
on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
Example The following command shuts down port 3 in slot 2:  
CB5000> set port 3.2 mode shutdown  
Related Commands SHOW PORT  
SET PORT NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-190 SET PORT NETWORK  
SET PORT NETWORK  
Use the SET PORT NETWORK command to assign a port to a specific network.  
This command applies to 3Com modules that support port-switching.  
You may either:  
■
■
Assign each port to one of the selected networks that are available for the  
module type (Token Ring, Ethernet, or FDDI)  
Isolate the port  
Ports assigned to:  
■
The same network form a segment (that is, they are on the same network).  
■
Different networks are on different segments and cannot communicate  
unless you bridge the networks. Each isolated port joins traffic from all other  
ports on the same isolated (module-level) network.  
All Ethernet modules are factory-set through the DIP switches or non-volatile  
RAM so that the ports are assigned to channel 1 (Ethernet network 1). Change  
the DIP switch setting only if your hub is without a management module.  
This command applies only to 3Com modules that have individual ports that are  
network-selectable. For modules that are network-selectable per module, refer  
to the SET MODULE NETWORK command.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
network  
network  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Selects the port to assign to a network.  
slot (1 through 17) is the number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to specify port 4 on the with ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Selects a module to assign to a network. For example, to specify all  
ports on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
network  
Specifies the network to which you are assigning the port. For  
example, ethernet_2.  
Example 1 The following command sets port 2 on the module in slot 5 to network  
Ethernet 1:  
CB5000> set port 5.2 network ethernet_1  
Port 05.02 network id set to ETHERNET_1  
Example 2 The following command sets port 1 on the ONline Ethernet Bridge Module in  
slot 7 to the AUI port on the front panel:  
ONline> set port 7.1 network front_panel  
Port 07.01 network id set to FRONT_PANEL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT NETWORK 2-191  
Example 3 The following command sets both ports on the ONline Ethernet Repeater  
Module in slot 4 to network Ethernet 2:  
CB5000> set port 4.all network ethernet_2  
Port 04.01 network id set to ETHERNET_2  
Port 04.02 network id set to ETHERNET_2  
Related Commands SHOW PORT  
SHOW BACKPLANE_PATHS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-192 SET PORT PERSONALITY  
SET PORT  
PERSONALITY  
Use the SET PORT PERSONALITY command to designate the transmission mode  
for a port on the ONline FDDI Shielded Twisted Pair Module.  
The FDDI STP Module:  
■
Supports both the SDDI and TPDDI standards for running FDDI on shielded  
twisted pair cable  
■
■
Allows you to designate whether the port transmits data using either SDDI or  
TPDDI signaling mode  
Allows you to connect the module to any vendor's device that supports  
either of the two standards  
All ports default to SDDI mode when you first install the FDDI STP Module. You  
must use SDDI ports 1 and 2 on the FDDI Shielded Twisted Pair Module to  
configure SDDI ports as S-type ports.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
personality  
sddi  
tpddi  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Selects a port for personality setting.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 8) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to specify port 4 on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Selects a slot for personality setting. For example, to specify all ports  
on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
sddi  
Specifies SDDI signaling mode. This is the default.  
Specifies TPDDI signaling mode.  
tpddi  
Example The following command sets SDDI as the transmission mode for port 2 of the  
FDDI Shielded Twisted Pair Module in slot 8:  
CB5000> set port 8.2 personality sddi  
Port Personality set to sddi.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT RECEIVE_JABBER 2-193  
SET PORT  
RECEIVE_JABBER  
Use the SET PORT RECEIVE_JABBER command to enable or disable Receive  
Jabber for a port on the 3Com ONline Ethernet 50-Pin Module.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
receive_jabber  
enable  
disable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Selects a port for receiving jabber.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 12) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to specify port 4 on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Selects a module for receiving jabber. For example, to specify all ports  
on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
enable  
Enables receiving jabber. When enabled, if a jabber condition occurs  
and the transceiver or repeater device fails to halt it, Receive Jabber  
protects the network by disconnecting the link after 10 msecs. Refer  
to the Ethernet 50-Pin Module Installation Guide for more information  
on Receive Jabber mode and the Ethernet 50-Pin Module.  
disable  
Disables receiving jabber. This is the default. Receive Jabber is set to a  
default of disabled to conform to the 10BASE-T standard.  
Example The following command enables Receive Jabber for port 2 in slot 12:  
CB5000> set port 12.2 receive_jabber enable  
Receive Jabber on Port 12.02 set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-194 SET PORT RING_SPEED  
SET PORT RING_SPEED Use the SET PORT RING_SPEED command to set either port on the ONline Token  
Ring Bridge Module to operate at a transmission rate of 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps,  
depending on the network ring speed.  
This command enables you to set port 1 (backplane) or port 2 (front panel) on  
the Token Ring Bridge Module to a transmission rate of 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps.  
The DMM saves the setting for this command automatically. It is not necessary  
to enter the SAVE command. Consequently, the REVERT command does not  
affect the command setting. To change the setting, you must reenter the SET  
command.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
ring_speed  
4mbps  
16mbps  
slot.port  
Selects a port for ring speed setting.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 or 2 ) is the port number on the specified module. For  
example, to specify port 2 on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.2  
4mbps  
Sets the ring speed on the port to 4 Mbps.  
Sets the ring speed on the port to 16 Mbps.  
16mbps  
Example The following command sets port 1 of the Token Ring Bridge Module in slot 5  
to 16 Mbps ring speed:  
CB5000> set port 5.1 ring_speed 16mbps  
Port 05.01 ring speed set to 16mbps.  
Related Command SET NETWORK TOKEN_RING RING_SPEED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT SPEED_DETECT 2-195  
SET PORT  
SPEED_DETECT  
Use the SET PORT SPEED_DETECT command to enable speed detection for a  
CoreBuilder 5000 Token Ring port. This command prevents stations from  
inserting on the ring at an incorrect ring speed.  
Format  
slot.port  
disable  
enable  
speed_detect  
set port  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Selects a port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 20) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to specify port 4 on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Selects a slot for enabling speed detection. For example, to specify all  
ports on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
disable  
Disables speed detection for the identified port.  
The factory setting is speed detection disabled.  
Enables speed detection for the identified port.  
enable  
Example The following command disables speed detection for port 2 on hub 1:  
CB5000> set port 1.2 speed_detect disable  
Port 01.02 Speed Detection set to DISABLED.  
Related Commands SAVE PORT  
SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-196 SET PORT SQE_TEST  
SET PORT SQE_TEST  
Use the SET PORT SQE_TEST command to establish if SQE Test is enabled or  
disabled for ports on the ONline Ethernet Transceiver Module.  
Refer to the ONline Ethernet Transceiver Module Installation Guide for more  
information on SQE Test mode and the Ethernet Transceiver Module.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
sqe_test  
enable  
disable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Selects a port for SQE test mode setting.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot nubmer location of the module in the  
hub and port (1 through 3) is the port number on the specified  
module. For example, to specify port 3 on the module with slot ID 6,  
enter 6.3  
slot.all  
enable  
disable  
Selects a slot for SQE test mode setting. For example, to specify all  
ports on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
Enables SQE test mode. You can connect this port to most devices,  
except repeaters. This is the default.  
Disables SQE test mode. You can connect this port to baseband  
Repeaters and Multiport Transceivers.  
Example The following command enables SQE Test for port 1 in slot 8:  
CB5000> set port 8.1 sqe_test enable  
SQE_test on Port 08.01 set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SAVE MODULE_PORT  
SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT SQUELCH 2-197  
SET PORT SQUELCH  
Use the SET PORT SQUELCH command to establish Squelch Mode as either  
normal or low for ports on Ethernet 10BASE-T Modules. The squelch level is  
factory set to NORMAL to conform to the 10BASE-T standard.  
In general, 3Com recommends using normal squelch. Ensure the squelch level at  
both ends of the link matches. If you change the squelch level at the module,  
you must change the squelch setting at the transceiver also.  
If your network experiences too many illegally short packets (runts) in low  
squelch mode, change the setting back to NORMAL.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
squelch  
low  
slot.all  
normal  
slot.port  
Selects a port for squelch mode setting.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to specify port 4 on themodule with slot ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Selects a slot for squelch mode setting. For example, to specify all  
ports on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
low  
Sets squelch mode to low (sensitive). Ports are able to receive weaker  
signals, allowing longer link distances. Increases the achievable link  
distance, but with the added risk of losing packets to impulse noise.  
normal  
Sets squelch mode to normal. Ports receive signals compliant with the  
10 BASE-T standard.  
Example The following command sets port 1 in slot 5 to a low squelch level:  
CB5000> set port 5.1 squelch low  
Squelch set to LOW.  
Related Commands SAVE MODULE_PORT  
SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-198 SET PORT STATIC_SWITCH  
SET PORT  
STATIC_SWITCH  
Use the SET PORT STATIC_SWITCH to force CoreBuilder 5000 Token Ring users  
to power off a station before switching rings. Use this command to prevent  
ports from being switched from one ring to another when there is a phantom  
present. This command works only for port-switched CoreBuilder 5000 Token  
Ring modules.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
static_switch  
enable  
disable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Selects a port for static switch.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location on a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 24) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to specify port 4 on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Selects a slot for static switch. For example, to specify all ports on the  
module with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
enable  
Forces users to power stations down before switching networks. This  
forces the station to perform a duplicate address test before entering  
a new ring.  
disable  
Does not force users to power stations off before switching networks.  
Example The following command disables static switch on port 2 on the module in  
slot 6:  
CB5000> set port 6.2 static_switch disable  
Port 6.02 static switch set to DISABLED.  
Related Commands SAVE MODULE_PORT  
SET TRUNK STATIC_SWITCH  
SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PORT STATION_TYPE 2-199  
SET PORT  
STATION_TYPE  
Use the SET PORT STATION_TYPE command to designate a station that does not  
have a MAC address (for example, a network analyzer). This command applies  
to ONline System Concentrator Token Ring modules only.  
Stations that assert a phantom signal but do not have a MAC address cause  
problems in the DMM mapping algorithm. To prevent this problem, set the  
station_type parameter to MAC_NOT_PRESENT. This eliminates the stations from  
the mapping algorithms running on a DMM. Failure to designate a MAC-less  
station can cause incorrect mapping.  
Security settings configured for a port are bypassed when you set the port to a  
station type of MAC_NOT_PRESENT.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
station_type  
mac_not_present  
mac_present  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Selects a port for setting station type.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 20) is the port number For example, to specify  
port 4 on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Selects a slot for setting station type. For example, to specify all ports  
on the module with slot ID 6, enter 6.all  
mac_not_present  
mac_present  
Specifies that the station the port is attached to does not have a MAC  
address.  
Specifies that the station the port is attached to has a MAC address.  
This is the default.  
Example The following command informs port 6 on the module in slot 3 that the station  
the port is attached to does not have a MAC address:  
CB5000> set port 3.6 station_type mac_not_present  
Station type set to MAC_NOT_PRESENT  
Related Command SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-200 SET PORT TYPE  
SET PORT TYPE  
Use the SET PORT TYPE command to define ports on any ONline FDDI Media  
Module as master or slave ports. All FDDI Media Module ports default to a Type  
M (master). Ports 1 and 2 can, however, be designated as Type S (slave) ports.  
Designate your S ports before enabling the ports on the module.  
Ports 3 through 8 operate only as Type M ports. Therefore, the SET PORT TYPE  
command is not available for ports 3 through 8. Refer to the appropriate FDDI  
module documentation for information on Type M and Type S ports.  
Format  
set port  
slot.port  
type  
master  
slave  
slot.port  
Selects a port to define as master or slave.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 8) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to specify port 2 on the module with slot ID 6, enter  
6.2  
master  
slave  
Specifies the port as the primary communication port. This is the  
default.  
Specifies that the port runs as a backup to the master port in  
redundant configurations. Used when a cable failure could take down  
an entire network.  
Example The following command sets port 1 in slot 7 to be a slave port:  
CB5000> set port 7.1 type slave  
Type set to SLAVE.  
Related Commands SHOW PORT  
SET PORT PERSONALITY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET POWER MODE 2-201  
SET POWER MODE  
Use the SET POWER MODE command to choose between normal and  
fault-tolerant power supply operation using the CoreBuilder 5000 hub intelligent  
power management system.  
For example:  
■
Each power supply provides approximately 200 watts at +5 Volts  
You have three power supplies available (approximately 600 watts)  
■
In this scenario, non-fault tolerant mode allows you to use approximately 600  
watts. Fault-tolerant mode allows you to use approximately 400 watts, reserving  
approximately 200 watts to use in the event of a failure.  
Regardless of the power mode setting, the power load being used is shared  
across all installed power supplies.  
Refer to documentation for your power supply to determine the power supply’s  
maximum power output.  
Format  
fault_tolerant  
set power mode  
fault_tolerant  
non_fault_tolerant  
Power Management calculations hold a power supply’s worth of  
power in reserve, so that there is still enough power available if a  
power supply fails. To use fault-tolerant mode, you must have one  
more power supply than is required to power all modules in the hub.  
non_fault_tolerant Power Management calculations use the entire capacity of all installed  
power supplies when calculating available power. To use normal  
mode, you must have enough power supplies to power all modules in  
the hub.  
Example The following command attempts to set the CoreBuilder 5000 hub power mode  
to fault tolerant:  
CB5000> set power mode fault_tolerant  
Power will switch to FAULT-TOLERANT mode when sufficient power is  
available.  
The command fails because the installed power is insufficient to support  
fault-tolerant mode. Fault-tolerant mode automatically enables when sufficient  
power becomes available (when you add another power supply).  
Related Command SHOW POWER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-202 SET POWER MODULE POWER_ REQUIREMENTS  
SET POWER MODULE  
POWER_  
REQUIREMENTS  
Use the SET POWER MODULE POWER_REQUIREMENTS (maintenance mode  
only) command to change the power requirement values of modules to reflect  
the module’s true power use.  
Most modules and submodules automatically display valid power management  
information. Some module/submodule combinations (for example, the Network  
Interconnect Module) do not provide complete power information. Because of  
this, you must set power management information manually for these modules.  
To set power manually:  
1 Determine the hardware configuration that the module/submodule can carry,  
and use information in the module user guide to determine the total power  
requirements of the configured card.  
2 To determine if there is enough power available in the hub to support the  
module you are installing, use the SHOW POWER BUDGET command.  
3 At the DMM command prompt, enter maintain  
4 Use the SET POWER MODULE POWER_REQUIREMENTS command to enter the  
valid power information into the module EEPROM.  
5 Remove the module and install additional hardware required, then reinsert the  
module.  
6 At the maintenance (>>) prompt, enter boot to reboot the DMM with the  
newly entered power information.  
Format  
set power module  
slot.subslot  
power_requirements  
slot.subslot  
Selects a module in a slot (1 through 17) for changing power  
requirements.  
Example The following command sets the power requirements for the module in slot 9:  
CB5000> maintain  
>> set power module 9.1 power_requirements  
Enter +5V power requirements in units of 1 Watt: 10  
Enter -5V power requirements in units of .25 Watt: 1  
Enter +12V power requirements in units of .5 Watt: 4  
Enter -12V power requirements in units of .25 Watt: 2  
Enter +2V power requirements in units of .1 Watt: 1  
Do you want to enter this into module 9.1's EEPROM? (y/n) y  
Completed.  
>> boot  
Related Command SHOW POWER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET POWER OVERHEAT_AUTO_ POWER_DOWN MODE 2-203  
SET POWER  
OVERHEAT_AUTO_  
POWER_DOWN MODE  
Use the SET POWER OVERHEAT_AUTO_POWER_DOWN MODE command to  
have the controller decide whether or not to power down slots that contain  
CoreBuilder 5000 modules when it senses an overheating condition.  
Format  
set power overheat_auto_power_down mode  
enable  
disable  
®
enable  
disable  
Causes slots containing CoreBuilder 5000 modules to power down  
automatically when the hub overheats.  
Causes the controller to send notification to network management,  
but the hub keeps operating.  
Example The following command disables the hub’s automatic CoreBuilder 5000 module  
shutdown when it detects an overheating condition:  
CB5000> set power overheat_auto_power_down mode enable  
Power overheat_auto_power_down_mode enable  
Related Command SHOW POWER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-204 SET POWER SLOT CLASS  
SET POWER SLOT  
CLASS  
Use the SET POWER SLOT CLASS command to determine the order in which  
modules power down if there is inadequate power to run the system. Modules  
with the lowest priority power down first.  
Modules set to power class 10 do not power down automatically under any  
circumstances.  
ONline modules cannot use this power priority feature. ONline modules  
automatically draw the amount of power you specify regardless of the power  
priority setting of the modules installed in the hub. Refer to the  
CoreBuilder 5000 Distributed Management Module User Guide for information on  
power management information.  
Format  
set power slot  
slot  
class  
class  
slot  
Selects the slot (1 through 17) for which you are setting power class.  
class  
Selects the class number you are assigning to the selected slot (1  
through 10, 10 is highest priority).  
Example The following command sets the power class for slot 6 to 1:  
CB5000> set power slot 6 class 1  
Slot 6 power class is set to 1.  
Related Commands SHOW POWER  
SET POWER MODE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET POWER SLOT MODE 2-205  
SET POWER SLOT  
MODE  
Use the SET POWER SLOT MODE command to manually select which modules in  
the hub receive power.  
Use this command to selectively disable power to modules installed in your hub.  
This allows you to manually select which modules in the hub receive power and  
to power down modules without removing them from the hub.  
This command does not work with ONline modules.  
Format  
mode  
set power slot  
slot  
enable  
disable  
slot  
Selects a slot (1 through 17) for power mode.  
Enables power mode.  
enable  
disable  
Disables power mode.  
Example The following command disables power to slot 14:  
CB5000> set power slot 14 mode disable  
Slot 14 power set to DISABLE.  
Related Command SHOW POWER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-206 SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING  
SET PROTOCOLS  
FORWARDING  
Use the SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING command to create filters that filter  
according to a specific type of protocol and define thresholds at which  
broadcast packets of a certain protocol type are rate limited (discarded). For  
example, use this feature to prevent broadcast storms by limiting ARP  
broadcasts on a SwitchModule.  
Format  
set protocols  
type field  
slot.1  
forwarding  
dsap  
enet  
snap  
to_defaults  
name  
all  
unknown  
none  
enable_rate_limit  
disable_rate_limit  
all  
name  
high_priority  
normal_priority  
none  
pkt_chan_port  
port  
slot.1  
Selects a slot (1 through 17) for setting protocol forwarding. Subslot is  
always 1.  
dsap  
enet  
snap  
Specifies that the filter you create affects DSAP protocol packets.  
Specifies that the filter you create affects Ethernet protocol packets.  
Specifies that the filter you create affects SNAP (SubNetwork Access  
Protocol) packets.  
to_defaults  
unknown  
Deletes all user-created entries from the protocol forwarding table. The  
default protocol filters remain in the table.  
Specifies a protocol that is not a default protocol in the protocol  
forwarding table.  
type field  
Filters are based on the location of the protocol ID field (type field) in a  
packet.  
high_priority  
normal_priority  
The protocol you are creating a filter for transmits at higher priority  
(experiences lower latency levels) than other protocols.  
The protocol you are creating a filter for transmits at the normal priority  
level.  
all  
Specifies that all ports on the SwitchModule are affected.  
Specifies that no ports on the SwitchModule are affected.  
Specifies the PacketChannel backplane port.  
none  
pkt_chan_port  
port  
The port (1 through 24) you want to be affected by the filter you  
create.  
name  
The name (up to 16 characters) you want to identify this filter.  
enable_rate_limit Limits the broadcast packets for this protocol.  
disable_rate_limit Does not limit the broadcast packets for this protocol. This is the  
factory setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING 2-207  
SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING commands follow the DMM SET MODULE  
command syntax (slot.subslot). SwitchModules use the value 1 for subslot.  
When you enter the SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING command, the DMM  
interface prompts you for the necessary information.  
Example 1 CB5000> set protocols 4.1 forwarding enet  
Enter filter in hex: 60-03  
Enter value in Hex (with dash dividing bytes).  
Enter queue priority: normal_priority  
high_priority  
normal_priority  
Enter forward to ports: all  
all  
none  
pkt_chan_port  
OR  
(port)  
Enter filter name: decnet  
Filter set  
This command configures an ENET filter for the SwitchModule in slot 4, sets it  
to filter on all ports at normal priority, and names the filter decnet.  
Example 2 The SwitchModule defines an unknown protocol as any protocol that is not a  
default protocol in the protocol forwarding table. Use the SHOW PROTOCOLS  
FORWARDING command to display the protocol forwarding table.  
By default, SwitchModule ports forward all unknown protocols.  
To filter (drop) unknown protocols, use the SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING  
command as follows:  
CB5000> set protocols 7.1 forwarding unknown none  
Enter filter name: Filter1  
Filter set  
This command filters unknown protocols at all ports on the SwitchModule in  
slot 7.  
This command deletes all user-created entries from the protocol forwarding  
table for slot 4. The default protocol filters remain in the table.  
For example:  
> set protocols 4.1 forwarding to_defaults  
Filters reset to defaults.  
Related Command SHOW PROTOCOLS FORWARDING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-208 SET PROTOCOLS RATE_LIMIT_ THRESHOLD  
SET PROTOCOLS  
RATE_LIMIT_  
THRESHOLD  
Use the SET PROTOCOLS RATE_LIMIT_THRESHOLD command on SwitchModules  
to define the threshold at which you want the SwitchModule to begin  
discarding packets.  
You can configure rate limiting on a per SwitchModule basis, not per port or  
virtual bridge. This means that to configure the same rate limit settings on a  
virtual bridge that spans multiple SwitchModules, you must configure each  
SwitchModule that participates in the virtual bridge.  
Format  
rate_limit_threshold  
0 through 65,534  
set protocols  
slot.1  
disable  
slot.1  
Selects a slot (1 through 17) for setting protocol rate limiting. Subslot is  
always 1.  
0 through 65,534 Value (frames per second) at which you can set the threshold or disable  
disable  
the feature.  
Example To configure rate limiting, define the protocol type of the broadcast packets you  
want to limit. Use the SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING command with the  
ENABLE_RATE_LIMIT option.  
CB5000> set protocols 7.1 forwarding enet 08-06 normal_priority  
all ip_arp enable_rate_limit  
Filter set  
Define the threshold at which you want the SwitchModule to begin discarding  
packets. Use the SET PROTOCOLS RATE_LIMIT_THRESHOLD command.  
CB5000> set protocols 7.1 rate_limit_threshold 300  
The previous commands enable rate limiting on the SwitchModule in slot 7.  
When the SwitchModule receives more than 300 frames per second of Ethernet  
type 08-06 packets, these packets are discarded.  
If you set the rate limit threshold to 0 frames per second, the SwitchModule  
filters all broadcast packets.  
Related Commands SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING  
SHOW PROTOCOLS RATE_LIMIT_THRESHOLD  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET PROTOCOLS TRANSLATION 2-209  
SET PROTOCOLS  
TRANSLATION  
Use the SET PROTOCOLS TRANSLATION command to select the setting for  
translation between the Ethernet and FDDI protocols on CoreBuilder 5000  
SwitchModules.  
Format  
set protocols  
slot.1  
translation  
default  
ipx8023  
slot.1  
Selects a slot (1 through 17) for setting protocol forwarding. Subslot is  
always 1.  
ipx8023  
Enables translation using the ipx8023 setting. Select this setting if your  
network is running Novell configured as raw 802.3 IPX between  
Ethernet and FDDI.  
default  
Enables translation at the default setting. Select this setting if your  
network is running Novell configured as Ethernet II or Ethernet  
802.3/802.2 between Ethernet and FDDI.  
Example The following command enables ipx802.3 translation on the SwitchModule in  
slot 17:  
CB5000> set protocols 17.1 translation ipx8023  
Filter set.  
Related Command SHOW PROTOCOLS TRANSLATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-210 SET RMON ALARM  
SET RMON ALARM  
Use the SET RMON ALARM command to set up an alarm that triggers an event  
based on the parameters you specify.  
Each sample is compared against two thresholds, a rising threshold and a falling  
threshold. Each sample can be either an absolute value or a delta value (the  
difference between the current value and the value of the previous sample). If  
the value crosses the threshold, an event associated with that threshold may be  
generated. The threshold is not rearmed until the opposite threshold is crossed  
(rising or falling). This prevents the generation of multiple events as a sample  
crosses just above and below a specific threshold.  
Format  
rising threshold  
event index  
set rmon alarm interface statistics type.instance  
rising_start  
falling_start  
any_start  
falling  
time  
delta_type  
event index  
threshold  
absolute_type  
interface  
The interface whose statistics you are collecting. Use the SHOW INTERFACE  
command for a list of interface numbers.  
statistics type  
The type of statistics you want to collect. The list of statistics are:  
BroadcastPackets  
■
Collisions  
■
CRCAlignErrors  
■
Fragments  
■
Jabbers  
■
MulticastPackets  
■
Octets  
■
OversizePackets  
■
Packets  
■
UndersizePackets  
■
instance  
rising  
The specific instance for the selected statistics type.  
Introduces the parameters for the rising threshold.  
Introduces the parameters for the falling threshold.  
The statistic value falling below the threshold triggers the event.  
falling  
threshold  
event index  
Index number of the RMON event triggered by the rising or falling threshold. Use the  
SET RMON EVENT command to create events, and the SHOW RMON EVENTS  
command to view event index numbers.  
time  
Time between samples in hh:mm format.  
rising_start  
falling_start  
any_start  
Specifies that the first event must be triggered by the rising threshold.  
Specifies that the first event must be triggered by the falling threshold.  
Specifies that the first event can be triggered by the rising threshold or falling  
threshold.  
delta_type  
Specifies that the threshold value is compared to the change in the statistic value  
since the last sample.  
absolute_type  
Specifies that the threshold value is compared to the absolute statistic value.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET RMON ALARM 2-211  
Example The following command sets thresholds that trigger an alarm when there are  
more than five in an hour:  
CB5000> set rmon alarm ethernet crcalignerror.3 rising 5 2 falling  
1 3 01:00 rising_start delta_type  
Entry 2 created.  
Related Commands SET RMON EVENT  
SHOW RMON  
SHOW INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-212 SET RMON EVENT  
SET RMON EVENT  
Format  
Use the SET RMON EVENT command to create events that are triggered by  
alarms created using the SET RMON ALARM command.  
set rmon event  
log  
community  
log_trap  
none  
trap  
log  
Writes an entry in the event log.  
log_trap  
Writes an entry in the event log and sends a trap to the specified  
community.  
none  
Takes no action.  
trap  
Sends a trap to the specified community.  
The SNMP community name for trap receivers. The default is public.  
community  
Example The following command sets up a trap message sent when the CRC Alignment  
Error alarm is triggered:  
CB5000> set rmon event trap  
Enter one line for event description:  
> CRC Alignment Error Threshold Exceeded!!  
Entry 2 created.  
Related Commands SHOW RMON  
SET RMON ALARM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET RMON HISTORY 2-213  
SET RMON HISTORY  
Use the SET RMON HISTORY command to add entries to the RMON History  
Table for various MACs in the hub. This command works for Ethernet modules  
only.  
The history group generates reports. A history is a sample of statistical  
information, taken periodically. The MAC stores each sample in the history  
report.  
The history report is similar to the DMM’s MONITOR command. It logs the  
difference between counters at regular intervals. The history control table  
specifies the:  
■ Data source of the history report  
■ Collection interval  
■ Number of entries to store  
If the probe has more entries to store than it is configured to hold, the oldest  
history entry is deleted (the lowest-numbered sample) and a new entry is  
appended (as the highest numbered sample).  
The Ethernet History incorporates Ethernet statistic counters. For each sample  
entry, the report provides utilization of the network during that interval. Each  
entry is stamped with the date and time that the entry was started.  
Format  
set rmon history  
interval  
interface  
interface  
interface  
Specifies the number of the interface for which you are creating a matrix  
table. Use the SHOW INTERFACE command for a list of interface numbers.  
interface  
interval  
Interface number.  
Specifies the number of minutes and seconds between history table entries.  
The format is mm:ss.  
Example The following command causes the ENMC assigned to interface 3 to record an  
RMON History Table entry every 30 seconds:  
CB5000> set rmon history interface 3 00:30  
Entry 1 created.  
Related Command SHOW RMON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-214 SET RMON HOST INTERFACE  
SET RMON HOST  
INTERFACE  
Use the SET RMON HOST INTERFACE command to enable host table collection.  
The RMON agent in the DMM detects hosts on the network by observing  
source and destination addresses in network packets. It creates an entry in the  
RMON host table for each detected host. The RMON agent also collects traffic  
statistics for each host based on observed network packets.  
Format  
set rmon host interface  
index  
index  
The index number of the DMM’s RMON interface.  
Example The following command enables host table monitoring by the RMON agent:  
CB5000> set rmon host interface 1  
Entry 1 created.  
Related Commands CLEAR RMON HOST  
SHOW RMON HOST  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET RMON MATRIX 2-215  
SET RMON MATRIX  
Use the SET RMON MATRIX command to set up a particular interface to track  
conversations between hosts. This command works with Ethernet modules only.  
The matrix table is similar to the host table, but tracks network conversations  
between hosts, instead of host traffic. For every frame, the MAC extracts the  
source and destination address and associates the frame with a conversation.  
Network conversations are important for performance modeling. Using Matrix  
Table information, you can model the network across bridging devices and  
along shared segments. You can optimize network performance by ensuring  
that heavy conversations are isolated to shared LANs and do not occur across  
heavily-burdened bridging devices.  
The ENMC stores up to 2,000 conversations, then discards any new  
conversations that arrive.  
Format  
set rmon matrix  
interface  
interface  
interface  
Specifies the number of the interface for which you are creating a  
matrix table. Use the SHOW INTERFACE command for a list of  
interface numbers.  
interface  
The number of the interface.  
Example The following command creates a matrix of conversations monitored by  
interface 3:  
CB5000> set rmon matrix interface 3  
Entry 1 created.  
Related Command SHOW RMON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-216 SET RMON STATISTICS  
SET RMON STATISTICS  
Format  
Use the SET RMON STATISTICS command to enable monitoring by the RMON  
agent in the DMM for one of the RMON statistics groups.  
interface index  
set rmon statistics  
statistics group  
interface  
statistics group The specific statistics group for which you want statistics. The groups can  
be Ethernet, Token Ring, or Isolated.  
interface  
Specifies the interface for which you are creating a matrix table. Use the  
SHOW INTERFACE command for a list of interfaces supported in the  
switch.  
interface index Specifies the specific interface index number for which you want RMON  
Statistics.  
Example The following command enables RMON Ethernet statistics collection on  
interface 1:  
CB5000> set rmon statistics ethernet interface 1  
Entry 1 created.  
Related Commands CLEAR RMON STATISTICS  
SHOW RMON STATISTICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET RMON TOPN_HOSTS 2-217  
SET RMON  
TOPN_HOSTS  
Use the SET RMON TOPN_HOSTS command to create a table of the Top Hosts  
accruing the statistics entry you select. This command works only with Ethernet  
modules.  
This report sorts hosts based on that statistic, over a period of time you select.  
For example, the topN group can generate a report indicating the top 10 hosts  
that generated errors over the last half hour. The control table specifies:  
■ Statistic to use for the sort (Rate Base)  
■ Duration of the monitoring period  
■ Number of hosts to report (you cannot configure this from the command  
line)  
You can sort the data using any of the host table statistics. The generated  
report indicates in decreasing order:  
■ Hosts  
■ Actual rate for the sorted statistic for that host  
A topN report is generated directly from the host table. Therefore, the topN  
report points to a host control entry.  
Format  
set rmon topn_hosts  
host index  
interval  
in_octets  
in_packets  
out_bcasts  
out_errors  
out_mcasts  
out_octets  
out_packets  
host index  
in_octets  
in_packets  
Specifies the host index number from the host control table (use the SHOW  
RMON HOST CONTROL ALL command for a list).  
Specifies that the in_octets statistic is used to compile the Top Hosts list. The  
in_octets statistic specifies the number of octets coming into the network.  
Specifies that the in_packets statistic is used to compile the Top Hosts list.  
The in_packets statistic specifies the number of packets coming into the  
network.  
out_bcasts  
out_errors  
Specifies that the out_bcasts statistic is used to compile the Top Hosts list.  
The out_bcasts statistic specifies the number of broadcast packets being sent  
out onto the network.  
Specifies that the out_errors statistic is used to compile the Top Hosts list.  
The out_errors statistic specifies the number of errors being sent out onto  
the network.  
out_mcasts Specifies that the out_mcasts statistic is used to compile the Top Hosts list.  
The out_mcasts statistic specifies the number of multicast packets being sent  
out onto the network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-218 SET RMON TOPN_HOSTS  
out_octets  
Specifies that the out_octets statistic is used to compile the Top Hosts list.  
The out_octets statistic specifies the number of octets being sent out onto  
the network.  
out_packets Specifies that the out_packets statistic is used to compile the Top Hosts list.  
The out_packets statistic specifies the number of packets being sent out  
onto the network.  
interval  
Specifies the period of time (hh:mm) between samples.  
Example The following command creates a table every 30 seconds of the top stations  
sending out packets onto the network:  
CB5000> set rmon topn_hosts 1 out_packets 00:30  
Entry 1 created.  
Related Command SHOW RMON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET SCHEDULE 2-219  
SET SCHEDULE  
Use the SET SCHEDULE command to define the time a specified schedule runs a  
specified script.  
Prior to configuring schedules, use the SHOW CLOCK command to verify that  
the DMM's time and date are correct.  
Format  
1...20  
mm/dd  
exclude_date  
include_date  
set schedule  
holiday  
all  
exclude_day  
include_day  
sunday  
monday  
tuesday  
wednesday  
thursday  
friday  
saturday  
weekend  
weekday  
mode  
disable  
enable  
remove_date  
mm/dd  
holiday  
script  
1...8  
hh:mm  
time  
1...20  
all  
Identifies the schedule to be modified.  
Modifies all schedules.  
exclude_date  
Specifies a date to be excluded from the schedule. The script for this  
schedule does not run on the specified date.  
mm = 1 through 12, dd = 1 through 31  
exclude_date holiday  
Excludes holidays from the schedule. The script for this schedule  
does not run on holidays.  
Use the SET SCHEDULE HOLIDAY command to define which dates  
are holidays.  
include_date  
Specifies a date to be included in the schedule. The script for this  
schedule runs on the specified date.  
mm = 1 through 12, dd = 1 through 31  
include_date holiday  
Includes holidays in the schedule. The script for this schedule runs  
on holidays.  
Use the SET SCHEDULE HOLIDAY command to define which dates  
are holidays.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-220 SET SCHEDULE  
exclude_day sunday...saturday  
Specifies a day to exclude from the schedule. The script for this  
schedule does not run on the specified day.  
exclude_day weekend  
Excludes weekends from the schedule. The script for this schedule  
does not run on weekends.  
Use the SET SCHEDULE WEEKEND command to define which days  
are weekend days.  
exclude_day weekday  
Excludes weekdays from the schedule. The script for this schedule  
does not run on weekdays.  
Use the SET SCHEDULE WEEKDAY command to define which days  
are weekdays.  
include_day sunday...saturday  
include_day weekend  
Specifies a day to include in the schedule. The script for this  
schedule does not run on the specified day.  
Includes weekends in the schedule. The script for this schedule does  
run on weekends.  
Use the SET SCHEDULE WEEKEND command to define which days  
are defined as weekends.  
include_day weekday  
Includes weekdays in the schedule. The script for this schedule does  
run on weekdays.  
Use the SET SCHEDULE WEEKDAY command to define which days  
are defined as weekdays.  
enable  
disable  
Enables the schedule (specified at the beginning of the command).  
Disables the schedule (specified at the beginning of the command).  
remove_date mm/dd  
remove_date holiday  
Removes the given date or holiday from the list of dates for the  
schedule.  
time hh:mm  
Time the script (specified at the end of the command) runs on days  
included in the schedule (specified at the beginning of the  
command). hh = 0 through 23, mm = 0 through 59  
script 1...8  
Specifies the script to run for this schedule (specified at the  
beginning of the command).  
Example The following command specifies that schedule 1 run script 3 at 7:00 am:  
CB5000> set schedule 1 time 7:00 script 3  
Schedule 1 set to run script 3 at time 07:00.  
Related Commands SET SCHEDULE HOLIDAY  
SET SCHEDULE STARTUP_REPLAY_TIME  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKDAY  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKEND  
SHOW SCHEDULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET SCHEDULE HOLIDAY 2-221  
SET SCHEDULE  
HOLIDAY  
Use the SET SCHEDULE HOLIDAY command to define a holiday list of up to  
10 dates. After it is defined, you can use the Holiday option in the SET  
SCHEDULE command to run or not to run scripts on the dates specified in the  
holiday list.  
Format  
set schedule holiday  
include_date  
remove_date  
all  
date  
include_date  
remove_date  
all  
Specifies a date to include in a holiday list.  
mm = 1 through 12, dd = 1 through 31  
Removes a date from the holiday list.  
mm = 1 through 12, dd = 1 through 31  
Removes all dates from the holiday list.  
Example The following command defines January 1 as a holiday:  
CB5000> set schedule holiday include_date 1/1  
Date 1/1 included in HOLIDAY list.  
Related Commands SET SCHEDULE  
SET SCHEDULE STARTUP_REPLAY_TIME  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKDAY  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKEND  
SHOW SCHEDULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-222 SET SCHEDULE STARTUP_REPLAY_ TIME  
SET SCHEDULE  
STARTUP_REPLAY_  
TIME  
Use the SET SCHEDULE STARTUP_REPLAY_TIME to configure the DMM to run  
previously scheduled scripts whenever the DMM is reset. The command lets you  
define how far back (up to 24 hours) the DMM should search for scripts to run.  
For example, after a DMM is reset, if the Startup Replay Time is defined as  
6 (hours) and the current time is 8:00 am, the DMM executes all scripts that  
should have occurred since 2:00 am.  
Format  
set schedule startup_replay_time  
0...24  
since_midnight  
0...24  
When the DMM is reset, it runs scripts that were scheduled to  
run prior to the reset. The number you enter is the number of  
hours the DMM searches backwards for scripts to run.  
A value of 0 disables the function.  
since_midnight  
When the DMM is reset, it runs all scripts that were scheduled to  
run since the preceding midnight.  
Example The following command causes the DMM to execute all scripts defined in  
schedules that were scheduled to run 6 hours or less previous to the time it is  
reset:  
CB5000> set schedule startup_replay_time 6  
The startup_replay_time is set to 6 hour(s).  
Related Commands SET SCHEDULE  
SET SCHEDULE HOLIDAY  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKDAY  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKEND  
SHOW SCHEDULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SCHEDULE WEEKDAY 2-223  
SET SCHEDULE  
WEEKDAY  
Use the SET SCHEDULE WEEKDAY command to define a list of weekdays  
containing up to seven days. After it is defined, you can use the Weekday  
option in the SET SCHEDULE command to run or not run scripts on the days in  
the list of weekdays.  
Format  
set schedule weekday  
include_day  
remove_day  
all  
day  
include_day  
remove_day  
all  
Adds a specified day to the list of weekdays.  
Removes the specified day from the list of weekdays.  
Specifies all days to include or remove.  
day  
List of days. Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday,  
Friday  
Example The following command includes Monday in the list of weekdays:  
CB5000> set schedule weekday include_day monday  
MONDAY included in WEEKDAY variable.  
Related Commands SET SCHEDULE  
SET SCHEDULE HOLIDAY  
SET SCHEDULE STARTUP_REPLAY_TIME  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKEND  
SHOW SCHEDULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-224 SET SCHEDULE WEEKEND  
SET SCHEDULE  
WEEKEND  
Use the SET SCHEDULE WEEKEND command to define a list of weekend days  
containing up to seven days. After it is defined, you can use the Weekend  
option in the SET SCHEDULE command to run or not run scripts on the days in  
the list of weekend days.  
Format  
set schedule weekend  
include_day  
remove_day  
all  
day  
include_day  
remove_day  
Specifies a day to add to the list of weekend days.  
Removes the specified day from the list of weekend  
days.  
all  
Adds or removes all days from the list of weekend  
days.  
Example The following command removes Sunday from the lists of days defined as  
weekend days:  
CB5000> set schedule weekend remove_day sunday  
SUNDAY removed from WEEKEND variable.  
Related Commands SET SCHEDULE  
SET SCHEDULE HOLIDAY  
SET SCHEDULE STARTUP_REPLAY_TIME  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKDAY  
SHOW SCHEDULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SCRIPT DELETE 2-225  
SET SCRIPT DELETE  
Format  
Use the SET SCRIPT DELETE command to delete a line from a script.  
1...15  
1...8  
delete  
set script  
1...8  
Identifies the script to be modified. Use the SHOW SCRIPT command  
with the ALL option for a numbered list of scripts.  
1...15  
Identifies the line to be deleted. Use the SHOW SCRIPT command with  
the VERBOSE option to view the lines in a script.  
Example The following command removes line 6 from script 1:  
CB5000> set script 1 delete 6  
Line 6 deleted from SCRIPT 1.  
Related Commands SET SCRIPT INSERT  
SET SCRIPT NAME  
SET SCRIPT OVERWRITE  
SHOW SCRIPT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-226 SET SCRIPT INSERT  
SET SCRIPT INSERT  
Format  
Use the SET SCRIPT INSERT command to insert new commands into a script.  
insert  
1...15  
1...8  
set script  
1...8  
Identifies the script to be modified. Use the SHOW SCRIPT command  
with the ALL option for a numbered list of scripts.  
1...15  
Identifies the line to be inserted. Use the SHOW SCRIPT command  
with the VERBOSE option to view the script with line numbers.  
Example The following command opens script 1 for editing at line 11:  
CB5000> set script 1 insert 11  
Enter line(s) to insert. Enter a blank line to quit this mode.  
Related Commands SET SCRIPT DELETE  
SET SCRIPT NAME  
SET SCRIPT OVERWRITE  
SHOW SCRIPT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SCRIPT NAME 2-227  
SET SCRIPT NAME  
Format  
Use the SET SCRIPT NAME command to assign a name to a script.  
set script  
1...8  
name  
scriptname  
1...8  
Identifies the script to be named. Use the SHOW SCRIPT command  
with the ALL option for a numbered list of scripts and their current  
names.  
scriptname  
Name for the script, up to 16 characters.  
Example The following command assigns the name Engineering1 to script 3:  
CB5000> set script 3 name Engineering1  
Name set for script 3.  
Related Commands SET SCRIPT DELETE  
SET SCRIPT INSERT  
SET SCRIPT OVERWRITE  
SET SCRIPT RUN_ON_EVENT  
SHOW SCRIPT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-228 SET SCRIPT OVERWRITE  
SET SCRIPT  
OVERWRITE  
Use the SET SCRIPT OVERWRITE command to add new commands to a script  
starting at a specified line number, replacing current lines.  
Format  
set script  
1...8  
overwrite  
1...15  
1...8  
Identifies the script to be modified. Use the SHOW SCRIPT command  
with the ALL option for a numbered list of scripts.  
1...15  
Number of the line to be overwritten. Use the SHOW SCRIPT  
command with the VERBOSE option to view the script with line  
numbers.  
Example The following command opens script 3 at line 1 for editing. New lines overwrite  
current lines.  
CB5000> set script 3 overwrite 1  
Enter line(s) to overwrite. Enter a blank line to quit this mode.  
Related Commands SET SCRIPT DELETE  
SET SCRIPT INSERT  
SET SCRIPT NAME  
SET SCRIPT RUN_ON_EVENT  
SHOW SCRIPT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SCRIPT RUN_ON_EVENT 2-229  
SET SCRIPT  
RUN_ON_EVENT  
Use the SET SCRIPT RUN_ON_EVENT command to associate a script with an  
RMON event. When the RMON event occurs, the associated script runs  
automatically.  
Format  
set script  
1...8  
run_on_event  
event  
1...8  
event  
Identifies the script name to be modified. Use the SHOW SCRIPT  
command with the ALL option for a numbered list of scripts.  
Use the SHOW RMON EVENT CONTROL ALL command to view index  
names.  
Example The following command associates RMON event 3 with script 5:  
CB5000> set script 5 run_on_event 3  
Related Commands SET SCRIPT DELETE  
SET SCRIPT INSERT  
SET SCRIPT NAME  
SHOW SCRIPT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-230 SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN CAPTURE  
SET SECURITY  
AUTOLEARN CAPTURE  
Use the SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN CAPTURE command to initiate the  
Autolearn feature for a specified port.  
This command applies to the CoreBuilder 5000 Token Ring modules only.  
Autolearning allows the DMM to continuously monitor network activity and  
automatically learn the valid MAC addresses associated with a port on the  
module.  
Format  
set security autolearn  
slot.port  
capture  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 20) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies all ports in a slot. slot is the slot number.  
capture  
Instructs the DMM to learn all valid addresses for a port.  
Example The following command allows the MAC addresses associated with all ports on  
the module in slot 3 to be learned by the DMM during Autolearning:  
CB5000> set security autolearn 3.all capture  
Autolearn capture done; learned 3 addresses total.  
Related Commands CLEAR SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
SHOW SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN DOWNLOAD 2-231  
SET SECURITY  
AUTOLEARN  
DOWNLOAD  
Use the SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN DOWNLOAD command to download the  
contents of the Autolearning database to the specified ports for the MAC  
addresses to be associated with a port. This command is available for Token  
Ring modules only.  
Downloading the Autolearning database allows the learned MAC addresses for  
a port to be associated with the ports specified in the AUTOLEARN DOWNLOAD  
command line.  
The DMM allows a maximum of 360 MAC addresses in the Autolearning  
database per hub.  
Because no more than seven MAC addresses can be associated with one port,  
only seven MAC addresses are downloaded per port. The seven MAC addresses  
with the lowest alphanumeric values are downloaded from the Autolearning  
database to a module port.  
The following message is displayed upon completion of the AUTOLEARN  
DOWNLOAD command (where y indicates the total number of addresses copied  
to a port’s MAC address table):  
Autolearn download done; downloaded y addresses total.  
If a port has more than seven MAC addresses in the Autolearning database at  
the time of the download, the following message is displayed upon completion  
of the AUTOLEARN DOWNLOAD command:  
Note: at least one autolearned address was skipped because the  
port with which it is associated has more than 7 autolearned  
addresses.  
If any MAC address was skipped because the hub limit of 360 addresses was  
reached, the following message is displayed upon completion of the  
AUTOLEARN DOWNLOAD command:  
Note: the number of autolearned addresses exceeds the hub limit.  
Only the first 360 addresses (as ordered by slot, port, and addr)  
were downloaded.  
Format  
set security autolearn  
slot.port  
download  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 20) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies all ports in a slot. slot is the slot number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-232 SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN DOWNLOAD  
Example The following command initiates a download of the Autolearning database to  
all ports on the module in slot 3:  
CB5000> set security autolearn 3.all download  
Autolearn download done; downloaded 3 addresses total.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN MAC_ADDRESS 2-233  
SET SECURITY  
AUTOLEARN  
MAC_ADDRESS  
Use the SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN MAC_ADDRESS command to manually add  
a MAC address to the Autolearning database. This command applies to Token  
Ring modules only.  
Format  
mac address  
set security autolearn  
slot.port  
mac_address  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 20) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies all ports in a slot. slot is the slot number.  
mac address  
MAC address you are configuring using this command. The format for  
MAC addresses is nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn  
The address 00-00-00-00-00-00 is invalid for this command.  
Example The following command adds the MAC address 07-34-24-02-0F-00 to the  
Autolearning database and associates it with port 1 in slot 3:  
CB5000> set security autolearn 3.1 mac_address 07-34-24-02-0F-00  
Address 07-34-24-02-0F-00 associated with port 03.01 in  
Autolearning area.  
Related Commands CLEAR SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
SHOW SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-234 SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN MASK  
SET SECURITY  
AUTOLEARN MASK  
Use the SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN MASK command to allow or prevent a  
port’s MAC addresses from being learned by the DMM during Autolearning.  
This setting also determines whether the DMM is allowed or prevented from  
downloading learned MAC addresses to the port. This command applies to  
Token Ring modules only.  
Format  
slot.port  
slot.  
set security autolearn  
mask  
enable  
disable  
all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 20) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies all ports in a slot. slot is the slot number.  
enable  
Masks learning by preventing the DMM security feature from  
automatically learning MAC addresses associated with this port.  
disable  
Does not mask learning. Allows the DMM to automatically learn MAC  
addresses associated with this port.  
Example The following command allows the MAC addresses associated with all ports on  
the module in slot 3 to be learned by the DMM during Autolearning:  
CB5000> set security autolearn 3.all mask disable  
Port 03.all autolearn mask set to DISABLED.  
Related Commands CLEAR SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
SHOW SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SECURITY PORT ACTION_ON_ INTRUSION 2-235  
SET SECURITY PORT  
ACTION_ON_  
INTRUSION  
Use the SET SECURITY PORT ACTION_ON_INTRUSION command to define the  
action the DMM takes when a port-to-MAC address security intrusion occurs.  
The DMM always logs the intrusion in the Intruder List.  
Format  
set security port  
action_on_intrusion  
slot.port  
disable_and_trap  
disable_only  
no_action  
slot.all  
trap_only  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the location of a module in the hub and  
port is the port number on the specified module. For example, to  
identify port 4 on the 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies all ports on the module in a slot.  
disable_and_trap  
When an intrusion occurs, the DMM disables the port and sends  
traps as defined in the community table. This is the factory setting.  
disable_only  
When an intrusion occurs, the DMM disables the port, but sends  
no traps.  
no_action  
trap_only  
When an intrusion occurs, the DMM takes no action.  
When an intrusion occurs, the DMM send traps as defined in the  
community table, but does not disable the port.  
Example The following command specifies that the DMM take no action when an  
intrusion occurs on port 1 in slot 3:  
CB5000> set security port 3.1 action_on_intrusion no_action  
Port 03.01 action_on_intrusion set to NO_ACTION.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY INTRUDER_LIST  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-236 SET SECURITY PORT MAC_ADDRESS  
SET SECURITY PORT  
MAC_ADDRESS  
Use the SET SECURITY PORT MAC_ADDRESS command to enter a MAC address  
into the secure MAC address table. The secure MAC address table contains a  
maximum of eight MAC addresses for each port in the hub.  
When you enable security using the SET SECURITY PORT MODE command, the  
DMM monitors each port for packets containing a source address not found in  
the secure MAC address table for that port. If the DMM detects such a packet,  
it takes action based on the settings of the SET SECURITY  
ACTION_ON_INTRUSION command.  
The following addresses are invalid for this command:  
■ 00-00-00-00-00-00  
■ ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff  
Format  
mac_address  
mac address  
slot.port  
set security port  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port is the port number on the specified module. For example, to  
identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies all ports on a module in a specified slot.  
mac address  
MAC address to be entered into the secure MAC address table. Enter  
the address as a series of six hexadecimal bytes separated by hyphens.  
For example, 10-00-f1-0f-0c-63.  
Example The following command enters MAC address 07-34-24-02-0F-00 into the secure  
MAC address table for port 2 on slot 3:  
CB5000> set security port 3.2 mac_address 07-34-24-02-0F-00  
Security MAC address (noncanonical) 07-34-24-02-0F-00 on port  
03.02.  
Related Command SET SECURITY PORT MODE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SECURITY PORT MODE 2-237  
SET SECURITY PORT  
MODE  
Use the SET SECURITY PORT MODE command to enable or disable address  
security for a specified port.  
If you enable security mode for a port that does not have MAC addresses  
associated with it, the DMM treats each packet as an intrusion.  
Format  
mode  
disable  
enable  
slot.port  
set security port  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the location of a module in the hub and port is  
the port number on the specified module. For example, to identify  
port 4 on the module in slot 6 enter 6.4  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies all ports on a module in a slot.  
Disables security mode for the specified port.  
Enables security mode for the specified port.  
Example The following command enables security on port 2 in slot 3:  
CB5000> set security port 3.2 mode enable  
Port 03.02 security mode set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SET SECURITY PORT MAC_ADDRESS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-238 SET SECURITY_ADVANCED ADDRESS_TABLE ADDRESS  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED ADDRESS_TABLE ADDRESS command to  
manually configure your security address table for the Ethernet Private Line  
Card.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
ADDRESS_TABLE  
ADDRESS  
In some instances, it is preferable to manually configure your security address  
table. For example, if you work in an environment that demands a high level of  
security, you may not want to enable autolearning on a secure network.  
In this type of environment, manually add users to the security address table.  
To add address information to your table manually, you can enter either:  
■ A MAC address and associated port  
■ A MAC address and associated group code  
must  
The host module cannot autolearn group codes. You  
set them manually.  
Format  
slot.port  
group  
port  
set security_advanced address_table address  
address  
all  
group  
delete  
address  
all  
Address you want to add to the security address table.  
Adds all addresses to this port or group.  
delete  
Deletes the indicated MAC address, or all MAC addresses, from the  
address table.  
slot.port  
group  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
Specifies a port group which to apply this command.  
Example The following command adds a MAC address and port 5.1 to your security  
address table:  
CB5000> set security_advanced address_table address  
40-40-34-e5-00-23 port 5.1  
Security Address Table update in progress...  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED INTRUDER_TABLE DELETE 2-239  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED INTRUDER_TABLE DELETE command to  
delete an intruder table for the Ethernet Private Line Card.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
INTRUDER_TABLE  
DELETE  
In some instances you may consider deleting your intruder table. For example, in  
the event that you receive a large amount of network intrusions due to the  
failsafe parameter, you may opt to delete the intruder table after you correct the  
source of the problem.  
Format  
set security_advanced intruder_table delete  
Example The following command deletes the current intruder table:  
CB5000> set security_advanced intruder_table delete  
No such intruder  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-240 SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK AUTOLEARNING  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK AUTOLEARNING command to  
enable port autolearning on a secure network.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
NETWORK  
AUTOLEARNING  
After it is enabled, you can use this command, with other port and network  
parameters, to secure ports connected to the secure network.  
If network autolearning is enabled, you must also enable per-port autolearning.  
manually  
Any time you  
add an address to the Security Address Table, the system  
removes previous port assignments for that address. However, if you enable  
autolearning, the system does not modify the Security Address Table entries if  
they are assigned to a group code.  
Format  
set security_advanced network  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
autolearning  
disable  
enable  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
disable  
Specifies which Ethernet network to apply the command.  
Specifies which isolated network to apply the command.  
Disables autolearning.  
enable  
Enables autolearning.  
Example The following command enables autolearning on ethernet_1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced network ethernet_1 autolearning  
enable  
ETHERNET_1 Autolearning: set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK EAVESDROP_ PROTECTION 2-241  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK EAVESDROP_PROTECTION  
command to enable eavesdropping protection on an Ethernet network that has  
an Ethernet Private Line Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
NETWORK  
EAVESDROP_  
PROTECTION  
Enabling eavesdrop protection on a secure network allows you to prevent all  
ports with per-port jamming enabled from eavesdropping on a secure network.  
This prevents intruders and other valid users from examining the contents of a  
packet destined for another port.  
When you enable network eavesdropping and autolearning, the network passes  
packets with unknown destinations to all ports.  
Format  
set security_advanced network  
ethernet_1...8 eavesdrop_protection  
isolated_1...8  
disable  
enable  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
disable  
Specifies which Ethernet network to apply this command.  
Specifies which isolated network to apply this command.  
Disables eavesdrop protection.  
enable  
Enables eavesdrop protection.  
Example The following command assigns eavesdrop protection to ethernet_1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced network ethernet_1  
eavesdrop_protection enable  
ETHERNET_1 Eavesdrop Protection: set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-242 SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK INTRUDER_JAMMING  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK INTRUDER_JAMMING command  
to enable intruder jamming protection on an Ethernet network that has a  
Ethernet Private Line Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
NETWORK  
INTRUDER_JAMMING  
When an intruder packet is detected on a secure network, the intruder jamming  
network parameter enables the host module to transmit a jam message to all  
ports on the network. This prevents all end nodes from receiving or examining  
the contents of the intruder packets.  
If you enable intruder jamming on your network, you must also enable either  
the source port checking or the source address checking network parameter. If  
you do not enable either of these parameters, the host module does not detect  
intruder packets.  
Format  
set security_advanced network  
intruder_jamming enable  
disable  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
enable  
Specifies which Ethernet network to apply this command.  
Specifies which isolated network to apply this command.  
Enables intruder jamming.  
disable  
Disables intruder jamming.  
Example The following command assigns intruder jamming to ethernet_1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced network ethernet_1 intruder_jamming  
enable  
ETHERNET_1 Intruder Jamming: set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK INTRUDER_PORT_ DISABLING 2-243  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK INTRUDER_PORT_DISABLING  
command to automatically disable ports that receive intruder packets on an  
Ethernet network that has an Ethernet Private Line Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
NETWORK  
INTRUDER_PORT_  
DISABLING  
When you enable intruder port disabling, ports that transmit intruder packets  
are disabled automatically.  
If you enable intruder port disabling on your network, you must also enable  
either the source port checking or the source address checking network  
parameter. If you do not enable either of these parameters, the host module  
does not detect intruder packets.  
If you enable intruder port disabling, intruder reporting is automatically enabled  
as well.  
Format  
1...8  
ethernet_  
set security_advanced network  
intruder_port_disabling  
enable  
disable  
1...8  
isolated_  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
enable  
Specifies which Ethernet network to apply this command.  
Specifies which isolated network to apply this command.  
Enables intruder port disabling.  
disable  
Disables intruder port disabling.  
Example The following command disables intruder ports on ethernet_1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced network ethernet_1  
intruder_port_disabling enable  
ETHERNET_1 Intruder Port Disabling: set to ENABLED.  
ETHERNET_1 Intruder Reporting: set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-244 SET SECURITY_ADVANCEDNETWORK INTRUDER_REPORTING  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK INTRUDER_REPORTING command  
to track intrusion attempts on an Ethernet network that has an Ethernet Private  
Line Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
NETWORK  
INTRUDER_REPORTING  
To track intrusion attempts on a secure network, you must enable the intruder  
reporting network parameter. This parameter enables the Ethernet Private Line  
Card to instruct a media module to report intrusion attempts on a secure  
network. The DMM stores all reported intrusion attempts in the Intruder Table.  
The Security Intruder Table has a limit of 100 intrusion entries. After the table  
reaches the maximum limit, older entries expire automatically.  
To report intruders on a secure network, you must enable the source address  
checking or the source port checking network parameter. If you do not enable  
either of these parameters, the system does not detect intruders.  
Format  
set security_advanced network  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
intruder_reporting  
enable  
disable  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
enable  
Specifies which Ethernet network to apply this command.  
Specifies which isolated network to apply this command.  
Enables intruder reporting.  
disable  
Disables intruder reporting.  
Example The following command enables intruder reporting on ethernet_1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced network ethernet_1  
intruder_reporting enable  
ETHERNET_1 Intruder Reporting: set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK MODE 2-245  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK MODE command to enable or  
disable security functions on an Ethernet network that has an Ethernet Private  
Line Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
NETWORK MODE  
The security mode network parameter allows you to disable or enable all  
network security functions. When this function is disabled, the Ethernet Private  
Line Card does not send security messages to any media module connected to a  
secure network. Consequently, if this parameter is disabled, none of the  
network parameters function.  
Do not enable this network parameter until you have completed configuring the  
remaining network parameters. This ensures that your network security  
configuration is completed when you enable security on the network.  
Format  
set security_advanced network  
mode  
enable  
disable  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
all  
ethernet_1...8 Specifies which Ethernet network to apply this command.  
isolated_1...8 Specifies which isolated network to apply this command.  
all  
Specifies that this command applies to all Ethernet networks.  
Enables security mode.  
enable  
disable  
Disables security mode.  
Example The following command enables security functions on ethernet_1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced network ethernet_1 mode enable  
ETHERNET_1 Administrative Mode set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-246 SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK SOURCE_ADDRESS_ CHECKING  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK SOURCE_ADDRESS_CHECKING  
command to enable source address checking on an Ethernet network that has a  
Ethernet Private Line Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
NETWORK  
SOURCE_ADDRESS_  
CHECKING  
When you enable source address checking, the source address of each packet  
transmitted on a secure network is checked against an established list of valid  
MAC addresses in the security address table. If the source address of the port  
does not match an address in the security table, the packet is treated as an  
intruder.  
If you enable source address checking on your network, only ports with intruder  
checking enabled are looked up in the security address table.  
When you enable source port checking, the Ethernet Private Line Card enables  
source address checking automatically.  
Format  
set security_advanced network  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
source_address_checking enable  
disable  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
enable  
Specifies which Ethernet network to apply this command.  
Specifies which isolated network to apply this command.  
Enables source address checking.  
disable  
Disables source address checking.  
Example The following command enables source address checking on ethernet_1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced network ethernet_1  
source_address_checking enable  
ETHERNET_1 Source Address Checking: set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK SOURCE_PORT_ CHECKING 2-247  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK SOURCE_PORT_CHECKING  
command to enable source port checking on an Ethernet network that has a  
Ethernet Private Line Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
NETWORK  
SOURCE_PORT_  
CHECKING  
When you enable source port checking, the source port number and MAC  
address of each packet transmitted on a secure network is checked against an  
established list of valid port numbers and MAC addresses in the security address  
table. If the source port number and MAC address of the packet does not  
match the port number and MAC address in the security table, the packet is  
treated as an intruder.  
If you enable source port checking on your network, only ports with intruder  
checking enabled are looked up in the security address table.  
When you enable source port checking, the Ethernet Private Line Card enables  
source address checking automatically.  
Format  
set security_advanced network  
source_port_checking  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
enable  
disable  
ethernet_1...8  
isolated_1...8  
enable  
Specifies which Ethernet network to apply this command.  
Specifies which isolated network to apply this command.  
Enables source port checking.  
disable  
Disables source port checking.  
Example The following command enables source port checking on ethernet_1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced network ethernet_1  
source_port_checking enable  
ETHERNET_1 Source Port Checking: set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-248 SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT AUTOLEARN  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT AUTOLEARN command to  
automatically discover MAC addresses associated with ports on an Ethernet  
network that has an Ethernet Private Line Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
PORT AUTOLEARN  
Autolearning enables the CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet Private Line Card to scan a  
secure network and store the MAC address and associated port of each node  
on the network in the security address table. After it is enabled, you can use  
this parameter, with other port and network parameters, to secure the port.  
If autolearning is enabled on a per-port level, you must also enable network  
autolearning and connect each port to a secure network.  
Format  
autolearn  
slot.port  
enable  
disable  
set security_advanced port  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot location of a module in the hub and  
port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified module. For  
example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
enable  
disable  
Specifies all ports in a slot. slot is the slot number.  
Enables the autolearn feature.  
Disables the autolearn feature.  
Example The following command enables autolearning on port 5.1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced port 5.1 autolearn enable  
Port 05.01 autolearn set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT FAILSAFE 2-249  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT FAILSAFE command to require security  
message transmissions on an Ethernet network that has an Ethernet Private Line  
Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
PORT FAILSAFE  
This port parameter instructs any media module connected to a secure network  
to expect a security message transmission from the Ethernet Private Line Card  
for each transmitted packet. This message provides information on whether or  
not the module should jam a transmitted packet.  
If, however, a security message for a packet is not transmitted to the media  
module, and per-port jamming as well as failsafe are enabled, the media  
module automatically jams all outgoing packets.  
You must enable both failsafe and per-port jamming for the failsafe feature to  
function. Do not enable failsafe on a port until that port is operational and the  
appropriate security port and network parameters are set.  
After security is configured, do not disable security on a network that has  
per-port failsafe enabled, or switch a secure port to an unsecured network.  
Disabling security or switching the port to an unsecured network causes the  
failsafe port parameter to jam all transmitted packets destined for the port.  
Format  
failsafe  
slot.port  
enable  
disable  
set security_advanced port  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
enable  
disable  
Specifies all ports in a slot. slot is the slot number.  
Enables port failsafe.  
Disables port failsafe.  
Example The following command enables failsafe on port 5.1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced port 5.1 failsafe enable  
Port 05.01 failsafe set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-250 SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT GROUP_CODE_(A,B)  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT GROUP_CODE_(A,B) command to  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
PORT  
assign the same MAC address to two ports on an Ethernet network that has a  
CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet Private Line Card assigned to it. Group codes enable  
you to assign a single MAC address to multiple ports on a secure network. This  
is an important feature when you use two ports to form a redundant link to a  
node. You can also assign each port to a maximum of two group codes. Refer  
to the module user guide for a sample configuration that uses group codes.  
GROUP_CODE_(A,B)  
If you assign multiple ports to a single group code, data sourced from addresses  
also associated with the group code are transmitted to the network.  
.
Group code 256 is a global group code The global group code lets certain ports  
route packets with unknown destinations. If, for example, one of the ports on a  
media module connects to another hub or to an external bridge, you must  
configure that port using the global group code. This prevents traffic destined  
for another hub from being jammed.  
If you configure a port with jamming and assign the global group code to that  
not  
port, any packets that the system transmits on the originating hub that are  
destined for a node on a remote hub are still jammed at that port. Only packets  
with an unknown destination are sent to the remote hub.  
Format  
group_code_a  
group_code_b  
slot.port  
value  
set security_advanced port  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the  
hub and port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified  
module. For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6,  
enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Specifies all ports in a slot. slot is the slot number in the hub.  
The group code you are assigning the MAC address to.  
User-defined group code number:  
0 (no group)  
group_code_(a,b)  
value  
1 through 254  
Example The following command assigns a group code a value of 23 on port 5.1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced port 5.1 group_code_a 23  
Port 05.01 group_code_A set to 23.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT INTRUDER_CHECKING 2-251  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT INTRUDER_CHECKING command to  
enable intruder checking on ports in an Ethernet network that has an Ethernet  
Private Line Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
PORT  
INTRUDER_CHECKING  
When you enable per-port intruder checking, the Ethernet Private Line Card  
compares each packet’s source MAC address against an established list of valid  
MAC addresses in the security address table. If the source address of the port  
does not match an address in the security table, the packet is treated as an  
intruder.  
You must have the source address checking network parameter enabled to look  
up the source address of a transmitted packet. To look up the source port  
number, you must have the source port checking network parameter enabled. If  
both of these network parameters are enabled, both the source address and  
related source port number must match a port number and MAC address in the  
security address table, or the packet is treated as an intruder.  
Format  
intruder_checking  
slot.port  
disable  
enable  
set security_advanced port  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
disable  
enable  
Specifies all ports on a module. slot is the slot number of the module.  
Disables intruder checking.  
Enables intruder checking.  
Example The following command enables intruder checking on port 5.1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced port 5.1 intruder_checking enable  
Port 05.01 intruder_checking set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-252 SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT JAMMING  
SET  
Use the SET SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT JAMMING command to prevent  
eavesdropping and intruder packets on an Ethernet network that has an  
Ethernet Private Line Card assigned to it.  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
PORT JAMMING  
Port jamming enables you to prevent eavesdropping, jam frames sourced from  
an intruder on a secure network, and optionally jam all packets for which there  
is no associated security message.  
When you enable port jamming and the system transmits a packet on the  
network, the Ethernet Private Line Card sends a security message to all media  
modules on the secure network. This message instructs the media module to  
jam all ports on the secure network except the port that is the intended  
recipient of the transmitted packet.  
If jamming is enabled on a per-port level, you must also enable network  
eavesdrop protection and connect each port to a secure network. If you also  
want to prevent each port from seeing intruder transmissions, you must enable  
the intruder jamming network parameter.  
The port jamming parameter is enabled by default. This prevents new users  
from both eavesdropping and seeing packets sourced from an intruder on  
another port.  
Format  
slot.port  
set security_advanced port  
jamming  
enable  
disable  
slot.all  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number location of a module in the hub  
and port (1 through 40) is the port number on the specified module.  
For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
enable  
disable  
Specifies all ports in a slot. slot is the slot number.  
Enables jamming.  
Disables jamming.  
Example The following command enables port jamming on port 5.1:  
CB5000> set security_advanced port 5.1 jamming enable  
Port 05.01 jamming set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET SONET CLOCK_SOURCE 2-253  
SET SONET  
CLOCK_SOURCE  
Use the SET SONET CLOCK_SOURCE command to determine whether the  
module generates SONET timing locally (internal) or derives timing from the  
received signal on the SONET interface (external). This parameter is configurable  
per physical port (PHY).  
Setting this parameter takes effect immediately and does not require a module  
reset.  
Format  
clock_source  
internal  
external  
set sonet  
slot.phy  
slot.phy  
Identifies the slot and port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and phy (1 or 2) is the  
PHY port number. For example, to identify PHY port 1 on  
the module in slot 4, enter 4.1  
internal  
external  
Generates SONET timing locally.  
Derives timing from the received signal on the SONET  
interface. The default value is external.  
Example The following command sets the clock source to internal:  
CB5000> set sonet 4.1 clock_source internal  
Slot 04.01 parameter set.  
Related Command SHOW SONET STATUS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-254 SET TERMINAL BAUD  
SET TERMINAL BAUD  
Use the SET TERMINAL BAUD command to set the baud rate for a serial  
(Console or Auxiliary) port. The baud rates of the serial port and the connected  
device must match.  
When using higher baud rates (19200 and 38400), enable Xon/Xoff flow  
control on the connected device.  
To connect a device that is set to a different baud rate than the serial port,  
change the serial port baud rate to the baud rate used by the device as follows:  
1 Set a terminal to 9600 baud and press Enter to access the DMM.  
2 Enter the SET TERMINAL BAUD command to set the baud rate to your  
specifications. After you set the new rate, you lose your connection to the  
DMM.  
3 Remove the terminal connection and connect the device that has the different  
baud rate to resume your connection to the DMM or change the connected  
device to the new baud rate.  
4 Enter the SAVE TERMINAL command to save the new terminal setting.  
Format  
console  
baud  
rate  
set terminal  
auxiliary  
console  
auxiliary  
rate  
Selects the Console port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the Auxiliary port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the baud rate for the Console or Auxiliary port.  
rate = 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400  
The factory default setting is 9600.  
Example The following command sets the Auxiliary port baud rate to 2400:  
CB5000> set terminal auxiliary baud 2400  
Terminal parameter changed.  
Related Command SHOW TERMINAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET TERMINAL DATA_BITS 2-255  
SET TERMINAL  
DATA_BITS  
Use the SET TERMINAL DATA_BITS command to set the number of data bits  
used for a serial (Console or Auxiliary) port.  
Format  
console  
data_bits  
bits  
set terminal  
auxiliary  
console  
auxiliary  
bits  
Selects the Console port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the Auxiliary port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the number of data bits for the serial port.  
bits = 7 or 8  
The factory default setting is 8.  
Example The following command sets the Auxiliary port data bits to 7:  
CB5000> set terminal auxiliary data_bits 7  
Terminal parameter changed.  
Related Command SHOW TERMINAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-256 SET TERMINAL HANGUP  
SET TERMINAL  
HANGUP  
Use the SET TERMINAL HANGUP command to set the hangup parameter for the  
DMM. The hangup parameter value applies to both the Console and Auxiliary  
ports. When hangup is enabled, the DMM automatically disconnects the  
modem when you log out.  
The default factory setting is disable. If hangup is disabled, the modem is  
disconnected either by the terminal timing out or by your manually hanging up  
the modem.  
If you fail to hang up the modem connection, an unauthorized user may pick  
up the last login session.  
Format  
console  
hangup  
disable  
enable  
set terminal  
auxiliary  
console  
auxiliary  
disable  
Selects the Console port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the Auxiliary port as the serial port for this operation.  
Disables hangup for the Console and Auxiliary ports.  
The factory setting is disable.  
enable  
Enables hangup for the Console and Auxiliary ports.  
Example The following command disables hangup on the Console port:  
CB5000> set terminal console hangup disable  
Terminal parameter changed.  
Related Command SHOW TERMINAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET TERMINAL MODE 2-257  
SET TERMINAL MODE  
Use the SET TERMINAL MODE command to set a serial (Console or Auxiliary)  
port to command_line or SLIP (Serial Line Interface Protocol) mode. SLIP allows  
TCP/IP connections over a serial line. Its primary application in the hub is to  
allow you to connect a workstation running network management software to  
a DMM serial port.  
To open a SLIP session, enter the following commands from either serial port or  
by using TELNET:  
■ SET IP SUBNET_MASK mask SLIP (where the mask is the workstation’s IP  
subnet)  
■ SET IP IP_ADDRESS address SLIP (where the address is the DMM IP address  
for the SLIP network)  
■ SET TERMINAL port (baud, data_bits, parity, stop_bits) (set as appropriate for  
the serial connection running SLIP)  
■ SET TERMINAL port MODE SLIP (which sets the port to SLIP)  
Use a standard break character to end the SLIP session and return the SLIP port  
to command line mode.  
Format  
console  
mode  
command_line  
ip address  
set terminal  
auxiliary  
slip  
console  
Selects the Console port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the Auxiliary port as the serial port for this operation.  
Sets the selected port to command_line mode.  
The default factory setting is command_line.  
auxiliary  
command_line  
slip  
Sets the selected port to SLIP mode.  
ip address  
The destination IP address for the SLIP connection.  
Example The following command sets the console port to SLIP mode:  
CB5000> set terminal console mode slip 155.104.12.16  
Terminal parameter changed.  
Related Command SHOW TERMINAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-258 SET TERMINAL PARITY  
SET TERMINAL PARITY Use the SET TERMINAL PARITY command to set the parity for the serial (Console  
or Auxiliary) port.  
Format  
console  
parity  
type  
set terminal  
auxiliary  
console  
auxiliary  
type  
Selects the Console port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the Auxiliary port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the parity type for the serial port.  
type = even, odd, none  
The default factory setting is none.  
Example The following command sets the Console port parity to even:  
CB5000> set terminal console parity even  
Terminal parameter changed.  
Related Command SHOW TERMINAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET TERMINAL PROMPT 2-259  
SET TERMINAL  
PROMPT  
Use the SET TERMINAL PROMPT command to customize the management  
prompt that is displayed on your terminal during a terminal session. The prompt  
is used for both the Console and Auxiliary ports.  
If you log in to a number of different DMMs remotely, make the terminal  
prompt and the device name the same for each individual DMM. Using the  
same name makes it easy to identify the hub you are currently logged in to. The  
factory default setting is CB5000>.  
Format  
prompt  
prompt text  
set terminal  
prompt text  
The prompt that appears during a terminal session. Use up to 15  
characters.  
Example The following command sets the prompt to my_hub>:  
CB5000> set terminal prompt my_hub>  
Terminal parameter changed.  
my_hub>  
Related Command SHOW TERMINAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-260 SET TERMINAL STOP_BITS  
SET TERMINAL  
STOP_BITS  
Use the SET TERMINAL STOP_BITS command to set the number of stop bits  
used for a serial (Console or Auxiliary) port.  
Format  
console  
stop_bits  
bits  
set terminal  
auxiliary  
console  
auxiliary  
bits  
Selects the Console port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the Auxiliary port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the number of stop bits for the serial port.  
bits = 1 or 2  
The default factory setting is 2.  
Example The following command sets the Auxiliary port stop bits to 1:  
CB5000> set terminal auxiliary stop_bits 1  
Terminal parameter changed.  
Related Command SHOW TERMINAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET TERMINAL TERMINAL_TYPE 2-261  
SET TERMINAL  
TERMINAL_TYPE  
Use the SET TERMINAL TERMINAL_TYPE command to define the type of  
terminal connected to a serial (Console or Auxiliary) port. The DMM uses the  
terminal type when establishing a TELNET session. The terminal type informs the  
remote device which control sequences to transmit to the DMM.  
Format  
console  
terminal_type  
type  
set terminal  
auxiliary  
console  
auxiliary  
type  
Selects the Console port as the serial port for this operation.  
Selects the Auxiliary port as the serial port for this operation.  
Identifies the type of terminal connected to the serial port. Use  
up to 40 characters.  
The default factory setting is VT100.  
Example The following command sets the Console terminal type to VT200:  
CB5000> set terminal console terminal_type  
Enter terminal type: vt200  
Terminal parameter changed.  
Related Command SHOW TERMINAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-262 SET TERMINAL TIMEOUT  
SET TERMINAL  
TIMEOUT  
Use the SET TERMINAL TIMEOUT command to configure the DMM to  
automatically log you out of the system if you have not typed anything for a  
specified number of minutes.  
You only lose the changes if the DMM is reset before you log back in and save  
them.  
Format  
timeout period  
set terminal timeout  
timeout period  
Selects the length of the timeout interval in minutes. A value of 0  
disables the timeout function, allowing inactive terminal sessions to  
last indefinitely.  
The default factory setting is 0.  
Example 1 The following command logs you out of the DMM after 10 minutes of  
inactivity:  
CB5000> set terminal timeout 10  
Example 2 The following message is displayed if changes are not saved before the timeout  
occurs:  
Warning: Unsaved changes.  
Bye  
Related Command SHOW TERMINAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET TFTP FILE_NAME 2-263  
SET TFTP FILE_NAME  
Use the SET TFTP FILE_NAME command to specify the name of the file to be  
downloaded over the network (in-band) to the DMM. Enter up to  
128 alphanumeric characters. The DMM assumes a default pathname of  
/tftpboot. When you enter the command, the DMM prompts you for the  
filename of the download file in the /tftpboot directory.  
You must enter the TFTP filename within 10 seconds or the command times out.  
Format  
filename  
set tftp file_name  
filename  
Filename of the download file in the /tftpboot directory, which you  
select when prompted.  
Example 1 The following command specifies that the DMM request the file newfile.bin  
in the /tftpbootdirectory when you enter the DOWNLOAD IN_BAND  
command:  
CB5000> set tftp file_name  
Enter tftp file name:  
> newfile.bin  
TFTP file name changed.  
Example 2 The following command specifies that the DMM request the file newfile.bin  
in the directory /my_directory when you enter the DOWNLOAD IN_BAND  
command:  
CB5000> set tftp file_name  
Enter tftp file name:  
> /my_directory/newfile.bin  
TFTP file name changed.  
Some TFTP servers need to be reconfigured to allow the use of directories other  
than /tftpboot.  
Related Commands DOWNLOAD IN_BAND  
SAVE TFTP  
SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
SHOW TFTP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-264 SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
SET TFTP  
SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
Use the SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS command to set the IP address of the  
TFTP server to be used for in-band downloads.  
Format  
set tftp server_ip_address  
ip address  
ip address  
The IP address of the TFTP server. Enter the address as a series of four  
decimal bytes separated by periods. For example, 192.122.19.4.  
Example The following command sets the IP address of the TFTP server:  
CB5000> set tftp server_ip_address 156.12.2.3  
TFTP server ip-address set.  
Related Commands DOWNLOAD IN_BAND  
SAVE TFTP  
SET TFTP FILE_NAME  
SHOW TFTP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATION 2-265  
SET TR_SURROGATE  
CRS_STATION  
Use the SET TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATION command to enable the TR-NMC’s  
Configuration Report Server Station features.  
Format  
mac address  
slot.2  
crs_station  
setting  
setting  
set tr_surrogate  
slot  
Specifies the hub slot number where slot = 1 through 17  
setting  
The following settings are available:  
allow_acc_pri  
■
Lets you specify the maximum token access priority that the  
station with the indicated MAC address is allowed to transmit.  
enb_fun_class  
■
Lets you enter the function classes that the station with the  
indicated MAC address is allowed to transmit.  
phy_loc  
■
Lets you set the physical location subvector that is transmitted  
as part of Report Ring Station Addresses MAC Frames sent by  
the station with the indicated MAC address.  
remove_sta  
■
Lets you send a request to remove the station with the  
indicated MAC address from the ring.  
mac address  
setting  
The MAC address for which you are setting this parameter.  
Enable or disable.  
Example The following command enables maximum token access priority on the TR-NMC  
in slot 11.2:  
CB5000> set tr_surrogate 11.2 crs_station allow_acc_pri  
00:04:e4:40:00:c0 enable  
Related Commands SET TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS CRS_ADMIN  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-266 SET TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATUS  
SET TR_SURROGATE  
CRS_STATUS  
Use the SET TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATUS command to enable the generate  
traps option on the TR-NMC’s Configuration Report Server. When enabled, this  
option instructs the CRS function to report configuration change traps.  
Format  
slot.2  
crs_status crs_traps  
setting  
set tr_surrogate  
slot  
Specifies the hub slot number, where slot = 1 through 17  
CRS server generates configuration change traps.  
Values are:  
setting  
Enable  
■
Disable  
■
Example The following command allows the TR-NMC in slot 11.2 to generate traps:  
CB5000> set tr_surrogate 11.2 crs_status crs_traps enable  
Related Command SHOW TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET TR_SURROGATE REM_STATUS 2-267  
SET TR_SURROGATE  
REM_STATUS  
Use the SET TR_SURROGATE REM_STATUS command to enable the TR-NMC’s  
Ring Error Monitor (REM) features.  
Format  
setting  
option  
slot.2  
rem_status  
set tr_surrogate  
slot  
Specifies the hub slot number. where slot = 1 through 17  
See table that follows for REM option descriptions.  
Enables or disables REM and CRS features.  
option  
setting  
Option  
Description  
all_flags  
rem_traps  
Activates all items listed in this table.  
Determines if REM sends traps to a Network Manager  
monitoring the segment.  
weight_excded_traps  
preweight_excded_traps  
rcvr_congestion_traps  
Determines if REM generates weight-exceeded traps. These  
traps indicate that a soft-error threshold has been exceeded  
for a particular fault domain.  
Determines if REM generates pre-weight-exceeded traps.  
These traps indicate that an impending soft-error threshold  
has been exceeded by a station.  
Determines if REM generates receiver congestion traps.  
These traps indicate that a station’s receive buffer has been  
overloaded by incoming traffic.  
noniso_threshold_excd_traps Determines if REM generates Non-Isolating Threshold  
Exceeded traps. These traps indicate that one of the  
non-isolating error counters being monitored has exceeded  
its threshold.  
forward_frames_traps  
Determines if REM forwards information in the Report  
Neighbor Notification MAC frames and the Report Monitor  
Error MAC frames to a LAN manager on the segment.  
ring_line_error_data  
Determines if REM includes line error data in the  
ring-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
ring_internal_error_data  
ring_burst_error_data  
ring_ac_error_data  
Determines if REM includes internal error data in the  
ring-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes burst error data in the  
ring-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes A/C error data in the  
ring-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
ring_abortxmt_error_data  
ring_lostframes_error_data  
ring_rcvrcngst_error_data  
ring_framecopy_error_data  
Determines if REM includes abort transmit error data in the  
ring-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes lost frames error data in the  
ring-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes receiver congestion error data in  
the ring-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes frame copied error data in the  
ring-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-268 SET TR_SURROGATE REM_STATUS  
Option  
Description  
ring_frequency_error_data  
Determines if REM includes frequency error data in the  
ring-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
ring_token_error_data  
auto_line_error_data  
auto_internal_error_data  
auto_burst_error_data  
auto_ac_error_data  
Determines if REM includes token error data in the  
ring-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes line error data in the  
auto-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes internal error data in the  
auto-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes burst error data in the  
auto-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes A/C error data in the  
auto-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
auto_abortxmt_error_data  
auto_lostframes_error_data  
auto_rcvrcngst_error_data  
auto_framecopy_error_data  
auto_frequency_error_data  
auto_token_error_data  
crs_traps  
Determines if REM includes abort transmit error data in the  
auto-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes lost frames error data in the  
auto-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes receiver congestion error data in  
the auto-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes frame copied error data in the  
auto-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes frequency error data in the  
auto-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if REM includes token error data in the  
auto-intensive REM Forward Soft Error MAC Frame trap.  
Determines if the CRS function is configured to report Ring  
Topology Change traps.  
reset  
Resets all REM options.  
Example The following command includes token error data in the auto-intensive REM  
forward soft error MAC frame trap from the TR-NMC in slot 11.2:  
CB5000> set tr_surrogate 11.2 rem_status auto_token_error_data  
enable  
REM status - REM admin set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS 2-269  
SET TR_SURROGATE  
SURR_STATUS  
Use the SET TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS command to enable the TR-NMC’s  
Ring Error Monitor (REM) and Configuration Report Server (CRS) features.  
Format  
surr_status  
option  
slot.2  
setting  
set tr_surrogate  
slot.2  
Specifies the hub slot number, where slot = 1 through 17  
See table that follows for Surrogate option descriptions.  
Enables or disables REM and CRS features.  
option  
setting  
Option  
Description  
surr_admin  
Enables or disables the Token Ring surrogate functions (REM and CRS) for  
the indicated slot or subslot. If you do not use the surrogate information  
that the TR-NMC provides, you should set surr_admin status to disable to  
conserve system resources.  
ring_segment Enables or disables the surrogate ring segment feature.  
rem_admin  
Enables or disables the Ring Error Monitor (REM) feature. To activate REM,  
surr_admin must also be enabled.  
crs_admin  
Enables or disables the Configuration Report Server (CRS) feature. To  
activate CRS, surr_admin must also be enabled.  
Example The following command enables Ring Error Monitor on the TR-NMC in  
slot 11.2:  
CB5000> set tr_surrogate 11.2 surr_status rem_admin enable  
Surrogate status - REM admin set to ENABLED.  
Related Command SHOW TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-270 SET TRUNK CABLE_MONITOR  
SET TRUNK  
CABLE_MONITOR  
Use the SET TRUNK CABLE_MONITOR command to enable or disable cable  
monitor mode on the copper Ring-In and Ring-Out ports on ONline Token Ring  
modules.  
Cable monitor mode sets the ports so they wrap the ring to keep the ring  
running if the module senses a cable fault. For this mode to work, you must use  
the 3Com TRCABLE-10 or TRCABLE-30 cable to connect the hub ports.  
You can enable cable monitor mode to connect a Token Ring module in a  
different hub (up to 30 inches apart) if you also set the port to network map  
external. This scenario is discussed in the description of the SET TRUNK  
NETWORK_MAP EXTERNAL command.  
Refer to the appropriate Token Ring Module Installation Guide for more  
information on cable monitor mode.  
Format  
set trunk  
slot  
ring_in  
.trunk port  
cable_monitor  
enable  
disable  
ring_out  
slot  
Hub slot 1 through 17.  
ring_in  
ring_out  
Specifies if the port is a Ring-In port.  
Specifies if the port is a Ring-Out port.  
.trunk port  
1 or 2 (required only on Model Number 3CB6210-OFR).  
enable  
Use when connecting Ring-In and Ring-Out ports of Token Ring modules in  
the same hub.  
disable  
Use when connecting to equipment not made by 3Com.  
Example The following command enables cable monitor mode for the Ring-In port of the  
ONline Token Ring Fiber Repeater Module in slot 5 of the hub:  
CB5000> set trunk 5 ring_in.1 cable_monitor enable  
Cable Monitor set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SHOW TRUNK  
SET TRUNK NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET TRUNK COMPATIBILITY_MODE 2-271  
SET TRUNK  
COMPATIBILITY_MODE  
Use the SET TRUNK COMPATIBILITY_MODE command to set the trunk operating  
mode to a mode compatible with the remote Ring-In/Ring-Out product.  
Be sure to configure the trunks of the remote products according to the user  
documentation for those products.  
Format  
slot  
ring_in  
compatibility_mode  
mode  
set trunk  
ring_out  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
ring_in  
ring_out  
mode  
Selects the Ring-In trunk for this operation.  
Selects the Ring-Out trunk for this operation.  
onsemble — Configures the selected trunk to interoperate  
■
®
with a remote ONsemble Token Ring Hub. The factory  
setting is onsemble.  
CoreBuilder 5000 — Configures the selected trunk to  
interoperate with a remote CoreBuilder 5000 hub. (You need  
■
®
to use CoreBuilder 5000 mode when connecting to older  
ONcore Integrated System hubs)  
online — Configures the selected trunk to interoperate with a  
remote ONline System Concentrator.  
■
■
™
8230 — Configures the selected trunk to interoperate with a  
remote IBM 8230 CAU.  
8238 — IBM Token Ring stackable hub.  
■
■
8250 — Configures the selected trunk to interoperate with a  
remote IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub.  
8260 — Configures the selected trunk to interoperate with a  
remote IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub.  
■
Example The following commands set the Ring-In/Ring-Out trunks to interoperate with a  
remote CoreBuilder 5000 hub:  
CB5000> set trunk 1 ring_in compatibility_mode CoreBuilder 5000  
Compatibility mode set to CoreBuilder 5000.  
CB5000> set trunk 1 ring_out compatibility_mode CoreBuilder 5000  
Compatibility mode set to CoreBuilder 5000.  
Related Commands SAVE MODULE_PORT  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-272 SET TRUNK EXTERNAL_BEACON_ RECOVERY  
SET TRUNK  
EXTERNAL_BEACON_  
RECOVERY  
Use the SET TRUNK EXTERNAL_BEACON_RECOVERY command when using  
8250 Token Ring modules with devices that do not support beacon recovery (for  
example IBM 8228). Modules that do not support beacon recovery may cause a  
multi-hub ring to segment at all trunk ports. To prevent this problem, set the  
external beacon recovery parameter to non_exists for trunks connected to  
devices that do not support beacon recovery.  
This parameter informs the DMM that the connected device does not support  
beacon recovery and enables the DMM to isolate the beaconing device. Failure  
to designate a device that does not support beacon recovery can cause the  
entire ring to segment if beaconing occurs on the remote device.  
Format  
slot  
ring_in  
.trunk port  
external_beacon_recovery  
setting  
set trunk  
ring_out  
slot  
Hub slot 1 through 17.  
ring_in  
ring_out  
.trunk port  
setting  
Specifies if the port is a Ring-In port.  
Specifies if the port is a Ring-Out port.  
1 or 2 (required only on Model Number 3CB6210M-OFR).  
exists — Connected device supports beacon recovery.  
■
non_exists (default) — Connected device does not support beacon  
recovery.  
■
Example The following command assumes a 3822TR in slot 3 in one hub, configured in a  
multi-hub ring, is connected to an 8228 (which does not have beacon recovery  
capabilities). To prevent the ring from segmenting in the event the 8228  
beacons, enter the following command:  
CB5000> set trunk 3 ring_in.1 external_beacon_recovery non_exists  
External beacon recovery set to non_exists.  
Related Command SHOW TRUNK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET TRUNK MODE 2-273  
SET TRUNK MODE  
Use the SET TRUNK MODE command to enable or disable the Ring-In and  
Ring-Out ports on Token Ring modules.  
Refer to the appropriate Token Ring Installation Guide for more information on  
Ring-In and Ring-Out ports.  
Format  
slot  
ring_in  
.trunk port  
mode  
enable  
disable  
set trunk  
ring_out  
slot  
Hub slot 1 through 17.  
ring_in  
ring_out  
.trunk port  
enable  
disable  
Selects the Ring-In trunk for this operation.  
Selects the Ring-Out trunk for this operation.  
1 or 2 (required only on Model Number 3CB6210M-OFR).  
Allows you to add a module to the ring.  
Deactivates the selected port.  
Example The following commands enable the Ring-In and Ring-Out ports of the Token  
Ring module in slot 5 of the hub:  
CB5000> set trunk 5 ring_in mode enable  
Trunk 05.01 ring_in set to ENABLED.  
CB5000> set trunk 5 ring_out mode enable  
Trunk 05.01 ring_out set to ENABLED.  
Related Commands SHOW TRUNK  
SET TRUNK COMPATIBILITY_MODE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-274 SET TRUNK NETWORK  
SET TRUNK NETWORK Use the SET TRUNK NETWORK command to assign a Ring-In or Ring-Out port to  
a specific network.  
Format  
slot  
ring_in  
.trunk port  
network  
network  
set trunk  
ring_out  
slot  
Specifies the hub slot number, where slot = 1 through 17  
Specifies if the port is a Ring-In port.  
ring_in  
ring_out  
.trunk port  
Specifies if the port is a Ring-Out port.  
Specifies the trunk port.  
.trunk port = 1 or 2 (required only on Model Number 6210M-DFR)  
network  
Specifies the network to which you are assigning the Ring-In or Ring-Out  
port.  
network = token_ring_1 through token_ring_10 (ring_in), isolated_1 through  
isolated_10 (ring_out), isolated  
Example The following command sets the Ring-In port on the Token Ring Dual Fiber  
Repeater Module in slot 3 to token_ring_1:  
CB5000> set trunk 3 ring_in.1 network token_ring_1  
Trunk 03 ring_in.1 network id set to TOKEN_RING_1.  
Related Commands SHOW TRUNK  
SET PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET TRUNK NETWORK_MAP 2-275  
SET TRUNK  
NETWORK_MAP  
Use the SET TRUNK NETWORK_MAP command to determine if the Network  
Map feature should be extended from one hub to the next hub between Token  
Ring copper trunk ports. This command is valid for ONLine Token Ring modules  
only.  
Format  
slot  
ring_in  
.trunk port  
network_map  
setting  
set trunk  
ring_out  
slot  
Hub slot 1 through 17.  
ring_in  
ring_out  
.trunk port  
setting  
Specifies if the port is a Ring-In port.  
Specifies if the port is a Ring-Out port.  
1 or 2 (required only on Model Number 5202M-FR).  
External — Ensures a correct port-to-address mapping when you connect  
copper trunk ports on modules in different hubs.  
Internal — Ensures a correct port-to-address mapping when you connect  
copper trunk ports on modules in the same hubs.  
Example The following command sets the Ring-In port of the Token Ring module in slot 5  
to an internal network map, meaning that this port is connected to another  
trunk port in the same hub:  
CB5000> set trunk 5.1 ring_in network_map internal  
Network map state set to INTERNAL.  
Related Commands SHOW TRUNK  
SHOW RING_MAP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-276 SET TRUNK STATIC_SWITCH  
SET TRUNK  
STATIC_SWITCH  
Use the SET TRUNK STATIC_SWITCH command to prevent the network  
configuration of a trunk from being changed when either trunk in a pair (either  
the Ring-In or the Ring-Out) is enabled. This prevents inadvertent changes to live  
rings.  
Because setting the network of a trunk simultaneously affects both members of  
the trunk pair, this command works on a pair basis. Enabling or disabling the  
static switch on one trunk automatically changes it on the other.  
Format  
set trunk  
slot  
ring_in  
static_switch  
enable  
disable  
ring_out  
slot  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot that contains the trunk ports you are configuring.  
enable Forces users to disable trunks before switching networks. This prevents inadvertent  
changes to live rings.  
disable Does not force users to disable trunks down before switching networks.  
Example The following command disables static switch on trunks on the module in  
slot 6:  
CB5000> set trunk 6 ring_in static_switch disable  
Trunk static switch set to DISABLED.  
Related Commands SAVE MODULE_PORT  
SET PORT STATIC_SWITCH  
SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET VBRIDGE AFT AGING_TIME 2-277  
SET VBRIDGE AFT  
AGING_TIME  
Use the SET VBRIDGE AFT AGING_TIME command to adjust the address table  
aging time (the time it takes for an entry to "age out" of the address table) for  
a particular SwitchModule virtual bridge.  
Format  
aging_time  
aging time  
aft  
vbridge  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 240) whose aging time you want to adjust.  
Either:  
aging time  
0 to disable the aging process.  
■
10 through 1,000,000 (seconds).  
■
The default is 300 seconds.  
Example The following command sets the aging time for virtual bridge 24 to  
500 seconds:  
CB5000> set vbridge 24 aft aging_time 500  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE AFT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-278 SET VBRIDGE AFT ALL  
SET VBRIDGE AFT ALL  
Format  
Use the SET VBRIDGE AFT ALL command to create filters and add entries to the  
address table of a particular SwitchModule virtual bridge.  
learn  
all  
age  
aft all  
vbridge  
persistence  
set vbridge  
permanent  
mgmt  
noage  
enable  
disable  
source_check  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 240) you want this command to affect.  
all  
Specifies that the command affects all learned and user-created (mgmt)  
addresses in the virtual bridge’s address table.  
learn  
Specifies that the command affects all addresses learned by the  
SwitchModule in the virtual bridge’s address table.  
mgmt  
persistence  
age  
Specifies that the command affects all user-created addresses in the  
virtual bridge’s address table.  
Specifies the length of time you want an address entry or set of entries to  
remain in the virtual bridge’s address table.  
The address entry ages out of the address table during the next virtual  
bridge aging process. This is the default setting for learned address  
entries.  
noage  
The address entry remains in the address table until you reboot the  
SwitchModule. The aging process does not affect the entry.  
permanent  
source_check  
The address entry remains in the address table permanently, even after  
you reboot the SwitchModule.  
Specifies a filter that filters according to packet source MAC address. Use  
this option to "lock down" an address or set of addresses to a particular  
port.  
disable  
enable  
Disables source checking for the entry or set of entries you specify.  
Enables source checking for the entry or set of entries you specify.  
Example The following command locks the address table. After you enter this command,  
devices moved to a different location cannot transmit on virtual bridge 2:  
CB5000> set vbridge 2 aft all all source_check enable  
AFT Set Succeeded: Vbridge 2 Address 00-00-0c-01-a2-03  
AFT Set Succeeded: Vbridge 2 Address 00-00-0c-04-25-26  
AFT Set Succeeded: Vbridge 2 Address 00-00-b5-07-18-a9  
AFT Set Succeeded: Vbridge 2 Address 00-00-b5-21-02-53  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE AFT BRIDGE_PORT  
SET VBRIDGE AFT MAC  
SHOW VBRIDGE AFT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET VBRIDGE AFT BRIDGE_PORT 2-279  
SET VBRIDGE AFT  
BRIDGE_PORT  
Use the SET VBRIDGE AFT BRIDGE_PORT command to enable source checking  
for all MAC addresses of devices attached to a port. Before forwarding any  
packet that arrives on the specified port, the SwitchModule checks the address  
table to verify that the packet’s source MAC address is valid for the specified  
port.  
Format  
vbridge  
mgmt  
learn  
all  
persistence  
set vbridge  
age  
slot.port  
aft bridge_port  
permanent  
noage  
disable  
enable  
source_check  
vbridge  
1 through 240. The assigned virtual bridge number.  
slot.port  
slot is 1 through 17. port is 1 through 24. The command affects all  
entries in the address table associated with this bridge port.  
slot.all  
all  
slot is 1 through 17. The command affects all entries in the address  
table associated with all bridge ports on this SwitchModule.  
Specifies that the command affects all learned and user-created (mgmt)  
addresses in the virtual bridge’s address table.  
learn  
Specifies that the command affects all addresses learned by the  
SwitchModule in the virtual bridge’s address table.  
mgmt  
persistence  
age  
Specifies that the command affects all user-created addresses in the  
virtual bridge’s address table.  
Specifies the length of time you want an address entry or set of entries  
to remain in the virtual bridge’s address table.  
The address entry ages out of the address table during the next virtual  
bridge aging process. This is the default setting for learned address  
entries.  
noage  
The address entry remains in the address table until you reboot the  
SwitchModule. The aging process does not affect the entry.  
permanent  
source_check  
The address entry remains in the address table permanently, even after  
you reboot the SwitchModule.  
Specifies a filter that filters according to packet source MAC address.  
Use this option to "lock down" an address or set of addresses to a  
particular port.  
disable  
enable  
Disables source checking for the entry or set of entries you specify.  
Enables source checking for the entry or set of entries you specify.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-280 SET VBRIDGE AFT BRIDGE_PORT  
Example The following command enables source checking for all MAC addresses of  
devices attached to port 3.5. Before forwarding any packet that arrives on port  
3.5, the SwitchModule searches the address table to verify that the packet’s  
source MAC address is valid for port 3.5.  
CB5000> set vbridge 2 aft bridge_port 3.5 all source_check enable  
AFT Set Succeeded: Vbridge 2 Address 10-00-5a-f1-23-45  
AFT Set Succeeded: Vbridge 2 Address 10-00-53-11-23-4a  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE AFT ALL  
SET VBRIDGE AFT MAC  
SHOW VBRIDGE AFT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET VBRIDGE AFT MAC 2-281  
SET VBRIDGE AFT  
MAC  
Use the SET VBRIDGE AFT MAC command to create filters and add entries to an  
SwitchModule address table (address forwarding table or AFT). You also use this  
command to adjust the address table aging time (the time it takes for an entry  
to "age out" of the address table).  
Format  
aft mac  
bridge_port  
vbridge  
set vbridge  
slot.port  
mac address  
filter  
flood  
persistence  
age  
noage  
permanent  
source_check  
disable  
enable  
vbridge  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Specifies the MAC address that the command affects.  
mac address  
bridge_port  
Assigns a MAC address to a particular bridge port. Packets that contain  
the destination MAC address go to the bridge port only.  
slot.port  
filter  
slot (1 through 17) and port (1 through 24) for which you are creating a  
MAC address filter.  
Specifies that the filter you create filters, or drops, the type of packet  
you specify.  
flood  
Specifies that the filter you create floods the type of packet you specify  
to all ports in the virtual bridge.  
persistence  
age  
Specifies the length of time you want an address entry or set of entries  
to remain in the virtual bridge’s address table.  
The address entry ages out of the address table during the next virtual  
bridge aging process. This is the default setting for learned address  
entries.  
noage  
The address entry remains in the address table until you reboot the  
SwitchModule. The aging process does not affect the entry.  
permanent  
source_check  
The address entry remains in the address table permanently, even after  
you reboot the SwitchModule.  
Specifies a filter that filters according to packet source MAC address.  
Use this option to "lock down" an address or set of addresses to a  
particular port.  
disable  
enable  
Disables source checking for the entry or set of entries you specify.  
Enables source checking for the entry or set of entries you specify.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-282 SET VBRIDGE AFT MAC  
Example The following command creates a filter for virtual bridge 2, then assigns the  
filter a persistence of noage. The filter causes any packet whose destination  
MAC address is 12-34-56-78-9f-10 to flood to all ports assigned to virtual  
bridge 2.  
CB5000> set vbridge 2 aft mac 12-34-56-78-9f-10 flood  
CB5000> set vbridge 2 aft mac 12-34-56-78-9f-10 persistence noage  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE AFT ALL  
SET VBRIDGE AFT BRIDGE_PORT  
SHOW VBRIDGE AFT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MODE 2-283  
SET VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
MODE  
Use the SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MODE command to enable or disable  
IGMP Snooping on a defined Vbridge.  
Format  
mode  
igmp_snooping  
enable  
disable  
vbridge  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
enable  
disable  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Enables IGMP Snooping on the Vbridge.  
Disables IGMP Snooping on the Vbridge. This is the default.  
Example The following command enables IGMP Snooping on virtual bridge 12:  
CB5000> set vbridge 12 igmp_snooping mode disable  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING GROUP AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING PORT AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_INTERVAL  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY LISTEN_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING RESET_TO_DEFAULT  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-284 SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING GROUP AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
GROUP AGE_TIME  
Use the SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING GROUP AGE_TIME command to set the  
IGMP Snooping group IP address aging time in seconds on a defined Vbridge.  
Format  
igmp_snooping  
group  
time  
age_time  
vbridge  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
time  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Group aging time in seconds. The default is 300.  
Example The following command sets the IGMP Snooping group aging time on virtual  
bridge 12 to 400 seconds:  
CB5000> set vbridge 12 igmp_snooping group age_time 400  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING PORT AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_INTERVAL  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY LISTEN_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING RESET_TO_DEFAULT  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING PORT AGE_TIME 2-285  
SET VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
PORT AGE_TIME  
Use the SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING PORT AGE_TIME command to set the  
IGMP Snooping router and querier port aging time in seconds on a defined  
Vbridge.  
Format  
igmp_snooping  
port  
age_time  
vbridge  
time  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
time  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Group aging time in seconds. The default is 300.  
Example The following command sets the IGMP Snooping router and querier port aging  
time on virtual bridge 12 to 400 seconds:  
CB5000> set vbridge 12 igmp_snooping port age_time 400  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING GROUP AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_INTERVAL  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY LISTEN_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING RESET_TO_DEFAULT  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-286 SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_INTERVAL  
SET VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
QUERY_INTERVAL  
Use the SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_INTERVAL command to set the  
IGMP Snooping querying interval in seconds for a Vbridge that is acting as a  
IGMP Snooping device.  
Format  
igmp_snooping  
query_interval  
time  
vbridge  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
time  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Group aging time in seconds. The default is 300.  
Example The following command sets the IGMP Snooping router and querier port aging  
time on virtual bridge 12 to 350 seconds:  
CB5000> set vbridge 12 igmp_snooping query_interval 350  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING GROUP AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING PORT AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY LISTEN_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING RESET_TO_DEFAULT  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY LISTEN_TIME 2-287  
SET VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
QUERY LISTEN_TIME  
Use the SET VBRIDGE IGMP SNOOPING QUERY LISTEN_TIME command to set  
the time in seconds for a Vbridge to listen for a router acting as a IGMP  
Snooping device.  
Format  
vbridge  
query  
time  
listen_time  
set vbridge  
igmp_snooping  
vbridge  
time  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Group aging time in seconds. The default is 300.  
Example The following command sets the time in seconds for a Vbridge to listen for a  
router acting as a IGMP Snooping device on virtual bridge 12 to 500 seconds:  
CB5000> set vbridge 12 igmp_snooping query listen_time 500  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING GROUP AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING PORT AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_INTERVAL  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING RESET_TO_DEFAULT  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-288 SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY MODE  
SET VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
QUERY MODE  
Use the SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY MODE command to set the  
Vbridge to an IGMP Snooping querying bridge.  
Format  
igmp_snooping  
query  
enable  
disable  
mode  
vbridge  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
enable  
disable  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Enables IGMP Snooping Query mode on the Vbridge.  
Disables IGMP Snooping Query mode on the Vbridge. This is the default.  
Example The following command sets the IGMP Snooping Query mode on virtual  
bridge 12:  
CB5000> set vbridge 12 igmp_snooping query mode enable  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING GROUP AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING PORT AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_INTERVAL  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY LISTEN_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING RESET_TO_DEFAULT  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY RESET_TO_DEFAULT 2-289  
SET VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
QUERY  
Use the SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY RESET_TO_DEFAULT command  
to reset the IGMP snooping query parameters to their factory defaults.  
RESET_TO_DEFAULT  
Format  
igmp_snooping  
query  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
reset_to_default  
slot.port  
vbridge  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
slot.port  
Specifies the slot and port for this operation. port (1 through 24) is a  
multicast port.  
Example The following command sets slot 8, port 1 on virtual bridge 12 as a router port:  
CB5000> set vbridge 12 igmp_snooping query reset_to_default 8.1  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING GROUP AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING PORT AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_INTERVAL  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY LISTEN_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-290 SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORT  
SET VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
ROUTER_PORT  
Use the SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORT command to declare  
that the specified bridge port is a multicast port.  
Format  
router_port  
igmp_snooping  
vbridge  
slot.port  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Specifies the slot and port for this operation.  
slot.port  
slot (1 through 17) is the location of the module in the chassis and port  
(1 through 24) is a multicast port.  
Example The following command sets slot 8, port 1 on virtual bridge 12 as a router port:  
CB5000> set vbridge 12 igmp_snooping router_port 8.1  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING GROUP AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING PORT AGE_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY_INTERVAL  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY LISTEN_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING QUERY MODE  
SET VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING RESET_TO_DEFAULT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET VBRIDGE INTERFACE 2-291  
SET VBRIDGE  
INTERFACE  
Use the SET VBRIDGE INTERFACE command to enable or disable connectivity  
between a virtual bridge and the DMM. Virtual bridges continue to switch  
traffic even when the virtual bridge interface is disabled.  
A virtual bridge interface is automatically enabled after you assign an IP address  
to the virtual bridge.  
Format  
interface  
vbridge  
set vbridge  
enable  
disable  
vbridge  
enable  
disable  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Enables connectivity to the DMM.  
Disabled connectivity to the DMM.  
Example The following command disables connectivity between the DMM and virtual  
bridge 12:  
CB5000> set vbridge 12 interface disable  
Related Commands SHOW VBRIDGE  
SHOW INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-292 SET VBRIDGE NAME  
SET VBRIDGE NAME  
Format  
Use the SET VBRIDGE NAME command to assign a name to a SwitchModule  
virtual bridge. If you do not assign a name, the name defaults to vbridge_x  
where x is the virtual bridge number.  
name  
vbridge  
set vbridge  
name  
vbridge  
name  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Up to 32 characters.  
Example The following command assigns the name engineering to virtual bridge 10:  
CB5000> set vbridge 10 name engineering  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_FORWARD_ DELAY 2-293  
SET VBRIDGE STP  
BRIDGE_FORWARD_  
DELAY  
Use the SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_FORWARD_DELAY command to change the  
Spanning Tree Protocol forward delay value on a SwitchModule virtual bridge.  
The default forward delay value is 15 seconds.  
Refer to the CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User Guide for more information  
about Spanning Tree parameters.  
Format  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
stp  
forward delay  
bridge_forward_delay  
vbridge  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
forward delay  
Forward delay time in seconds for the specified virtual bridge.  
Values are 11 through 30.  
Example The following command configures the virtual bridge 9 forward delay value  
to 25:  
CB5000> set vbridge 9 stp bridge_forward_delay 25  
Bridge Forward Delay for vbridge 9 set to 25 seconds. Setting  
saved.  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE CONFIGURATION VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-294 SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_HELLO_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE STP  
BRIDGE_HELLO_TIME  
Use the SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_HELLO_TIME command to change the  
Spanning Tree Protocol hello time value on a SwitchModule virtual bridge. The  
default hello time value is 2 seconds.  
Refer to the CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User Guide for more information  
about Spanning Tree parameters.  
Format  
bridge_hello_time  
stp  
hello time  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
vbridge  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
hello time  
Assigns a Spanning Tree hello time to the virtual bridge. Values  
are 1 through 9.  
Example The following command configures the virtual bridge 9 hello time to 5 seconds:  
CB5000> set vbridge 9 stp bridge_hello_time 5  
Bridge Hello Time for vbridge 9 set to 5 seconds. Setting saved.  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE CONFIGURATION VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_MAX_AGE 2-295  
SET VBRIDGE STP  
BRIDGE_MAX_AGE  
Use the SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_MAX_AGE command to change the  
Spanning Tree Protocol maximum age value on a SwitchModule virtual bridge.  
The default max age value is 20 seconds.  
Refer to the CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User Guide for more information  
about Spanning Tree parameters.  
Format  
bridge_max_age  
stp  
max age  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
vbridge  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Values are 6 through 28.  
max age  
Example The following command configures the virtual bridge 9 maximum age value to  
10 seconds:  
CB5000> set vbridge 9 stp bridge_max_age 10  
Bridge Max Age for vbridge 9 set to 10 seconds. Setting saved.  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE CONFIGURATION VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-296 SET VBRIDGE STP MODE  
SET VBRIDGE STP  
MODE  
Use the SET VBRIDGE STP MODE command to enable or disable the Spanning  
Tree Protocol on a SwitchModule virtual bridge. By default, Spanning Tree is  
enabled.  
Disabling Spanning Tree can cause network loops and broadcast storms,  
resulting in network failure. Refer to the CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User  
Guide for more information about Spanning Tree parameters.  
Format  
stp  
vbridge  
set vbridge  
mode  
disable  
enable  
vbridge  
disable  
enable  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Disable Spanning Tree on the virtual bridge you specify.  
Enable Spanning Tree on the virtual bridge you specify.  
Example The following command disables Spanning Tree on virtual bridge 9:  
CB5000> set vbridge 9 stp mode disable  
Spanning Tree Mode for vbridge 9 set to DISABLED. Setting saved.  
Related Commands SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_FORWARD_DELAY  
SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_HELLO_TIME  
SET VBRIDGE STP BRIDGE_MAX_AGE  
SET VBRIDGE STP PRIORITY  
SHOW VBRIDGE CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET VBRIDGE STP PRIORITY 2-297  
SET VBRIDGE STP  
PRIORITY  
Use the SET VBRIDGE STP PRIORITY command to change the Spanning Tree  
Protocol bridge priority value on a SwitchModule virtual bridge. The default  
priority value is 32,768.  
Refer to the CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User Guide for more information  
about Spanning Tree parameters.  
Format  
stp  
priority  
vbridge  
priority  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
priority  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 240.  
Assigns the virtual bridge a Spanning Tree priority value for  
becoming the root bridge. Values are 0 through 65535. Default  
is 32768.  
Example The following command configures the virtual bridge 9 bridge priority value to  
65,000:  
CB5000> set vbridge 9 stp priority 65000  
Priority for vbridge 9 set to 65000. Setting saved  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE CONFIGURATION VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-298 SET VBRIDGE STP RESET_TO_DEFAULT  
SET VBRIDGE STP  
RESET_TO_DEFAULT  
Use the SET VBRIDGE STP RESET_TO_DEFAULT command to reset a  
SwitchModule in the hub back to its default values.  
All SwitchModule ports are automatically connected to the PacketChannel  
backplane. You do not need to enter a command to assign ports to the  
backplane, as other types of CoreBuilder 5000 media modules may require.  
All SwitchModule ports are enabled and assigned to virtual bridge 1.  
If you create additional virtual bridges, the assigned ports are automatically  
enabled to switch traffic. For further information on default values, refer to the  
CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule User Guide.  
Format  
stp  
vbridge  
reset_to_default  
set vbridge  
vbridge  
The assigned virtual bridge number. Values are 1 through 256.  
Sets the Spanning Tree to enable (default).  
reset_to_default  
Example The following command resets the virtual bridge 9 to default values:  
CB5000> set vbridge 9 stp reset_to_default  
Settings saved.  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE CONFIGURATION VERBOSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW ALERT 2-299  
SHOW ALERT  
Use the SHOW ALERT command to list the current alert settings.  
Format  
show alert  
Example The following command displays current alert settings:  
CB5000> show alert  
Alert AUTHENTICATION  
Alert CHANGE  
set to ENABLE  
set to ENABLE  
Alert CONSOLE_DISPLAY set to ENABLE  
Alert HELLO set to ENABLE  
Alert NEW_ENVIRONMENT set to DISABLE  
Alert PORT_UP_DOWN  
Alert SCRIPT  
set to DISABLE  
set to DISABLE  
The settings shown are the default settings.  
Related Command SET ALERT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-300 SHOW ALERT BRIDGE_PORT  
SHOW ALERT  
BRIDGE_PORT  
Use the SHOW ALERT BRIDGE_PORT command to display the settings of the  
bridge_port up/down and STP state alert filters. If the filter is set to enabled, a  
trap is not generated. The factory setting is ENABLED, filter out traps.  
Format  
show alert bridge_port  
slot.port  
slot.all  
all  
slot.port  
Identifies the bridge port for which you want to show settings.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number for the module.  
port (1 through 24) is the bridge port number on the module.  
slot.all  
Displays information about all bridge ports on the module in the  
slot (1 through 17).  
all  
Displays information about all bridge ports in the hub.  
Example The following command displays information about the bridge port alert filter  
settings for bridge port 3.1:  
CB5000> show alert bridge_port 3.1  
BPort  
-----  
03.01  
Port Up Down Trap  
------------------  
ENABLED  
Stp State Trap  
----------------  
ENABLED  
Related Command SET ALERT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW ATM INTERFACE 2-301  
SHOW ATM  
INTERFACE  
Use the SHOW ATM INTERFACE command to display the configurable interface  
parameters for the ATM.  
Format  
show atm  
slot  
interface  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Example The following command displays configurable interface information for  
the ATM:  
CB5000> show atm 4 interface  
Slot Module  
Version  
Network  
General Info  
---- -------------------  
-------------------------------  
N/A  
04 6602M-MOD  
v1.00  
Current  
Next Reset  
----------  
Max VCCs: 512  
Active VPI/VCI Bits: 0/9  
Number of LECs: 8  
-------------  
128  
0/9  
20  
UNI Version: 3.1  
3.1  
20  
80.20  
Test  
LEARP Quiet Time (secs)  
Neighbor IP Address: 2.4.  
Neighbor Interface Name:  
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms  
and additional information.  
Related Command SET ATM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-302 SHOW ATM ILMI_CONFIGURATION  
SHOW ATM  
ILMI_CONFIGURATION  
Use the SHOW ATM ILMI_CONFIGURATION command to display the  
configurable Interim Local Management Interface (ILMI) parameters for the ATM.  
Format  
show atm  
slot  
ilmi_configuration  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Example The following command displays configurable ILMI information for the ATM:  
CB5000> show atm 4 ilmi_configuration  
Slot  
----  
04  
Module  
------------------- -------------------------------  
6602M-MOD v1.00 N/A  
Version Network  
General Info  
Current  
Next Reset  
----------  
-------------  
ILMI PVC: 0/16  
0/8  
13  
1
20  
5
ILMI Peak Cell Rate (% line rate):  
ILMI Sust Cell Rate (% line rate):  
ILMI Max Burst Size (cells):  
ILMI Request Timeout (secs): 5  
ILMI Request Retries: 2  
2
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms  
and additional information.  
Related Command SET ATM ILMI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW ATM Q93B 2-303  
SHOW ATM Q93B  
Use the SHOW ATM Q93B command to display the configurable Q93b  
parameters for the ATM.  
CAUTION: Do not change the default settings for this command. Any changes  
you make to the settings may cause interoperability problems with other ATM  
equipment.  
Format  
show atm  
slot  
q93b  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Example The following command displays configurable Q93b information for the ATM:  
CB5000> show atm 4 q93b  
Slot  
----  
04  
Module  
------------------- -------------------------------  
6602M-MOD v1.00 N/A  
Version Network  
General Info  
Current  
Next Reset  
----------  
-------------  
T303 (secs): 4  
T308 (secs): 30  
T309 (secs): 10  
T310 (secs): 10  
T313 (secs): 4  
T316 (secs): 120  
T317 (secs): 60  
T322 (secs): 4  
4
30  
10  
2
4
120  
60  
4
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms  
and additional information.  
Related Command SET ATM Q93B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-304 SHOW ATM QSAAL  
SHOW ATM QSAAL  
Use the SHOW ATM QSAAL command to display the configurable Qsaal  
parameters for the ATM.  
CAUTION: Do not change the default settings for this command. Any changes  
you make to the settings may cause interoperability problems with other ATM  
equipment.  
Format  
show atm  
slot  
qsaal  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Example The following command displays configurable Qsaal information for the ATM:  
CB5000> show atm 4 qsaal  
Slot  
----  
04  
Module  
------------------- -------------------------------  
6602M-MOD v1.00 N/A  
Version Network  
General Info  
Current  
Next Reset  
----------  
-------------  
Poll Timer (msecs): 750  
Keepalive Timer (secs): 2  
No Response Timer (secs): 7  
Idle Timer (secs): 15  
CC Timer (secs): 1  
750  
2
7
20  
1
Max CC Retries: 4  
4
Max PD Retries: 25  
Stat Max Ranges: 67  
25  
67  
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms  
and additional information.  
Related Command SET ATM QSAAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW ATM SIGNAL_ CONFIGURATION 2-305  
SHOW ATM SIGNAL_  
CONFIGURATION  
Use the SHOW ATM SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION command to display the  
configurable signal parameters for the ATM.  
Format  
show atm  
slot  
signal_configuration  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Example The following command displays configurable signal information for the ATM:  
CB5000> show atm 4 signal_configuration  
Slot  
----  
04  
Module  
------------------- -------------------------------  
6602M-MOD v1.00 N/A  
Version Network  
General Info  
Current  
Next Reset  
----------  
-------------  
Sig PVC: 0/5  
Sig Peak Cell Rate (% line rate):  
Sig Sust Cell Rate (% line rate):  
Sig Max Burst Size (cells):  
5
1
9
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms  
and additional information.  
Related Command SET ATM SIGNAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-306 SHOW ATM STATISTICS  
SHOW ATM  
STATISTICS  
Use the SHOW ATM STATISTICS command to display the ATM and ATM  
Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5) error statistics for the entire set of AAL5 circuits.  
Format  
show atm  
slot  
statistics  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Example The following command displays the ATM and AAL5 error statistics for the  
entire set of AAL5 circuits for the module in slot 4:  
CB5000> show atm 4 statistics  
Slot  
----  
04  
Module  
Version Network  
General Info  
------------------- ----------- ------------------  
6602M-MOD v1.00  
ATM  
N/A  
AAL5  
--------  
----------  
In Octets:  
In Frames  
In Discards:  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
In Unknown Protocols:0  
Out Octets:  
Out Frames:  
Out Errors:  
Out Discard:  
0
0
0
0
Related Command SET ATM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW ATM TRAFFIC_DESCRIPTOR 2-307  
SHOW ATM  
TRAFFIC_DESCRIPTOR  
Use the SHOW ATM TRAFFIC_DESCRIPTOR command to display the traffic  
descriptor for a specific index or to display the entire traffic descriptor table.  
Format  
traffic_descriptor  
index  
show atm  
slot  
all  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
index  
Specify an index number to display the traffic descriptor for that index.  
all  
Specify all to display the entire traffic descriptor table.  
Example The following command displays the entire traffic descriptor table:  
CB5000> show atm 4 traffic_descriptor all  
Index Descr  
----- -----  
Type  
----  
PeakCellRate SustCellRate MaxBurstSize  
------------ ------------ ------------  
1
2
3
4
5
6
ILMI  
SIG  
155M  
100M  
50M  
NoClpScr 17661  
NoClpScr 17661  
NoClpNoScr 353208  
NoClpNoScr 235849  
NoClpNoScr 117925  
NoClpNoScr 58962  
3533  
3533  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
11  
12  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
25M  
N/A  
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms  
and additional information.  
Related Command SET ATM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-308 SHOW ATM VCC  
SHOW ATM VCC  
Use the SHOW ATM VCC (Virtual Channel Connection) command to display the  
virtual circuit table.  
Format  
show atm  
slot  
vcc  
all  
vpi num/vci num  
slot  
Identifies the slot for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
Displays the entire virtual circuit table.  
Displays the Virtual Path Identifier  
Displays the Virtual Channel Identifier  
all  
vpi num  
vci num  
Example The following command displays the entire virtual circuit table:  
CB5000> show atm 4 vcc all  
VCC  
Status TxDescr RxDescr Type TxSDU  
RxSDU Encap  
--------------- ------- ------- ----- -----  
------ ---------  
0/5  
0/16  
up  
up  
up  
155M  
SIG  
ILMI  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
AAL5  
AAL5 300  
AAL5 484  
1518 1518  
300  
484  
other  
other0/32  
LANE 802.3  
Related Command SET ATM NUM VCCS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW BACKPLANE_PATHS 2-309  
SHOW  
BACKPLANE_PATHS  
Use the SHOW BACKPLANE_PATHS command to display a list of the logical  
network assignments and their corresponding physical backplane path  
connections.  
The command shows you which backplane resources are available and which  
are used in the hub. It displays a list of which logical network assignments are  
using which physical channel (backplane path) connections.  
Because the various protocols in the hub (Ethernet, ONline Token Ring, ONline  
FDDI) share backplane resources, the SHOW BACKPLANE_PATHS command can  
help you to determine which networks are still available. For example, you can  
use the command to determine which Token Ring and FDDI networks are no  
longer available when you implement a particular Ethernet network.  
The following figure diagrams the interrelationship of the three hub protocols in  
terms of backplane resource use. The examples on the next page indicate you  
how you can use the diagram to help make decisions regarding backplane  
resource use.  
If Ethernet 1 is in use, any networks that overlap Ethernet 1 (meaning that they  
share the same backplane resources) are unavailable. As the diagram shows,  
using Ethernet 1 makes TR 1 through 6 unavailable.  
If Token Ring 15 is in use, any networks that overlap Token Ring 15 (meaning  
that they share the same backplane resources) are unavailable. As the diagram  
shows, using Token Ring 15 makes Ethernet 3 unavailable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-310 SHOW BACKPLANE_PATHS  
Format  
protocol  
show backplane_paths  
protocol  
One of the following:  
all  
■
ethernet  
■
fast_ethernet  
■
fddi  
■
token_ring  
■
Example The example on the next page uses the terms in the following table to diagram  
the current usage for all shared backplane paths in the hub:  
Term  
Definition  
Physical Path  
Logical Network  
A list of all possible backplane network paths on the hub.  
A list of the status or availability of the backplane resources required  
to implement the corresponding physical path.  
available  
in use  
The resources needed to implement this physical path are available.  
The resources needed to implement this physical path are in use by  
another protocol.  
network (for example, The logical network currently using the corresponding physical path.  
ETHERNET_1) Non-Ethernet networks are not shown.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW BACKPLANE_PATHS 2-311  
CB5000> show backplane_paths all  
Physical Path  
Logical Network  
---------------  
ETHERNET_PATH_1  
ETHERNET_PATH_2  
ETHERNET_PATH_3  
ETHERNET_PATH_4  
ETHERNET_PATH_5  
ETHERNET_PATH_6  
ETHERNET_PATH_7  
ETHERNET_PATH_8  
---------------  
ETHERNET_1  
available  
available  
available  
available  
available  
available  
available  
With ETHERNET_PATH_1 in use...  
Physical Path  
---------------  
Logical Network  
---------------  
in use  
in use  
in use  
available  
available  
available  
available  
available  
FDDI_PATH_ONLINE_1  
FDDI_PATH_ONLINE_2  
FDDI_PATH_ONLINE_3  
FDDI_PATH_ONLINE_4  
FDDI_PATH_ONLINE_5  
FDDI_PATH_ONLINE_6  
FDDI_PATH_ONLINE_7  
FDDI_PATH_ONLINE_8  
...FDDI paths 1 through 3 are  
unavailable...  
Physical Path  
Logical Network  
---------------  
in use  
in use  
in use  
in use  
in use  
in use  
available  
available  
available  
available  
available  
available  
available  
available  
available  
---------------  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_1  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_2  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_3  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_4  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_5  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_6  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_7  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_8  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_9  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_10  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_11  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_12  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_13  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_14  
TR_PATH_ONLINE_15  
...as are Token Ring paths 1 through 6.  
Related Commands SET MODULE NETWORK  
SET PORT NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-312 SHOW BOOTP  
SHOW BOOTP  
Use the SHOW BOOTP command to display the current BootP settings.  
Format  
show bootp  
Example The following command displays current BootP settings:  
CB5000> show bootp  
——- BOOTP VARIABLES ——-  
Bootp Server IP Address: 255.255.255.255  
BootP Power Up Mode:  
BootP Result:  
ENABLED  
NO RESPONSE  
BootP Result  
Definition  
CLEAR  
The last BootP result was cleared by the user (CLEAR BOOTP  
command).  
REQUEST IN PROGRESS The hub has sent a BootP request.  
OKAY  
BootP completed successfully.  
NO RESPONSE  
FATAL ERROR  
The hub did not receive a response to its BootP request.  
The BootP software reported a fatal error in operation.  
Related Commands BOOTP  
CLEAR BOOTP  
SET BOOTP POWER_UP_MODE  
SET BOOTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION 2-313  
SHOW BPORT_LEC  
CONFIGURATION  
Use the SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION command to display configuration  
information for the specified LAN Emulation Client (LEC) including the BUS rate  
limit from the DMM.  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
configuration  
show bport_lec  
slot.lec  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
Example The following command displays configuration information for the LEC in slot 4,  
port 1:  
CB5000> show bport_lec 4.1 configuration  
BridgePortLECDisplayforModule6602M-MOD:  
BP LEC  
------  
04.01  
Mode  
----  
ENABLED  
I/F Status  
-------  
DISABLED  
General Info  
--------------  
Configuration Mode:  
ELAN Name:  
MANUAL  
NONE  
ELAN Type:  
Maximum Data Frame Size:  
LES ATM Address:  
UNSPECIFIED  
1516  
39.00.99.99.99.99.ac.00.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99  
LECS ATM Address:  
39.99.99.99.ac.00.00.00.00.99.99.01.02.03.04.05.06.07.08.00  
Aging Time (secs):  
300  
5000  
4
120  
1
BUS Rate Limit (packets/secs):  
Connection Complete Timer (secs):  
Control Timeout (secs):  
Expected ARP Response Time (secs):  
Flush Timeout (secs):  
3
Forward Delay Time (secs):  
Maximum Retry Count:  
15  
2
Maximum Unknown Frame Count:  
Maximum Unknown Frame Time (secs):  
Number of ELAN VCCs:  
Path Switching Delay (secs):  
VCC Timeout Period(secs):  
1
1
512  
6
1200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-314 SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURATION  
The values for the following parameters do not necessarily reflect the values in  
effect when the LEC is joined to an emulated LAN (ELAN):  
■ Configuration Mode  
■ ELAN Name  
■ ELAN Type  
■ Maximum Data Frame Size  
■ LES ATM Address  
■ LECS ATM Address  
These values are examined the next time the LEC attempts to join an ELAN.  
Related Commands SET BPORT_LEC MODE  
SHOW BPORT_LEC STATUS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW BPORT_LEC LEARP_TABLE 2-315  
SHOW BPORT_LEC  
LEARP_TABLE  
Use the SHOW BPORT_LEC LEARP_TABLE command to display the contents of  
the LE-ARP (MAC address to ATM address) mapping cache.  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
learp_table  
show bport_lec  
slot.lec  
slot.port  
all  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
address  
MAC address you are configuring using this command. The format for  
MAC addresses is nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn  
The address 00-00-00-00-00-00 is invalid for this command.  
Example The following command displays the contents of the LE-ARP mapping cache in  
slot 4, port 2:  
CB5000> show bport_lec 4.2 learp_table all  
BP LEC Mode  
----- ----  
I/F Status  
-----------  
General Info  
-------------  
04.02 ENABLED ENABLED  
MAC Address  
--------  
ATM Address  
------------  
00-08-00-11-22-33  
39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.05.06.01.02.03.04.05.06.01  
00-08-00-44-55-66  
39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.05.06.01.02.03.04.05.06.02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-316 SHOW BPORT_LEC SERVER_CIRCUITS  
SHOW BPORT_LEC  
SERVER_CIRCUITS  
Use the SHOW BPORT_LEC SERVER_CIRCUITS command to display the LAN  
emulation control and multicast circuits for the specified LAN Emulation  
Client (LEC).  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
server_circuits  
show bport_lec  
slot.lec  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
Example The following command displays the multicast circuits for the LEC in slot 4,  
port 1:  
CB5000> show bport_lec 4.1 server_circuits  
Bridge Port LEC Display for Module 6602M-MOD:  
BP LEC  
------  
04.01  
Mode  
-------- --------------------------  
ENABLED OKAY  
Status  
General Info  
Configuration Direct VPI/VCI:  
Control Direct VPI/VCI:  
Control Distribute VPI/VCI:  
Multicast Send VPI/VCI:  
0/0  
0/51  
0/52  
0/53  
0/54  
Multicast Forward VPI/VCI:  
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms  
and additional information.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC STATUS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW BPORT_LEC STATISTICS 2-317  
SHOW BPORT_LEC  
STATISTICS  
Use the SHOW BPORT_LEC STATISTICS command to display statistics for the  
specified LAN Emulation Client (LEC).  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
statistics  
show bport_lec  
slot.lec  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
Example The following command displays the statistics for the specified LEC:  
CB5000> show bport_lec 4.1 statistics  
BP LEC  
------  
04.01  
Mode  
-------- ------------ --------------  
ENABLED OKAY  
Status  
General Info  
LEARP Requests Out:  
LEARP Requests In:  
LEARP Replies Out:  
LEARP Replies In:  
Control Frames Out:  
Control Frames In:  
SVC Failures:  
15  
15  
34  
34  
100  
100  
2
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms  
and additional information.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC STATUS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-318 SHOW BPORT_LEC STATUS  
SHOW BPORT_LEC  
STATUS  
Use the SHOW BPORT_LEC STATUS command to display the status for the  
specified LAN Emulation Client (LEC).  
BPORT is an abbreviation for Bridge Port.  
LEC ports are logical ports, all of which overlay one physical ATM/Synchronous  
Optical Network (SONET) port.  
Format  
status  
show bport_lec  
slot.lec  
slot.lec  
Identifies the slot and LEC for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and lec is one of up to 64 LAN  
Emulation Clients defined as logical ports for the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule. For example, to identify LEC 32 on the ATM Backbone  
SwitchModule in slot 4, enter 4.32  
Example The following command displays the status for the specified LEC:  
CB5000> show bport_lec 4.1 status  
BP LEC  
------  
04.01  
Mode  
-------- ------------ -----------------  
ENABLED OKAY  
Status  
General Info  
Actual ELAN Name:  
Actual ELAN Type:  
LANE32  
802.3  
Actual Maximum Data Frame Size: 1516  
LECS ATM Address:  
39.99.99.99.ac.00.00.00.00.99.99.01.02.03.04.05.06.07.08.00  
LECS Address Source:  
ILMI SERVICE REGISTRY MIB  
Actual LES ATM Address:  
39.00.99.99.99.99.ac.00.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99.99  
LEC ID:  
17  
Interface State:  
Last Failure Response code:  
Last Failure State:  
LANE Protocol:  
OPERATIONAL  
NONE  
INITIAL  
1
LANE Version:  
1
Topology Change:  
Proxy Client:  
OFF  
YES  
LEC ATM Address:  
39.00.00.99.99.00.00.00.00.99.99.01.02.03.04.05.06.07.08.00  
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms  
and additional information.  
Related Command SHOW BPORT_LEC CONFIGURAtION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW BPORT_MAU 2-319  
SHOW BPORT_MAU  
Use the SHOW BPORT_MAU command to display information about  
SwitchModule bridge ports at the mau level. The information displayed depends  
in part upon the media type of the SwitchModule port (Ethernet, Fast Ethernet,  
or FDDI).  
Format  
show bport_mau  
slot.port.mau  
no_verbose  
verbose  
slot.all  
slot.port.mau  
Identifies the bridge port MAU you want to display information about.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number.  
port (1 through 24) is the port number.  
mau (1 or 2) is the MAU number.  
slot.all  
Displays information about all bridge port MAUs in the slot (1  
through 17).  
no_verbose  
verbose  
Displays bridge port mode and state. This is the default if you do not  
specify a verbose setting.  
Displays the same information as the no_verbose option plus additional  
media-specific information.  
Example The following command displays information about SwitchModule FDDI port 13,  
MAU 2:  
CB5000> show bport_mau 3.13.2 verbose  
Bridge Port MAU Display for Module 3C96614M-FTP:  
BP Mau  
Mode  
Status  
General Info  
-------- -------- -----------------------------------------  
03.13.02 ENABLED  
OKAY  
Connector:  
MIC  
Alert Filter:  
PMD Class:  
Port Type:  
DISABLED  
MULTIMODE  
B
PCM State:  
Port Neighbor Type:  
Remote MAC Indicated:  
Active  
A
FALSE  
CB5000>  
Related Command SHOW BRIDGE_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-320 SHOW BRIDGE_PORT  
SHOW BRIDGE_PORT  
Format  
Use the SHOW BRIDGE_PORT command to display information about  
SwitchModule bridge ports.  
no_verbose  
verbose  
show bridge_port  
slot.port  
slot.all  
all  
vbridge  
vbridge  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and port (1 through 24) is the port  
number. For example, to identify port 4 on the module in slot 6,  
enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Displays information about all bridge ports in the slot (1 through 17).  
Displays all bridge ports on a specified Vbridge.  
all vbridge  
no_verbose  
If you do not enter a verbose setting, the command defaults to  
no_verbose. Displays the following information:  
Bridge port mode and state  
Virtual bridge the bridge port is assigned to  
■
■
Logical port number  
■
Master bridge port status  
■
verbose  
Displays the same information as the no_verbose option plus:  
Spanning Tree values  
RMON monitor status  
■
■
General information (for example, port name)  
■
Example The following command displays information about all bridge ports on  
vbridge 1:  
CB5000> show bridge_port all vbridge 1  
Bridge Ports on Vbridge 1  
BPort I/F Status Stp State Logical General Info  
----- ---------- ---------- ------- ----------------------  
04.02 ENABLED  
13.01 ENABLED  
13.04 DISABLED  
13.05 DISABLED  
13.06 DISABLED  
13.07 DISABLED  
13.08 DISABLED  
13.09 DISABLED  
13.10 DISABLED  
13.11 DISABLED  
13.12 DISABLED  
13.13 DISABLED  
15.02 DISABLED  
15.03 DISABLED  
FORWARDING 73  
FORWARDING 289  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
292  
293  
294  
295  
296  
297  
298  
299  
300  
301  
338  
339  
Master bport  
Related Command SET BRIDGE_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW CLOCK 2-321  
SHOW CLOCK  
Use the SHOW CLOCK command to display the current setting of the  
management hub’s internal clock.  
Format  
show clock  
Example The following command displays the current clock setting:  
CB5000> show clock  
Clock is set to 05:53 Sun 25 Jul 99  
Related Command SET CLOCK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-322 SHOW COMMUNITY  
SHOW COMMUNITY  
Format  
Use the SHOW COMMUNITY command to list the current community settings.  
show community  
Example The following command displays the current community settings:  
CB5000> show community  
Index  
—————  
Community Name  
——————————————  
user1  
ncs  
super  
Protocol Address Access  
——————————————— —————————  
155.024.038.054 Read  
155.024.035.041 All  
155.024.043.083 Read  
155.024.056.098 Read-Write  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
admin  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
Related Command SET COMMUNITY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW COUNTER 2-323  
SHOW COUNTER  
Use the SHOW COUNTER command to report statistics for a network to which  
an NMC is assigned. All counters are displayed since the last clear or reset.  
A Network Monitor Card is not required to gather repeater statistics.  
Format  
show counter  
bridge_port  
slot.port  
ethernet  
slot.all  
fast_ethernet  
igmp_snooping  
peak_rates  
fddi_mac  
fddi_port  
all  
1 or 2  
interface  
100base_x  
ethernet  
network  
fast_ethernet  
interface  
ip_fragmentation  
module  
slot  
packet_channel  
repeater  
slot  
slot.port  
module  
port  
network  
slot  
hosts  
rmon  
network  
ring_station  
all  
tr_mac_layer  
tr_promiscuous  
tr_source_routing  
token_ring  
vbridge  
token ring  
1 through 256  
bridge_port  
Specifies that you want to display statistics for a SwitchModule bridge  
port.  
slot.port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot where the module is installed in the hub  
and port (1through 24) is the port number.  
slot.all  
Displays information about all of the bridge ports in a specified slot  
(1 through 17).  
ethernet  
Specifies that you want to display statistics for an Ethernet network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-324 SHOW COUNTER  
fast_ethernet  
igmp_snooping  
peak_rates  
fddi_mac  
fddi_port  
all  
Specifies that you want to display counter error statistics for a Fast  
Ethernet network.  
Specifies that you want to display counter error statistics for  
igmp_snooping.  
Specifies that you want to display counter error statistics for  
peak_rates.  
Specifies that you want to display all FDDI mac address counter error  
statistics.  
Specifies that you want to display FDDI port counter error statistics  
from port 1 or port 2.  
Specifies that you want to display counter error statistics for all FDDI  
MACs.  
1 or 2  
Specifies that you want to display counter statistics for FDDI MAC  
addresses from port 1 or port 2.  
interface  
100base_x  
network  
Specifies that you want to display counter statistics for the interface  
connected to a specified network.  
Specifies that you want to display 100base_x counter statistics for a  
specified module or all modules.  
®
Specifies any network implemented in your CoreBuilder 5000 hub  
(ethernet_1 or fast_ethernet_2, for example).  
ip_fragmentation Specifies that you want to display ip fragmentation counter statistics.  
packet_channel  
Specifies that you want to display information about traffic and activity  
on the PacketChannel backplane.  
module  
Indicates a specific module for which you want display counter  
statistics.  
slot  
Indicates the slot location for a specific module.  
Displays counter statistics for a repeater.  
repeater  
port  
Specifies the port for which you want to display counter statistics for a  
repeater.  
rmon  
Displays Token Ring Remote Monitoring (RMON) counter statistics from  
several Token Ring error counters. RMON works best with a  
workstation-based SNMP manager, but can also be used from the  
DMM command interface.  
hosts  
Specifies the RMON hosts that contain counter error statistics that  
summarize network activity. For each packet that travels the  
network, the TR-NMC extracts the source and destination address  
and adds the MAC addresses to the host table, and updates  
appropriate host-specific counters.  
®
The CoreBuilder 5000 host table does not allow you to delete entries.  
If the table becomes full, new hosts are dropped  
ring_station  
Tracks the following status and statistics:  
Control status and statistics for each active ring  
■
Token Ring status information for each station that has been a ring  
■
member  
Token Ring error and diagnostic statistics for each station that has  
■
been a ring member  
Station order on monitored rings (Order group)  
■
Download of configuration information, and removal of ring  
■
stations (Config group) This group collects information from the  
MAC layer, including ring use and error counters.  
tr_mac_layer  
Specifies counter error statistics from the RMON Token Ring MAC  
layer, including ring use and error counters.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW COUNTER 2-325  
tr_promiscuous  
Specifies that you want to display counter error statistics from the  
Token Ring promiscuous error counter.  
tr_source_routing Specifies that you want to display counter error statistics from the  
Token Ring source routing error counter.  
token_ring  
Specifies that you want to display counter statistics for a Token Ring  
network.  
token ring  
Identifies the Token Ring network.  
vbridge  
Specifies that you want to display the number of Spanning Tree  
topology changes and learned entry discards for a SwitchModule  
virtual bridge.  
1 through 256  
Identifies the vbridge for which you want to display counter statistics.  
Example 1 The following command displays counter error statistics for Ethernet network 1.  
Some modules report a Late Collision if the collision becomes active after 512  
bits from the start of the transmission. Other modules log Late Collisions if the  
collision is active exactly 512 bit times, even if the collision was asserted before  
512 bit times.  
CB5000> show counter ethernet ethernet_1  
Ethernet Statistics for ETHERNET_1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------  
FCS Errors  
SQE Test Errors  
Alignment Errors  
Carrier Sense Errors  
Frame Too Longs  
0
58  
0
1
0
5
0
0
3
0
6
0
Deferred Transmissions  
Late Collisions  
Excessive Collisions  
Single Collision Frames  
Multiple Collision Frames  
Internal MAC Receive Errors  
Internal MAC Transmit Errors  
Each error type is followed by the number of packets received that contains that  
error.  
Field  
Description  
FCS Errors  
Frame Check Sequence errors.  
SQE Test Errors  
Errors during Signal Quality Error test.  
Number of CRC errors that do not end on a byte boundary.  
Loss of carrier sense detected.  
Alignment Errors  
Carrier Sense Errors  
Frame Too Longs  
Deferred Transmissions  
Late Collisions  
Too long errors received (packets greater than 1518 bytes).  
Channel busy when sender ready to transmit. Sender retries.  
Collision occurs late in packet. No retry.  
More than 16 retries on the same packet.  
1 retry needed to send packet.  
Excessive Collisions  
Single Collision Frames  
Multiple Collision Frames  
Internal MAC Receive Errors  
2 to 15 retries needed to send packet.  
Lost packets during receive.  
Internal MAC Transmit Errors Lost packets during send.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-326 SHOW COUNTER  
Example 2 The following commands display module and port repeater statistics,  
respectively, for module 3. (This command displays the number of collisions that  
occurred when the module tried to access the backplane segment. Ethernet_2  
displays the number of times the COLLISON EVENT Signal went active.)  
CB5000> show counter repeater ethernet_2 module 3  
Repeater Statistics for Module 3 on ETHERNET_2  
-------------------------------------------------------------------  
Readable Frames  
Readable Octets  
Runts  
142257566  
2554907443  
502857  
FCS Errors  
Late Events  
Short Events  
Frame Too Longs  
Very Long Events  
Alignment Errors  
Collisions  
Data Rate Mismatches  
Auto Partition Count  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Example 3 The following command displays the number of collisions that occurred when  
the port tried to access the backplane segment. Ethernet_2 displays the number  
of times the COLLISON EVENT Signal went active.  
CB5000> show counter repeater ethernet_2 port 3.1  
Repeater Statistics for Port 3.1 on ETHERNET_2  
-------------------------------------------------------------------  
Readable Frames  
Readable Octets  
Runts  
142251726  
2554052041  
502857  
FCS Errors  
0
Late Events  
0
Short Events  
0
Frame Too Longs  
Very Long Events  
Alignment Errors  
Collisions  
0
0
0
0
Data Rate Mismatches  
Auto Partition Count  
Last Source Address  
0
0
00-00-0c-01-a2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW COUNTER 2-327  
Example 4 The following command sums up the number of collisions that occurred on all  
repeaters trying to transmit across the backplane segment fast_ethernet_1.  
CB5000> show counter repeater fast_ethernet_1 module 3  
Repeater Statistics for Module 3 on FAST_ETHER_1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------  
Readable Frames  
Readable Octets  
0
2554052041  
Upper 32 Readable Octets0  
Runts  
502857  
FCS Errors  
0
Late Events  
0
Short Events  
0
Frame Too Longs  
Very Long Events  
Alignment Errors  
Collisions  
0
0
0
0
Data Rate Mismatches  
Auto Partition Count  
Isolates  
0
0
0
Symbol Errors  
Last Source Address  
0
00-00-0c-01-a2-25  
Each error type is followed by the number of packets received containing that  
error.  
Field  
Description  
Readable Frames  
Readable Octets  
Readable (uncorrupted) frames received at repeater.  
Readable (uncorrupted) octets received at repeater (the lower 32  
bits are contained in the rptrMonitorPortReadableOctets object).  
Upper 32 Readable  
Octets  
Upper readable (uncorrupted) octets (2**32) received at  
repeater. It contains the upper 32 bits of a 64-bit octets counter.  
Runts  
Packets less than 64 bytes.  
FCS Errors  
Frame Check Sequence errors.  
Late Events  
Collision detected after 512 bits were received from a port.  
Packets less than 80 bit times received.  
Short Events  
Frame Too Longs  
Very Long Events  
Alignment Errors  
Collisions  
Frames in excess of 1518 bytes received.  
Port entered a jabber lockup state due to a timeout.  
Number of CRC errors that do not end on a byte boundary.  
Total number of collisions detected.  
Data Rate Mismatches  
Autopartition Count  
Isolates  
Number of FIFO overflow and underflow occurrences.  
Number of times autopartition threshold has been passed.  
The number of automatic repeater port isolates as a  
consequence of false carrier events.  
Symbol Errors  
The number of packets containing symbol errors.  
Last Source Address  
The source address of the last packet received by this port.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-328 SHOW COUNTER  
Example 5 The following command displays interface statistics for Ethernet network 1. This  
command displays the number of errors that occurred when the DMM’s EMAC  
tried to access backplane segment ethernet_1. This command does not separate  
errors from collisions.  
CB5000> show counter interface ethernet_1  
Interface Statistics for ETHERNET_1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------  
Received Octets  
2544983138  
Received Unicast Packets  
Received Non-Unicast Packets  
Received Discards  
181659531  
1473448  
0
Received Errors  
Received Unknown Protocols  
Transmitted Octets  
5991  
0
4544  
71  
Transmitted Unicast Packets  
Transmitted Non-Unicast Packets0  
Transmitted Discards  
Transmitted Errors  
0
0
Each error type is followed by the number of packets received containing that  
error.  
Field  
Description  
Received Octets  
Received Unicast Packets  
Octets received at the network interface.  
Single-address packets received at the network  
interface.  
Received Non-Unicast Packets  
Received Discards  
Broadcast and multicast packets received at the  
network interface.  
Discard packets received at the network interface.  
Received Discards is composed of Bridge Receive  
Discards in addition to Buffer Overflows (Also a  
counter on the FTE). If any Buffer Overflow display,  
buffer recovery will be triggered.  
Bridge Received Discards is composed of Management  
Filtered Packets, Dynamic Unicast Filtered Packets, and  
Management Unicast Filtered Packets. Bridge Receive  
Discards is accessed through the MIB variable  
(dot1dTpPortInDiscards).  
Received Errors  
Errors received at the network interface.  
Received Unknown Protocols  
Packets from unknown protocols received at the  
network interface.  
Transmitted Octets  
Octets transmitted at the network interface.  
Transmitted Unicast Packets  
Single-address packets transmitted at the network  
interface.  
Transmitted Non-Unicast Packets  
Broadcast and multicast packets transmitted at the  
network interface.  
Transmitted Discards  
Transmitted Errors  
Discard packets transmitted at the network interface.  
Errors transmitted at the network interface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW COUNTER 2-329  
Example 6 The following command shows Token Ring (DOT5) Statistics for Token Ring  
network 1:  
CB5000> show counter token_ring token_ring_1  
Token Ring Statistics for TOKEN_RING_1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------  
Ring Status:  
Ring Open Status:Ring Open  
No Problems Detected Ring State: Opened  
Ring Speed: 16 MBPS  
Upstream Station:08-01-20-0c-9e-d7Functional Addr.: c0-00-00-00-00-00  
Active Monitor Selection Participation:Disabled  
Line Errors:  
Burst Errors:  
AC Errors:  
Abort Transmitted Errors:  
Internal Errors:  
Lost Frame Errors:  
Receiver Congestion Errors:  
Frame Copied Errors:  
Token Errors:  
Soft Errors:  
Hard Errors:  
Signal Losses:  
Transmit Beacons:  
Recoveries:  
Lobe Wires:  
Removes:  
Singles:  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Field  
Description  
Ring Status  
Current operating status of the ring (refer to the table on the next  
page). The Ring Status value is a sum of values, derived from values  
for each condition that applies. When a single condition exists, text  
displays to describe the condition. When multiple conditions exist,  
the value displayed is a hexadecimal number that represents the sum  
of all conditions.  
Ring State  
Current interface state in terms of entering or leaving the ring.  
Ring Open Status  
Indicates the success, or the failure reason, for the station’s most  
recent attempt to enter the ring.  
Ring Speed  
4 or 16 Mbps.  
Upstream Station  
MAC address of the Nearest Active Upstream Neighbor of this  
station.  
Functional Addr.  
A bit mask that describes the functional addresses for which this  
interface accepts frames.  
Active Monitor  
Selection  
Indicates whether or not this station participates in the Active  
Monitor Contention process.  
Participation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-330 SHOW COUNTER  
The following table describes Token Ring (DOT5) Interface Ring Status  
information:  
Field Text  
Hex Code  
00000000  
00000020  
Description  
No Problems Detected  
Ring Recovery  
No problems detected at this time.  
TR-NMC is transmitting or receiving Monitor  
Contention frames.  
Single Station  
00000040  
TR-NMC is opened onto the ring, but is the only  
station on the ring.  
Remove Received  
Auto-Removal Error  
Lobe Wire Fault  
Transmit Beacon  
Soft Error  
00000100  
00000400  
00000800  
00001000  
00002000  
TR-NMC has received a Removed MAC frame.  
Auto-removal error detected.  
TR-NMC has detected a wire fault.  
TR-NMC is transmitting beacon frames.  
TR-NMC has transmitted a Soft Error Report  
MAC Frame. If any of the DOT5 statistics  
counters are increasing, it indicates that the  
TR-NMC has sent one or more Soft Error Report  
MAC Frames.  
: The TR-NMC clears this condition after a  
short period.  
Note  
Hard Error  
Signal Loss  
No Status  
00004000  
00008000  
20000000  
TR-NMC is either transmitting or receiving  
beacon frames.  
TR-NMC has detected the absence of a receive  
signal.  
TR-NMC open process in progress, but not  
completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW COUNTER 2-331  
Each packet type is followed by the number of packets received.  
Field  
Description  
Line Errors  
Number of Line Errors detected at this station.  
Number of Burst Errors detected at this station.  
Number of AC Errors detected at this station.  
Burst Errors  
AC Errors  
Abort Transmitted Errors  
Internal Errors  
Lost Frame Errors  
Number of Abort Transmitted Errors detected at this station.  
Number of Internal Errors detected at this station.  
Number of Lost Frame Errors detected at this station.  
Receiver Congestion Errors Number of Receiver Congestion Errors detected at this station.  
Frame Copied Errors  
Token Errors  
Soft Errors  
Number of Frame Copied Errors detected at this station.  
Number of Token Errors detected at this station.  
Number of Soft Errors detected at this station.  
Hard Errors  
Number of Hard Errors detected at this station.  
Number of Signal Losses detected at this station.  
Number of times this station has transmitted a beacon frame.  
Signal Losses  
Transmit Beacons  
Recoveries  
Number of times this station has been purged from the ring,  
and then recovered.  
Lobe Wires  
Removes  
Singles  
Number of times this station has detected an open or short  
circuit in the lobe data path.  
Number of times this station has been removed from the ring  
following a Remove Ring Station MAC Frame request.  
Number of times this station has sensed that it is the only  
station on the ring. May indicate a hardware problem.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-332 SHOW COUNTER  
Example 7 The following command displays RMON host statistics for all hosts on Ethernet  
network 1 configured on the module in slot 1. This command displays the  
number of errors that occurred when the EMAC tried to access backplane  
segment ethernet_1. This command does not separate errors from collisions.  
CB5000> show counter rmon hosts ethernet_1 1  
RMON Hosts Table for Host Address 08-00-20-10-c9-79 on Port 1.1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------  
Received Packets  
Received Octets  
Transmitted Packets  
Transmitted Octets  
Transmitted Errors  
3092  
1621681  
3976  
3032372  
0
Transmitted Broadcast Packets 1  
Transmitted Multicast Packets 0  
RMON Hosts Table for Host Address 00-00-00-28-00-00 on Port 0.0  
-------------------------------------------------------------------  
Received Packets  
Received Octets  
Transmitted Packets  
Transmitted Octets  
13  
832  
0
0
Transmitted Errors  
0
Transmitted Broadcast Packets  
Transmitted Multicast Packets  
0
0
Each packet type is followed by the number of packets received.  
Field  
Description  
Received Packets  
Packets received by the indicated host.  
Octets received by the indicated host.  
Number of packets generated by this host.  
Number of octets generated by this host.  
Number of packets with errors sent by this host.  
Number of broadcast packets sent by this host.  
Number of multicast packets sent by this host.  
Received Octets  
Transmitted Packets  
Transmitted Octets  
Transmitted Errors  
Transmitted Broadcast Packets  
Transmitted Multicast Packets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW COUNTER 2-333  
Example 8 The following command shows host table statistics for stations on token_ring_1  
configured on the module in slot 7:  
CB5000> show counter rmon hosts token_ring_1 7  
RMON Hosts Table for Host Address 00-00-30-40-31-f6 on Port 7.1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Received Packets  
Received Octets  
Transmitted Packets  
Transmitted Octets  
Transmitted Errors  
180600  
20404972  
188185  
108541926  
0
Transmitted Broadcast Packets 6968  
Transmitted Multicast Packets 0  
Related Commands SET MODULE INTERFACE  
SET MODULE RMON_GROUP ENABLE  
SET RMON  
SHOW RMON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-334 SHOW DEVICE  
SHOW DEVICE  
Use the SHOW DEVICE command to display information about the DMM.  
Format  
show device  
Example The following command displays information about the DMM:  
CB5000> show device  
3Com CB5000 Distributed Management Module (6106M-MGT) 2.XX.X pSOS+  
SNMP  
Name: CB5000  
Location:  
Unknown  
For assistance contact:  
System Administrator  
Operational EPROM Version: V2.XX  
Boot EPROM Version: v1.01  
Service Date: 99/06/01  
Serial Number: 12345678  
Restarts: 36  
Dip Configuration: DISABLED  
Reset Mastership: DISABLED  
MAC Address Order: CANONICAL  
Diagnostics: ENABLED  
Trap Receive: DISABLED  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Assigned by the system administrator.  
Assigned by the system administrator.  
Assigned by the system administrator.  
Software version number for the operational software.  
Software version number for the boot software.  
3Com serial number.  
Location  
For assistance contact  
Operational Version  
Boot Version  
Serial Number  
Service Date  
Restarts  
Last date (yy/mm/dd) hardware or software was changed.  
Number of system restarts logged.  
Dip Configuration  
Indicates media module configuration status: if enabled,  
media modules configure themselves to DIP switches or  
NVRAM locally on the module; if disabled, the DMM  
configures the media module.  
Diagnostics  
Indicates if diagnostics are run when reset.  
Reset Mastership  
Indicates if this DMM is configured to cause a mastership  
election when it is inserted into a live hub.  
Trap Receive  
Setting for the trap receive function.  
Canonical or noncanonical.  
MAC Address Order  
Related Commands SET DEVICE  
SHOW INVENTORY  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW DLM 2-335  
SHOW DLM  
Use the SHOW DLM command to display information about DLMs (Dynamically  
Loadable Modules).  
Format  
show dlm  
control  
request_load_status  
loaded_image  
control  
Displays control table entries.  
request_load_status  
loaded_image  
Displays status of requests made to the DMM to load DLMs.  
Displays a table showing DLM images currently loaded on the  
DMM.  
Example 1 The following command displays DLM-related control table entries stored in the  
DMM:  
CB5000> show dlm control  
DLM Control Table:  
Index Status  
----- ------  
Owner  
-----  
1
VALID  
Monitor  
Example 2 The following command displays the status of requests made to the DMM to  
load DLMs:  
CB5000> show dlm request_load_status  
DLM Image Load Table:  
Name  
----  
ecam  
Status  
------  
executing  
Destination Module  
------------------  
01.01  
Example 3 The following command identifies any DLM images currently loaded on the  
DMM:  
CB5000> show dlm loaded_image  
Loaded DLM Table:  
Name  
----  
ecam  
Reason  
------  
application  
Version Load Source  
------- -----------  
01.00  
PATH:TFTP:ecam:151.104.20.81  
Related Command SET MODULE DLM_MODE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-336 SHOW GROUP  
SHOW GROUP  
Use the SHOW GROUP command to display the ports associated with a specific  
group.  
Format  
group name  
show group  
all  
group name  
Displays ports belonging to the specified group.  
Displays ports belonging to all groups.  
all  
Example The following command displays all of the ports associated with all groups:  
CB5000> show group all  
Group  
Ports  
-------  
group1  
group2  
group3  
group4  
group5  
group6  
group7  
group8  
-----------------  
4.9  
4.12 10.1  
4.12  
4.2  
4.6  
3.6  
4.9 4.12  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
Related Command SET GROUP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW HOST 2-337  
SHOW HOST  
Use the SHOW HOST command to display the DMM’s host table.  
Format  
show host  
Example The following command displays the DMM’s host table:  
CB5000> show host  
Index Host Name  
IP Address  
1
2
samuel  
eng1  
155.104.56.20  
155.3.6.58  
3
mkt  
155.2.2.27  
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
finance  
education  
support  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
[empty]  
155.12.23.6  
155.102.17.4  
155.102.16.5  
Related Commands CLEAR HOST  
SET HOST  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-338 SHOW HUB  
SHOW HUB  
Use the SHOW HUB command to display information about the hub.  
Format  
show hub  
Example The following command displays information about the hub in which the DMM  
is installed:  
CB5000> show hub  
Hub Information:  
Hub Type: 6017C-A  
Backplane Information:  
Backplane Type  
Revision  
--------------------  
-----------  
Load-Sharing Power Distribution Board  
Enhanced TriChannel Backplane  
RingChannel Backplane  
0
0
0
Power Supply Information:  
Power Supply  
------------  
1
2
3
4
Status  
----------  
OKAY  
OKAY  
REMOVED  
REMOVED  
Model Number  
------------  
6000PS  
6000PS  
Temperature Information:  
Probe  
Location  
Temperature  
-----  
--------  
FAN_1  
FAN_2  
-----------  
1
2
3
31 Degrees Celsius  
31 Degrees Celsius  
29 Degrees Celsius  
FAN_3  
Fan Information:  
Fan  
---  
1
Status  
------  
OKAY  
2
OKAY  
3
OKAY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW HUB 2-339  
The following table explains the fields that are displayed:  
Field  
Description  
Hub Type  
Indicates that this is a Model 6017C hub.  
Backplane Information  
Indicates the type and revision level of all installed  
backplanes.  
Power Supply Information  
Indicates if a power supply is present in the slot, its  
normal or faulty status, and its model number.  
Temperature Information  
Fan Information  
Indicates hub temperature at three locations.  
Indicates status of each hub fan.  
Related Commands SHOW INVENTORY  
SHOW MODULE ALL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-340 SHOW IGMP_SNOOPING  
SHOW  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
Use the SHOW IGMP_SNOOPING command to display a detailed table of the  
IGMP Snooping groups associated with snooping vbridges or to display the  
current and future states of IGMP Snooping for a particular module.  
Format  
all  
igmp_snooping  
show  
module  
slot.subslot  
all  
Displays information about all IGMP Snooping groups  
associated with all snooping vbridges.  
module  
slot.subslot  
Displays the current and future states of IGMP Snooping for the  
specified module.  
Specifies location of the module in the hub.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and subslot is the module  
subslot number.  
Example The following table displays information about all IGMP Snooping groups:  
CB5000> show igmp_snooping all  
MAC  
Entry Vbridge  
IP_Address  
---------  
224.0.0.35  
Address  
------------------ ----  
01-00-5e-00-00-23 2.1  
Port  
----  
------  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
224.0.0.139 01-00-5e-00-00-8b 2.1  
3.4  
5.6  
2
3
3
4
224.0.0.12  
224.0.0.35  
224.0.0.121 01-00-5e-00-00-79 6.1  
224.0.0.39 01-00-5e-00-00-27 12.12  
01-00-5e-00-00-0c 2.3  
01-00-5e-00-00-23 2.4  
Field  
Description  
Entry  
Interface entry number for this interface.  
Vbridge number.  
Vbridge  
IP_Address  
IP address for the corresponding Vbridge.  
MAC address for the corresponding Vbridge.  
Slot and port number for the corresponding Vbridge.  
MAC Address  
Port  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW INTERFACE 2-341  
SHOW INTERFACE  
Use the SHOW INTERFACE command to display the location and status of DMM  
network interfaces (through NMCs). Only interfaces actually allocated (as  
compared to potential installed networks) are displayed. A hub can have up to  
45 interfaces.  
Format  
show interface  
Example The following command displays the status and location of DMM network  
interfaces:  
CB5000> show interface  
Admin Oper  
Stat Stat  
----------- ------ ----- ----- -------  
MAC  
Address  
General  
Information  
----------  
Idx  
----  
2
3
4
Network  
Type  
Slot  
----  
N/A  
SLIP  
ETHERNET_1  
VBRIDGE 1  
SLIP  
ETH  
VB  
DOWN  
UP  
DOWN  
UP  
N/A  
67-4b-0e-63-7a-f9 02.01.01  
08-00-8f-20-e5-f8 17.01.01  
UP  
UP  
Field  
Description  
Idx  
Interface index. Several commands use this index to identify a particular  
interface.  
Network  
Type  
Network interface described on the current line.  
ETH (Ethernet), TR (Token Ring), or SLIP (Serial Line Interface Protocol), or  
VB (Vbridge).  
Admin Stat  
Setting applied to this network using the SET MODULE INTERFACE  
command.  
Oper Stat  
MAC Address  
Slot  
Operating status of the network interface.  
MAC address of the interface used to attach to this network.  
The slot and subslot location of the interface in the hub. For NMCs, this  
field also identifies the interface. For example, 03.02.01 identifies slot 3,  
subslot 2, interface 1. For Vbridges, it identifies the IP relay port. For  
example, 07.01.01 identifies slot 7, subslot 1, port 1.  
General  
If interface is in:  
Information  
Standby (NMC only) — The NMC is an extra card placed in the hub  
■
for redundancy.  
Module Down — The module for this interface is down.  
■
Interface Disabled — The interface is disabled.  
■
Related Command SET MODULE INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-342 SHOW INVENTORY  
SHOW INVENTORY  
Use the SHOW INVENTORY command to display hub inventory information. This  
list includes the hub, all modules and submodules, and the controller module.  
The SHOW INVENTORY command displays Jitter Attenuator cards, even though  
they are not manageable cards. Inventory information is provided for power  
budgeting.  
Format  
no_verbose  
verbose  
show inventory  
no_verbose  
verbose  
Displays summary information.  
Displays extended information (all module and hub information,  
including software version).  
Example The following command shows the inventory for a DMM:  
CB5000> show inventory verbose  
HUB/  
Slot  
Hardware  
Version  
Module  
Serial #  
Vendor  
Date  
----- -------------  
HUB  
---------- ---------- -------- --------  
6
017C  
123456  
3Com  
930914  
12.01 5103M-AUIM  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Note Pad: N/A  
Operational EPROM Version: 001  
Boot EPROM Version: 1.00  
14.01 6106M-MGTv1.00  
23456  
3Com  
931027  
Note Pad: Carrier Card Installed 3/6/95  
Operational EPROM Version: 1.00  
Boot EPROM Version: 1.00  
Boot EPROM Version: 1.00  
DMM: Operational EPROM Version: 1.00  
14.02 6100D-MAC  
2.01  
3456789  
3Com  
Jul 93  
Operational EPROM Version: 1.00  
Note Pad:  
Boot EPROM Version: 1.00  
16.01 6124M-TPL62  
12345678  
3Com  
931116  
Operational EPROM Version: 1.00  
Boot EPROM Version: 1.00  
Note Pad: Six ports assigned to engineering.  
16.02 6100D-MGT v1.00 125213 3Com  
931101  
Operational EPROM Version: 1.00  
Note Pad: 5  
Boot EPROM Version: 1.00  
18.016000M-RCTL  
v1.00  
123123123 3Com  
930601  
Operational EPROM Version: 1.00  
Boot EPROM Version: 1.00  
Note Pad: Purchased backup 4/18/95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW INVENTORY 2-343  
Field  
Description  
Slot  
Slot and subslot of the module.  
Module part number.  
Module  
Hardware Version  
Serial #  
Vendor  
Date  
Version number for the module hardware.  
Serial number of the module.  
Vendor that manufactured the module.  
Date the module was manufactured.  
Operational EPROM Version Version number of the module’s embedded operational  
code.  
Boot EPROM Version  
Note Pad  
Version number of the module’s startup code.  
Optional information about CoreBuilder 5000 modules  
entered using the SET INVENTORY command (maintenance  
mode).  
Related Commands SET INVENTORY  
SHOW HUB  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-344 SHOW IP  
SHOW IP  
Use the SHOW IP command to display Internet Protocol information for the  
networks configured in the hub.  
Format  
all  
show ip  
arp_cache  
election_priority  
route_table  
all  
arp_cache  
Show all IP parameters.  
Show the DMM’s current ARP cache.  
election_priority Show the DMM’s current Vbridge IP relay election slot priority.  
route_table  
Show the DMM’s routing table.  
Example The following command displays IP information on DMM network interfaces:  
CB5000> show ip all  
Active Default Gateway : 151.104.4.1  
Operational Active Default Gateway: 151.104.4.1  
Index Network  
----- ------------- ---- -----------  
Slot IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
-----------  
Default Gateway  
----------------  
1
2
3
ETHERNET_1  
TOKEN_RING_1 N/A 151.106.7.32  
VBRIDGE 1 N/A 151.107.9.99  
N/A 151.104.4.255  
ff.ff.ff.00  
ff.ff.ff.00  
ff.ff.ff.00  
151.104.4.1  
151.106.7.254  
151.107.9.2  
IP ARP Cache:  
Interface Address  
Physical Address  
--------- ---------  
----------------  
5
6
6
151.104.99.1  
151.104.94.42  
151.104.94.46  
00-00-30-20-9e-5a  
10-00-5a-f2-54-33  
10-00-5a-f2-80-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW IP 2-345  
IP Routing Table:  
Destination  
-----------  
127.0.0.1  
Next Hop  
--------  
127.0.0.1  
127.0.0.3  
Interface  
---------  
46  
2
127.0.0.3  
0.0.0.0  
151.104.99.1  
151.104.94.250  
151.104.69.254  
151.104.90.254  
151.104.49.254  
151.104.90.252  
151.104.99.7  
127.0.0.9  
5
3
4
6
7
5
1
8
151.104.4.0  
151.104.6.0  
151.104.40.0  
151.104.41.0  
151.104.9.0  
151.104.252.0  
127.0.0.0  
IP Relay Election Slot Priority: low_to_high  
Field  
Description  
Active Default Gateway  
Default gateway you have configured to be active.  
Default gateway that is active currently.  
Operational Active Default  
Gateway  
Index  
Index assigned to this network.  
Network  
Slot  
Identity of the network.  
Slot that houses the module where this interface resides.  
IP Address  
IP address assigned to this network by the DMM. The IP stack  
resides on the DMM, not the interface (NMC)  
Subnet Mask  
Subnetwork mask for this interface.  
Default Gateway  
Default Gateway assigned to this interface.  
IP ARP Cache  
Interface  
Interface number described in this entry.  
IP address for the interface.  
Address  
Physical Address  
MAC address of the interface.  
IP Routing Table  
Destination  
Next Hop  
Destination address for this routing table entry.  
Next hop for packets associated with this interface.  
Number of the interface entry.  
Interface  
IP Relay Election Slot  
Priority  
Prioritizes Vbridge ports for IP Relay Master Election. Options  
are low_to_high and high_to_low.  
Related Commands SET IP  
CLEAR IP  
IP ELECTION_PRIORITY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-346 SHOW LOG EVENT_LOG  
SHOW LOG  
EVENT_LOG  
Use the SHOW LOG EVENT_LOG command to display the values in the DMM  
event log.  
Display the DMM event log after receiving a fatal error. Record the DMM event  
information in a file (or to a printer) and call 3Com Technical Support to  
determine why the DMM failed.  
Format  
show log event_log  
Example The following command displays the event log:  
CB5000>  
show log event_log  
Display of Last Error - Flash Version: vx.xx  
Crash Date/Time: 05:58 Sat 4 Mar 95  
Date/Time:  
-0-  
A=12345678 2000044C  
06:17 Sun 5 Mar 95  
-2- -3-  
20000001 00000000  
-1-  
-4-  
-5-  
-6-  
-7-  
00000000 00000000 200D124C 200D1208  
D=11111111 0000023D 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
Vector = 20020494  
Stack Dump:  
PC = 20000000  
SR = 3009  
200D1208 00 2C 20 02 5D B6 00 00 - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .......  
200D1218 00 02 20 00 00 03 00 00 - 00 00 DE AD DE AD 00 00 .......  
200D1228 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 .......  
200D1238 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .......  
200D1248 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .......  
200D1258 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .......  
200D1268 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .......  
200D1278  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .......  
Related Command CLEAR LOG EVENT_LOG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW LOG MODULE EVENT_LOG 2-347  
SHOW LOG MODULE  
EVENT_LOG  
Use the SHOW LOG MODULE EVENT_LOG command to display the event log  
for the SwitchModule in the specified slot. If no information currently exists, the  
following message is displayed:  
Module Event Log empty - no event to display.  
If a module other than a SwitchModule is selected, the following message is  
displayed (for example, if you specified slot 8).  
show module log 8  
Module in slot 8 does not support this feature.  
This command supports SwitchModules only, running Version v1.10 or higher.  
Format  
slot  
show log module  
event_log  
Example If there was a crash on a particular SwitchModule, a screen dump is displayed.  
The following command displays the event log:  
CB5000>  
show log module 2 event_log  
Module Sys Up Time at Crash: 1679  
Ack Date/Time: 17:36 Tue 01 Oct 96  
- 0 -  
- 1 -  
- 2 -  
- 3 -  
- 4 -  
- 5 -  
- 6 -  
- 7 -  
A = 02010000 040CB740 040CB484 040CB5EC 00077E02 040386D8 040CB42C 040CB3DC  
D = 00000087 00000002 00000087 02010000 00000000 00000000 00000005 00000000  
Vector = 7008  
PC = 00077E4C  
SR = 3010  
Stack Dump:  
40CB3DC 30 10 00 07 7E 4C 70 08 - 04 0C B4 28 00 C5 00 85 0....Lp.........  
40CB3EC 00 45 00 C5 02 01 00 00 - 04 0C B4 1C 00 00 00 87 .E..............  
40CB3FC 02 01 00 00 00 00 00 87 - 02 01 00 00 00 87 00 00 ................  
40CB40C 04 03 2B 40 00 12 50 32 - 04 0C B4 38 00 11 C6 A0 ......P2...8....  
40CB41C 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 0D - 04 0C B4 84 04 0C B4 5C ................  
40CB42C 00 07 EC 4E 04 0C B4 84 - 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 ...N............  
40CB43C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 00 00 00 00 04 0C B5 EC ................  
40CB44C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 00 00 00 00 04 0C B5 D8 ................  
Related Command CLEAR LOG EVENT_LOG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-348 SHOW LOG TRAP_LOG  
SHOW LOG  
TRAP_LOG  
Use the SHOW LOG TRAP_LOG command to display the log entries for the most  
recently sent traps. The trap log is a circular buffer that can hold up to 15 traps.  
When the log exceeds the buffer, the software writes over the oldest trap with  
the newest trap information. The oldest trap is always displayed first.  
The log is lost if the hub is reset or if power is lost to the hub.  
Because the trap log captures only the trap information that is displayed on the  
console, you must set alerts to capture those traps you want to view.  
Format  
show log trap_log  
Example The following command displays a list of nonfatal system traps:  
CB5000> show log trap_log  
-------------------TRAP1----------------------------  
Message received from this device on 15:43 Mon 24 Jul 95:  
Enterprise:  
3Com  
Enterprise Specific trap: Security Environment Change  
Message Information:  
Security Trap Reason: INTRUSION_ATTEMPT  
Slot Number: 3  
Port Number: 1  
Port Mode: ENABLED  
Intruder MAC Address: 08 00 8f 30 09 0a  
Related Command CLEAR LOG TRAP_LOG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW LOGIN 2-349  
SHOW LOGIN  
Use the SHOW LOGIN command to display the login table.  
Format  
show login  
Example The following command displays the login table:  
CB5000> show login  
Login Table:  
Index Login Name  
Access  
Active Sessions  
----- --------------- -----------------------------  
1 system  
2 clark  
3 lois  
4 jimmy  
Super User  
Super User  
Administrator  
User  
1
0
0
0
5 [not used]  
6 [not used]  
7 [not used]  
8 [not used]  
9 [not used]  
10 [not used]  
Active Login Sessions:  
Login Name  
----------  
system  
Session Type  
------------  
Remote Super User  
Session Time  
------------  
0 days 00:05:01  
Related Command SET LOGIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-350 SHOW MODULE  
SHOW MODULE  
Use the SHOW MODULE command to display the status and configuration for  
modules currently installed in your hub.  
The SHOW MODULE command displays information for all of the modules  
currently installed in your hub. Use the VERBOSE option only when you use the  
SHOW command with a single module in the hub. This option gives detailed  
information about the software and DIP switch settings for the module.  
To display information about port-switched modules, use the SHOW PORT  
command.  
This command has two additional values: RMON Analyzer and RMON System  
Analyzer.  
Format  
show module  
slot.subslot  
verbose  
all  
no_verbose  
cpu_utilization  
cpu_utilization  
slot  
Hub slot 1 through 19.  
Module subslot.  
subslot  
all  
Displays information for all modules.  
cpu_utilization  
verbose  
no_verbose  
Displays CPU statistics for the specified module(s).  
Displays extended information.  
Displays summary information.  
Example 1 The following command uses the VERBOSE option to display the detailed  
settings of the CoreBuilder 5000 24-Port 10BASE-T Module in slot 1. The first  
line and the Module Information settings describe the software settings of the  
module. The DIP Switch Information settings describe the hardware settings of  
the module.  
CB5000> show module 1.1 verbose  
Slot  
----- --------------- -------  
01.01 6124M-TPL6 a1.00.5  
Module  
Version  
Network  
General Information  
---------- -------------------  
PER_PORT  
6124M-TPL6: CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet 24-PORT 10BASE-T Module  
Non-Volatile DIP Setting: DISABLED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW MODULE 2-351  
Example 2 The following command shows the type and location of all modules installed in  
the hub:  
CB5000> show module all  
Slot Module  
Version  
Network  
General Information  
---------------- -------  
01.01 6124M-TPL6 V1.00  
01.02 6100D-MGT V1.00  
------------ -------------------  
PER_PORT  
ETHERNET_1  
02.01 6106M-CAR V1.00  
02.08 6000M-MGT V1.00  
N/A  
N/A  
Master Management Module  
09.01 5112M-TPPL  
10.01 5104M-FP  
004  
001  
004  
PER_PORT  
PER_PORT  
PER_PORT  
15.01 5102M-AUIF  
18.01 6000M-RCTL  
19.01 6000M-RCTL  
V1.01 N/A  
V1.01 N/A  
Active Controller Module  
Standby Controller Module  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-352 SHOW MODULE  
Example 3 The following command displays the A-ENMC’s interface-specific attributes:  
CB5000> show module 2.3 verbose  
Slot Module Version  
----- --------------- -------  
02.01 6100D-AMGT V1.00  
6100D-AMGT: CoreBuilder 5000 DualEthernet Network Monitor Card  
Network  
General Information  
------------ -------------------  
Boot Version:  
DLM Mode:  
CPU RAM Size (Mb):  
V1.00  
DISABLED  
8
Module Interface_1  
ETHERNET_1  
IP Address:  
127.0.0.1  
ff.ff.00.00  
0.0.0.0  
00-00-00-00-9a-0e  
ENABLED  
3
Subnetwork Mask:  
Default Gateway:  
Station Address:  
Interface Mode:  
Interface Number:  
Module Interface_2  
ETHERNET_2  
IP Address:  
151.104.15.1  
ff.ff.ff.00  
0.0.0.0  
aa-10-00-00-9a-0e  
STANDBY  
Subnetwork Mask:  
Default Gateway:  
Station Address:  
Interface Mode:  
Interface Number:  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW MODULE 2-353  
Example 4 The following command shows CPU utilization statistics for the module in  
slot 12.1:  
cb5000> show module 12.1 cpu_utilization  
CPU Statistics for module 12.1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Current  
Peak  
TimeStamp  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
CPU Load Percentage:  
Fragmented Packets:  
IP Relay Packets:  
ARP Packets:  
Learn Packets:  
RMON Packets:  
SNMP Packets:  
STAP Packets:  
SMT Packets:  
FDDI Events:  
14%  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
58%  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15:49:11 23 Sep 99  
13:50:14 06 Oct 99  
13:50:14 06 Oct 99  
13:50:14 06 Oct 99  
13:50:14 06 Oct 99  
13:50:14 06 Oct 99  
13:50:14 06 Oct 99  
13:50:14 06 Oct 99  
13:50:14 06 Oct 99  
13:50:14 06 Oct 99  
15:47:17 23 Sep 99  
0
2
0
152  
MLAN Packets:  
Related Commands SHOW DLM  
SHOW INTERFACE  
SHOW HUB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-354 SHOW NETWORK  
SHOW NETWORK  
Use the SHOW NETWORK command to display status information about the  
networks in the hub.  
The SHOW NETWORK command displays status information about the hub’s  
networks. The VERBOSE option displays the state of beacon recovery and  
mismatch resolution. Both have values of enabled and disabled. Refer to the SET  
commands for descriptions of these objects.  
Format  
show network  
ethernet  
network  
all  
token_ring  
fast_ethernet  
network  
verbose  
all  
no_verbose  
network  
all  
network  
The values are:  
ethernet_1...8  
■
token_ring_1...10  
■
fast_ethernet_1...4  
■
all  
Displays information about all the networks in the hub.  
verbose  
Displays detailed information about the network or networks you  
have selected.  
no_verbose  
Displays basic information only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW NETWORK 2-355  
Example 1 The following command displays the status of the all hub’s Ethernet networks:  
CB5000> show network ethernet all  
Network Display:  
Network  
Slot Network State Status  
MAC State Speed General Info  
---------- ---- ------------- ----------- ---------- ------- ------------  
ETHERNET_1 N/A ALLOCATED  
ETHERNET_2 N/A ALLOCATED  
ETHERNET_3 N/A ALLOCATED  
ETHERNET_4 N/A UNUSED  
ETHERNET_5 N/A UNUSED  
ETHERNET_6 N/A UNUSED  
ETHERNET_7 N/A UNUSED  
ETHERNET_8 N/A UNUSED  
OKAY  
OKAY  
OKAY  
OKAY  
OKAY  
OKAY  
OKAY  
OKAY  
UNASSIGNED 10 MBPS  
UNASSIGNED 10 MBPS  
UNASSIGNED 10 MBPS  
UNASSIGNED 10 MBPS  
UNASSIGNED 10 MBPS  
UNASSIGNED 10 MBPS  
UNASSIGNED 10 MBPS  
UNASSIGNED 10 MBPS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-356 SHOW NETWORK  
Example 2 The following command displays the status of the hub’s Token Ring networks:  
CB5000> show network token_ring all  
Network Display:  
Network  
Slot Network State Status  
MAC State Speed General Info  
---------- ---- ------------- ---------- ----------------- ------------  
TOKEN_RING_1 N/A ALLOCATED  
TOKEN_RING_2 N/A UNUSED  
TOKEN_RING_3 N/A UNUSED  
TOKEN_RING_4 N/A UNUSED  
TOKEN_RING_5 N/A UNUSED  
TOKEN_RING_6 N/A UNUSED  
TOKEN_RING_7 N/A UNUSED  
TOKEN_RING_9 N/A UNUSED  
OKAY  
UNASSIGNED 16 MBPS  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED 16 MBPS  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED16 MBPS  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED16 MBPS  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED16 MBPS  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED16 MBPS  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED16 MBPS  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED16 MBPS  
Field  
Description  
Network described on the current line.  
Network  
Slot  
Indicates the slot number containing the indicated isolated  
(module-level) Token Ring network.  
Network State  
Status  
States if the network is allocated or unused.  
Operating status of the network.  
MAC State  
Indicates whether or not a network monitor card (NMC) was  
assigned to the network.  
Speed  
Indicates if the ring is running at 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps (Token Ring),  
10 Mbps (Ethernet), or 100 Mbps (Fast Ethernet).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW NETWORK 2-357  
Example 3 The following command displays the status of the hub’s Fast Ethernet networks:  
CB5000> show network fast_ethernet all  
Network Display:  
Network  
Slot Network State Status  
MAC State Speed General Info  
---------- ---- ------------- ----------- ---------- ------- ------------  
FAST_ETHER_1 N/A UNUSED  
FAST_ETHER_2N/A UNUSED  
FAST_ETHER_3 N/A UNUSED  
FAST_ETHER_4 N/A UNUSED  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED 100 MBPS  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED 100 MBPS  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED 100 MBPS  
UNMONITORED UNASSIGNED 100 MBPS  
Related Commands SET MODULE NETWORK  
SHOW BACKPLANE PATHS  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-358 SHOW PORT  
SHOW PORT  
Use the SHOW PORT command to display the mode and status of all ports or a  
specific port.  
Format  
show port  
slot.port  
slot.all  
all  
verbose  
no_verbose  
slot.port  
Selects a port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the module location in the chassis and port  
(1 through 20) is the port number. For example, to select port 4 on the  
module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
slot.all  
Displays information for all ports on the module in the selected slot.  
Displays information about all ports on all modules.  
Displays extended information.  
all  
verbose  
no_verbose  
Displays summary information.  
Example for Ethernet The following command displays summary status for all ports on the module in  
slot 2:  
CB5000> show port 2.all no_verbose  
Port Display for Module 6120M-TPP :  
Port Mode  
Status  
Network  
General Information  
----- -------- ------------------- ---------------------------------  
02.01 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.02 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.03 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.04 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.05 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.06 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.07 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.08 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.09 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.10 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.11 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.12 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.13 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.14 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.15 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.16 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.17 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.18 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.19 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
02.20 ENABLED LINK FAILURE  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_3  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_1  
ETHERNET_2  
ETHERNET_2  
ETHERNET_2  
ETHERNET_2  
ETHERNET_2  
ETHERNET_2  
ETHERNET_2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW PORT 2-359  
Example for The following command displays detailed status for a specific Fast_Ethernet port:  
Fast_Ethernet  
CB5000> show port 1.1 verbose  
Port Display for Module 6512M-TX:  
Port Mode  
Status  
Network  
General Information  
-----------------------  
01.02 ENABLED OK  
------------ ------------  
FAST_ETHER_1  
Port Alert Filter:  
Port Connector:  
DISABLED  
RJ45  
Example for ONline The following command displays extended information for the module in slot 6:  
Token Ring  
CB5000> show port 6.all verbose  
Port Display for Module 5202M-FR:  
Port  
Mode  
Status  
Network  
General Information  
----- -------- ------------ ---------------- -------------------  
06.01 DISABLED NO PHANTOM TOKEN_RING_5  
Port Connector:  
RJ45S  
Mode Dip Setting:  
Cable Impedance Dip Setting:  
ENABLED  
150 OHM  
06.02 ENABLED OKAY  
TOKEN_RING_5  
Port Connector:  
RJ45S  
Mode Dip Setting:  
Cable Impedance Dip Setting:  
ENABLED  
150 OHM  
Status Display  
OKAY  
Indicates  
Port is operating properly.  
LINK FAILURE  
Port is not receiving a good signal. Possible causes include a cable break  
or lost connection.  
FATAL ERROR  
NO CABLE  
An error has occurred that makes the module inoperable.  
A copper trunk port with Cable Monitor mode enabled cannot detect a  
cable.  
NO SQUELCH  
NO PHANTOM  
Data cannot be detected on an incoming path of a copper trunk port.  
Indicates that the phantom current is not detected at the Token Ring  
port because the station is powered down, no station is attached, a  
cable fault occurred, or because the adapter card removed itself from  
the ring.  
BEACON WRAPPED Port has been wrapped by the beacon recovery feature.  
SPEED MISMATCH Wrong speed station attached to port. Port wrapped by speed detect  
algorithm.  
BCN THRESH ERROR Number of beacon wraps recorded has exceeded a user-set threshold.  
SPD THRESH ERROR Number of speed detect wraps recorded has exceeded a user-set  
threshold.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-360 SHOW PORT  
Example for The following command displays extended information for all ports on the module  
CoreBuilder 5000 Token in slot 7:  
Ring  
CB5000> show port 7.all verbose  
Port Display for Module 6218M-ATPP:  
Port  
----- -------- ------------ ---------------- -------------------  
07.01 ENABLED NO PHANTOM TOKEN_RING_1 Port is down  
Mode  
Status  
Network  
General Information  
Port Alert Filter:  
Port Connector:  
DISABLED  
RJ45S  
Dip Network Setting:  
Static Switch:  
ISOLATED_11  
DISABLED  
07.02 ENABLED NO PHANTOM TOKEN_RING_1  
Port is down  
Port Alert Filter:  
Port Connector:  
DISABLED  
RJ45S  
Dip Network Setting:  
Static Switch:  
ISOLATED_11  
DISABLED  
Example 1 for ONline The following command displays summary status for all ports on the module in  
FDDI slot 8:  
CB5000> show port 8.all no_verbose  
Port Display for Module 5308M-FIB-ST:  
Port  
Mode  
Status  
Network  
General Information  
----- -------- ------------ ---------------- -------------------  
08.01 ENABLED OKAY  
08.02 DISABLED OFF  
08.03 ENABLED OKAY  
08.04 ENABLED OKAY  
08.05 DISABLED OFF  
FDDI_1  
FDDI_1  
FDDI_1  
FDDI_1  
FDDI_1  
Active Slave Port  
Slave Port  
08.06 ENABLED LINK FAILUREFDDI_1  
Withholding M-M  
08.07 ENABLED OKAY  
08.08 DISABLED OFF  
FDDI_1  
FDDI_1  
Example 2 for ONline The following command displays detailed status for a specific FDDI port:  
FDDI  
CB5000> show port 3.2 verbose  
Port Display for Module 5308M-FIB-ST:  
Port  
----- -------- ------------ ---------------- -------------------  
03.2 ENABLED OKAY FDDI_1 Active Slave Port  
Mode  
Status  
Network  
General Information  
Port_Connector:  
Port Type:  
PCM State:  
Port Neighbor_Type:  
Remote MAC Indicated:  
ST  
Slave  
Active  
Master  
FALSE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW PORT 2-361  
Field  
Description  
Port  
Indicates the slot number and the port number, in the format slot/port, for  
the port of the designated module.  
Mode  
Status  
Identifies the mode (enabled or disabled) of the designated module.  
Indicates if the port is inserted onto the ring (OKAY), not inserted onto the  
ring (OFF), attempting insertion onto the ring (CONNECTING), configured as a  
backup slave port (BACKUP-LINK), or experiencing a problem (LINK FAILURE).  
Network  
Specifies the network to which the module is assigned.  
Reports the following information:  
General  
Information  
Active Slave Port  
■
Slave Port  
■
Withholding M-M  
■
PCM Break State  
■
Break in Connection  
■
Port Hardware Failure! (Note: If this message appears, try resetting the  
■
module. If this does not correct the problem, call 3Com Technical  
Support.)  
Bad Bypass/Remote Port (This error occurs only when the FMM boots up.)  
■
Related Command SET PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-362 SHOW PORT  
SHOW POWER  
Use the SHOW POWER command to display the power budget, power modes, and  
power information on a per-slot basis. The SHOW POWER command displays the  
power settings for the hub, including the amount of power available, and the  
amount of power consumed, in the hub.  
Format  
show power  
budget  
mode  
slot  
all  
budget  
mode  
slot  
Show power budget table only.  
Show power fault tolerance and overheat mode settings.  
Show power information on slot (1 through 17), or all slots.  
Show all power settings.  
all  
Example The following command shows the output of the SHOW POWER ALL command:  
CB5000> show power all  
Power Management Information  
----------------------------  
Hub Power Modes:  
Fault-Tolerant Mode:  
Fault-Tolerant Status:  
Overheat Power Down Mode:  
NON_FAULT_TOLERANT  
NON_FAULT_TOLERANT  
ENABLE  
Slot Power Information:  
Slot  
----  
1
Class  
-----  
N/A  
Admin Status  
------------  
ENABLE  
Operating Status  
----------------  
ENABLED  
2
N/A  
ENABLE  
ENABLED  
4
N/A  
ENABLE  
ENABLED  
5
N/A  
ENABLE  
ENABLED  
8
N/A  
ENABLE  
ENABLED  
9
N/A  
ENABLE  
ENABLED  
10  
N/A  
ENABLE  
ENABLED  
Slot  
----  
11  
Class  
-----  
N/A  
3
Admin Status  
------------  
ENABLE  
Operating Status  
----------------  
ENABLED  
14  
ENABLE  
ENABLED  
15  
3
ENABLE  
ENABLED  
17  
3
ENABLE  
ENABLED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW PORT 2-363  
Hub Power Budget:  
Voltage Type Voltage Level Watts Capacity Watts Available Watts Consumed  
------------ ------------- --------------- --------------- --------------  
+5V  
5.128  
-5.058  
11.803  
-11.993  
2.125  
367.00  
27.00  
81.50  
30.50  
14.30  
204.00  
24.75  
42.00  
29.50  
10.10  
163.00  
-5V  
2.25  
+12V  
-12V  
+2V  
39.50  
1.00  
4.2  
Field  
Description  
Hub Power Modes  
Indicates if the hub is set to fault-tolerant or non-fault-tolerant  
mode, if it remains in fault-tolerant status currently (that is, there is  
still enough power to maintain fault tolerance), and if the hub is  
configured to power down when it overheats.  
Slot  
Slot the row describes.  
Class  
Power class setting, which determines which modules power down  
if there is a shortage of power in the hub. Lower numbers lose  
power first. ONline™ modules always have highest priority.  
Admin Status  
Operating Status  
Voltage Type  
Voltage Level  
Watts Capacity  
Current Admin Status of the slot.  
Current Operating Status of the slot.  
Type of voltage being budgeted.  
Actual voltage level of each type.  
Maximum potential watts produced by the power supplies available  
in the hub.  
Watts Available  
Number of watts not being used by currently installed modules and  
fans.  
Watts Consumed  
Number of watts consumed by currently installed modules and  
power supplies.  
Related Commands SET POWER  
SET POWER MODULE POWER_REQUIREMENTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-364 SHOW PROTOCOLS  
SHOW PROTOCOLS  
Use the SHOW PROTOCOLS command to display the following information about  
a CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModule:  
■ The FDDI-to-Ethernet translation settings the SwitchModule is using  
■ The user-created and default protocol filters the SwitchModule is using  
■ Rate limiting status (You can display a counter of the number of packets  
discarded by entering the MONITOR BRIDGE_PORT or SHOW COUNTER  
BRIDGE_PORT command. The counter displays in the Received Discards field.)  
The Bridge Receive Discards is composed of Management Filtered Packets, Filtered  
Packets, and Management Unicast Filtered Packets. These packets are all counters  
on the FTE.  
You can use this command to display information about one SwitchModule at a  
time.  
Format  
show protocols  
forwarding  
slot.1  
translation  
rate_limit_threshold  
slot.1  
Selects a slot you want to display information about. Valid  
values are slot 1 through 17, subslot 1.  
forwarding  
Displays information about user-created and default protocol  
filters. By default, the SwitchModule uses the following filters:  
Spanning Tree  
■
IP  
■
IP ARP  
■
Appletalk ARP  
■
Unknown Protocol  
■
translation  
Displays the FDDI-to-Ethernet translation settings the  
SwitchModule is using.  
rate_limit_threshold  
Displays the status of rate limiting for a:  
SwitchModule  
■
Particular protocol type  
■
Rate_Limit_Threshold values range from 0 through 65,534.  
(If you set the rate limit threshold to 0 frames per second, the  
SwitchModule filters all broadcast packets.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW PROTOCOLS 2-365  
Example 1 This command displays the protocol type field, protocol name, priority setting, and  
ports affected by the default filters in the protocol forwarding table for the  
SwitchModule in slot 6. The table displays the default filters used by the  
SwitchModule, as well as any additional filters you create.  
The following command shows only the default filters:  
CB5000> show protocols 6.1 forwarding  
Protocol  
Name  
Priority Forward On Ports  
-----------------------------------------------------------------  
dsap 42  
enet 08-00  
enet 08-06  
snap 00-00-00-80-f3 appletalk arp  
unkn 00  
spanning tree  
ip  
ip arp  
normal  
normal  
normal  
normal  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
unknown protocol normal  
Example 2 The following command displays the translation setting that the SwitchModule  
in slot 3 is using:  
CB5000> show protocols 3.1 translation  
IPX translation: ipx enet II - default  
CB5000>  
Example 3 To display the status of rate limiting:  
■ For a SwitchModule – Enter the SHOW PROTOCOLS  
RATE_LIMIT_THRESHOLD command. For example:  
> show protocols 7.1 rate_limit_threshold  
Rate limit threshold set to 300 (frames/second)  
■ For a particular protocol type – Enter the SHOW PROTOCOLS FORWARDING  
command and look at the Rate Limit field. For example:  
CB5000> show protocols 7.1 forwarding  
Protocol  
Name  
Priority Rate Limit Forward On Ports  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
dsap 42  
spanning tree  
ip  
ip_arp  
appletalk arp  
unknown protocolnormal  
normal  
normal  
normal  
normal  
disable  
disable  
enable  
disable  
disable  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
enet 08-00  
enet 08-06  
enet 80-f3  
unkn 00  
In this example, rate limiting is enabled for the protocol type enet 08-06.  
To disable rate limiting, enter the SET PROTOCOLS command with the  
DISABLE_RATE_LIMIT option. For example:  
> set protocols 7.1 forwarding enet 08-06 normal_priority all ip_arp  
disable_rate_limit  
Related Commands CLEAR PROTOCOLS  
SET PROTOCOLS FORWARDING  
SET PROTOCOLS TRANSLATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-366 SHOW RING_MAP  
SHOW RING_MAP  
Use the SHOW RING_MAP command to display a ring topology of the Token Ring  
and FDDI networks currently configured in the hub.  
Format  
option  
show ring_map  
protocol  
protocol  
fddi — Displays a ring map of FDDI stations in the hub.  
■
■
token_ring – Displays a map of Token Ring stations, using the format  
you select (option).  
option  
logical — Lists the MAC address and slot and port identification for  
each Token Ring port. If a MAC-less device is the only station on the  
ring, the map reports NO ENTRIES.  
■
(Token Ring)  
mac_address mac address — When you supply a MAC address, this  
■
■
■
option returns the slot and port associated with that address.  
physical — This option applies to ONline™ System Concentrator  
®
modules in a CoreBuilder 5000 hub.  
port slot.port — When you supply a slot and port, this option returns  
the MAC address associated with that port.  
Example 1 (FDDI) The following command shows an FDDI ring map:  
CB5000> show ring_map fddi  
Slot  
Status  
Upstream_Slot Downstream_Slot  
____________________________________________________  
12  
14  
OKAY  
OKAY  
16  
12  
14  
16  
FDDI Description For FDDI modules, this command displays the physical ring topology of the FDDI  
networks in the hub. The map displays the modules that comprise each network,  
and their respective upstream and downstream slots. The map also displays  
module status.  
Field  
Slot  
Description  
Slot numbers of the modules that compose each FDDI network.  
OKAY — condition normal.  
Status  
PARTIAL FAIL — partial hardware failure.  
Downstream_Slot  
Upstream_Slot  
Hub slot number for the adjoining module on the ring. Identifies the  
module the specified FDDI module will pass the token to.  
Identifies the hub slot number for the adjoining module on the ring. This  
field identifies the module passing the token to the specified FDDI module.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW RING_MAP 2-367  
Example 2 (ONline) The following command displays a Token Ring map. This map does not include  
CoreBuilder 5000 modules.  
CB5000> show ring_map token_ring  
Physical wiring map for backplane isolated or front ring:  
Upstream  
Slot ID  
Connection  
Type  
Downstream  
Slot ID  
----------------------------------------  
External  
Fiber  
9
9
Copper  
External  
External  
Copper  
9
9
9
Backplane  
Fiber  
9
External  
11  
13  
Backplane  
Backplane  
11  
13  
ONline Token Ring For ONline Token Ring modules, the SHOW RING_MAP TOKEN_RING PHYSICAL  
Description command shows the physical topology of ONline Token Ring modules in the hub.  
To end the display and return to the command line, press Ctrl+C.  
Field  
Description  
Upstream Slot ID  
Hub slot number for the adjoining module on the ring. Identifies the  
module passing the token to the specified Token Ring module.  
Connection Type  
Media connection between the two ports. The available types are:  
Backplane — Backplane connection on the same Token Ring  
■
network.  
Copper — Copper Ring-In/Ring-Out connection.  
■
Fiber — Fiber Ring-In/Ring-Out connection.  
■
Downstream Slot ID Hub slot number for the adjoining module on the ring. Identifies the  
module to which the specified Token Ring module passes the token.  
If the connection type is copper or fiber, the upstream and downstream slot ID is  
external. External means that the connection is from another hub, or that there is  
no connection on that end. A remote connection indicates a station that is not on  
the local ring.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-368 SHOW RING_MAP  
Example 3 The following command displays a map of Token Ring stations attached to the  
ring associated with backplane network token_ring 1:  
CB5000> show ring_map token_ring logical token ring  
Token Ring Logical Map for Network TOKEN_RING_1  
MAC Address  
Slot  
Port  
----  
N/A  
8
12  
13  
15  
16  
1
2
4
6
7
----------------- ----  
10-00-f1-0b-00-4f 04.02  
00-00-c9-1a-2e-0c 04.01  
00-00-c9-1a-2e-0b 04.01  
00-00-c9-1a-1c-aa 04.01  
00-00-c9-1a-29-ab 04.01  
00-00-c9-1a-2e-a3 04.01  
00-00-c9-1a-6e-78 07.01  
00-00-c9-1a-af-3f 07.01  
00-00-c9-1a-1b-43 07.01  
00-00-c9-1c-0a-fb 07.01  
00-00-c9-1a-2c-a0 07.01  
00-00-c9-1a-28-b1 07.01  
00-00-c9-1a-18-72 07.01  
10  
11  
13  
00-00-c9-1a-28-4  
07.01  
10-00-f1-0b-29-a6 External  
00-00-03-0c-0b-1a External  
00-00-c9-1a-29-a9 External  
08-00-5a-0b-5d-a6 External  
00-00-c9-1a-29-8b External  
08-00-20-0c-9e-d7 External  
CoreBuilder 5000 Token When a TR-NMC monitors a network, and the TR-NMC RMON ring station  
Ring Description statistics are enabled, the TR-NMC can resolve port-to-address mapping for  
external stations. The map lists stations by MAC address, and correlates each  
address in a local hub to a slot and port. Stations on the ring that are external to  
the hub are described as external.  
The TR-NMC itself is always located in slot.2 and has no port assignment.  
Related Commands SHOW NETWORK  
SHOW PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW RMON CONTROL 2-369  
SHOW RMON  
CONTROL  
Use the SHOW RMON CONTROL command to show control table entries for  
individual RMON groups.  
Each RMON group provides control tables and data tables:  
■
Control tables — Used by the Network Management Station to add  
monitoring (using more resources and degrading performance) or to remove  
monitoring (freeing memory and improving performance)  
■
Data tables — Store and provide the information collected, using the  
instructions in the control table  
Control tables are structured to support multiple Network Management Stations  
per probe. If an NMS configures probe resources, it is the responsibility of that  
NMS to free those resources when no longer used.  
If you use the DMM as the NMS, manually delete unused control table entries.  
Each control table entry has:  
■
■
■
■
A table index  
An owner string identifying the NMS that created the control entry  
Status of the control entry  
Other objects that define the behavior of the group to be monitored  
The history control table defines which interface (MAC) to monitor, the sampling  
interval, the number of history reports the MAC stores for a sampling interval, and  
so on.  
If you enter a valid control entry, the DMM creates or appends the associated data  
table. When an NMS no longer requires the collected data, it may free up the  
resources used by invalidating the control entry. When this occurs, the probe  
removes the control entry and all of the data associated with it, thus freeing  
resources for other monitoring functions. Again, if you use the DMM as the NMS,  
you must delete unused control table entries manually.  
When a MAC initializes, it creates some default control entries:  
■
■
■
Collecting statistics on the MAC interface  
Monitoring host and matrix information  
Generating two history reports, one every 30 seconds, and one every 30  
minutes  
The owner of these entries is the MAC itself. The owner string for these entries is  
“monitor.” Typically, these entries exist for as long as the MAC is an active RMON  
probe.  
When you move an NMC from one network to another, the DMM deletes all  
control and data tables and restores the basic default entries.  
RMON configurations are not stored in NVRAM. The DMM reverts to default  
RMON settings after a power failure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-370 SHOW RMON CONTROL  
Format  
control  
data  
show rmon  
group  
index  
all  
group  
Values are:  
alarm  
■
■
■
■
■
■
event  
history  
host  
matrix  
topN_hosts  
index  
Index number of the host table.  
Example The following command displays control table entries for a hub’s RMON History  
Table:  
CB5000> show rmon history control all  
RMON History Control Information:  
Index Data Source Buckets  
Interval Owner  
----- ------------ ----------  
---------- -------------------  
3 Interface 3  
4 Interface 4  
6 Interface 3  
8 Interface 4  
120  
120  
96  
00:30  
00:30  
30:00  
30:00  
monitor  
monitor  
monitor  
monitor  
96  
Related Commands SET RMON CONTROL  
SHOW RMON DATA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW RMON DISTRIBUTION ETHERNET DATA 2-371  
SHOW RMON  
DISTRIBUTION  
ETHERNET DATA  
Use the SHOW RMON DISTRIBUTION ETHERNET DATA command to show packet  
distribution (by size) on an Ethernet network.  
The SHOW RMON DISTRIBUTION ETHERNET DATA command displays a graph that  
shows the percentage of network traffic that is made up of various packets sizes.  
Format  
show rmon distribution ethernet data  
index  
all  
index  
Index from the RMON distribution control table.  
Example The following command displays RMON distribution statistics for all entries in the  
RMON distribution control table:  
CB5000> show rmon distribution ethernet data all  
RMON Ethernet Distribution:  
Data Source Interface 3 (Ethernet Statistics Index 3):  
0%  
Packet Size |  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
25%  
50%  
75%  
100%  
|
|
|
|
Packets  
64  
|
| 0  
| 0  
| 41  
| 30  
| 3  
65 to 127 |  
128 to 255 |  
256 to 511 |  
512 to 1023 |  
1024 to 1518 |  
| 0  
Related Commands SET RMON  
SET RMON INTERFACE  
SHOW RMON CONTROL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-372 SHOW RMON HISTORY DATA  
SHOW RMON  
HISTORY DATA  
Use the SHOW RMON HISTORY DATA command to display network statistics  
information sampled at an interval you configure. This command works with  
Ethernet modules only.  
The history report is similar to the information displayed using the MONITOR  
command. It logs the difference between counters at regular intervals. The history  
control table specifies the:  
■
■
■
Data source of the history report  
Collection interval  
Number of entries to store  
If the probe has more entries to store than it is configured to hold, the oldest  
history entry is deleted (the lowest-numbered sample) and a new entry is  
appended (as the highest-numbered sample).  
The Ethernet history report incorporates Ethernet statistics counters. For each  
sample entry, the report provides utilization of the network during that interval.  
Each entry is stamped with the date and time that the entry was started.  
Format  
show rmon history data  
control index  
data index  
all  
control index  
data index  
Index from RMON History Control Table for the history you want to  
view.  
Index of the specific history collected that you want to view.  
Example The following command displays all history samples collected using RMON History  
Control Table entry 3. (The example shows a single bucket. Histories typically show  
many.)  
CB5000> show rmon history data 3 all  
RMON History display for Interface 3:  
Sample Index: 2387  
Interval Start: 06 Oct 94 06:53:46  
Drop Events:  
Octets:  
Packets:  
0
374107  
1927  
Broadcast Packets: 40  
Multicast Packets: 22  
CRC and Alignment Errors:0  
Undersize Packets: 0  
Oversize Packets: 0  
Fragments:  
Jabbers:  
Collisions:  
Utilization:  
0
0
0
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW RMON HISTORY DATA 2-373  
Related Commands SET RMON  
SET MODULE INTERFACE  
SHOW RMON HISTORY CONTROL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-374 SHOW RMON HOST DATA  
SHOW RMON HOST  
DATA  
Use the SHOW RMON HOST DATA command to display data from the RMON host  
table. The host table collects statistics related to hosts on the network. As each  
packet is monitored, the MAC adds the source address of the frame to the host  
table, incrementing the appropriate “out” counters, and the probe adds the  
destination address of the frame to the host table, incrementing the appropriate  
“in” counters.  
The host table also collects information for the Host TopN group that indicates  
which hosts are generating and receiving the most network traffic (typically the  
servers and routers), the most network errors, and so on.  
Format  
index  
all  
by_creation_order  
by_address  
show rmon host data  
host_address  
mac address  
index  
The index entry in the RMON host table.  
Lists all hosts.  
all  
by_creation_order  
by_address  
host_address  
mac address  
Lists hosts by the order in which the RMON agent detected them.  
Lists hosts by numerical MAC address order.  
Displays host data for the specified address.  
Specifies the MAC address for the host whose host data you want  
to display.  
Example The following command displays RMON host statistics for one MAC address:  
CB5000> show rmon host data 1 host_address 0-0-1a-24-0-0  
RMON Host display for Interface 1:  
Creation Order: 13  
Host Address: 00-00-1a-24-00-00  
Input Packets: 1  
Output Packets: 0  
Input Octets: 8812  
Output Octets: 0  
Output Errors: 0  
Output Packets (Broadcast): 0  
Output Packets (Multicast): 0  
Related Commands SET RMON HOST  
SET MODULE INTERFACE  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW RMON MATRIX DATA 2-375  
SHOW RMON MATRIX  
DATA  
Use the SHOW RMON MATRIX DATA command to display information on  
conversations between hosts on a network.  
The matrix table is similar to the host table, but tracks network conversations  
between hosts, instead of host traffic. For each frame, the MAC extracts the  
source and destination address and associates the frame with a conversation.  
Network conversations are important for performance modeling. Using matrix  
table information, you can model the network across bridging devices and along  
shared segments. You can optimize network performance by ensuring that heavy  
conversations are isolated to shared LANs and do not occur across heavily  
burdened bridging devices.  
Format  
show rmon matrix data  
selection  
selection  
index (an entry from the RMON matrix control table)  
■
■
■
■
involving mac address  
by_insertion_order  
all  
Example The following command displays the RMON Matrix Table for RMON Matrix Control  
Table entry 3:  
CB5000> show rmon matrix data 3  
RMON Matrix display for Interface 3 :  
Source Address : 00-00-0D-04-F9-5C  
Destination Address: 00-00-F6-00-7F-E4  
Index  
: 3  
Packets  
Octets  
Errors  
: 130637  
: 9714430  
: 0  
Related Commands SET RMON MATRIX  
SET MODULE INTERFACE  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-376 SHOW RMON STATISTICS  
SHOW RMON  
STATISTICS  
Use the SHOW RMON STATISTICS command to display general statistic  
information on a specified group.  
Format  
index  
control  
data  
show rmon statistics  
ethernet  
all  
Example The following command displays all RMON Ethernet data statistics:  
CB5000> show rmon statistics ethernet data all  
RMON Ethernet Statistics:  
Index  
: 3  
Data Source  
Drop Events  
Octets  
: Interface 3  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Packets  
Broadcast Packets  
Multicast Packets  
CRC and Alignment Errors  
Undersize Packets  
Oversize Packets  
Fragments  
Jabbers  
Collisions  
Related Commands SET RMON  
SET MODULE INTERFACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW RMON TOPN_HOSTS DATA 2-377  
SHOW RMON  
TOPN_HOSTS DATA  
Use the SHOW RMON TOPN_HOSTS DATA command to display data on the  
stations that generate the most data of the type you specify. This command  
applies to Ethernet modules only.  
This report picks a statistic associated with hosts and sorts the hosts based on that  
statistic, over a period of time you select. For example, the TopN group can  
generate a report indicating the top 10 hosts that generated errors over the last  
half hour. The control table specifies:  
■
■
■
Statistic to use for the sort (Rate Base)  
Duration of the monitoring period  
Number of hosts to report (this cannot be set from the command line)  
You can sort the data using any of the host table statistics. The generated report  
indicates in decreasing order:  
■
Hosts  
■
Actual rate for the sorted statistic for that host  
A TopN report is generated directly from the host table. Therefore, the TopN report  
points to a host control entry.  
Format  
show rmon topn_hosts data  
control index  
data index  
all  
control index  
data index  
Index from RMON Top N Hosts Control Table.  
Index of the specific Top N Hosts entry that you want to view.  
Example The following command displays all TopN entries for TopN Hosts Control entry 1:  
CB5000> show rmon topn_hosts data 1 all  
RMON Host Top N Display for Interface 3:  
Index Address  
Input Packets  
----- ----------------- -------------  
1 00-00-0C-04-F9-5C  
2 08-00-8F-30-02-E3  
3 08-00-09-75-48-6C  
4 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF  
5 02-60-8C-8C-26-7D  
6 01-80-C2-00-00-00  
7 02-60-8C-A4-9B-13  
8 00-00-F6-00-5F-E4  
9 02-60-8C-3F-6F-5C  
10 02-60-8C-6B-13-61  
765  
651  
107  
59  
18  
15  
9
9
9
8
Related Commands SET RMON TOPN_HOSTS  
SET MODULE INTERFACE  
SHOW MODULE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-378 SHOW ROVING_ANALYSIS_ PORT  
SHOW  
ROVING_ANALYSIS_  
PORT  
To display information about the roving analysis configuration, use the SHOW  
ROVING_ANALYSIS_PORT commands.  
The system output that is displayed when you enter these commands contains the  
following columns:  
■
System-Analyzer — Shows whether a SwitchModule is configured to receive  
mirrored traffic.  
■
■
Analyzer — Shows where the mirrored traffic is being sent for analysis.  
Monitor-Source — Lists the bridge port whose traffic is being mirrored (source  
port).  
Format  
show roving_analysis_port  
hub_info  
system_analyzer_info  
hub_info  
Option to use when you want to show roving analysis  
information for all SwitchModules in the hub  
system_analyzer_info Option to use when you want to display information about the  
SwitchModule configured as the system analyzer  
Example 1 The following example shows roving analysis information for all SwitchModules in  
the hub, use the SHOW ROVING_ANALYSIS_PORT command with the HUB_INFO  
option:  
> show roving_analysis_port hub_info  
Slot  
Module  
System-Analyzer Analyzer  
Monitor-Source  
----- --------------------------- ---------------- --------------  
03.1  
04.1  
07.1  
08.1  
13.1  
14.1  
16.1  
17.1  
6604M-F  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
ENABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
6612M-TP  
6604M-TX  
6604M-TX  
6612M-TP  
6614M-FTP ENABLED  
6604M-F  
6604M-F  
BRIDGE PORT 3 BRIDGE PORT 8.2  
SYSTEM ANALYZER  
NONE  
PROCESSOR  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
BRIDGE PORT 14.01  
NONE  
NONE  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
In the previous example:  
■
The SwitchModule in slot 7 is enabled as the system analyzer. It is receiving  
mirrored traffic from bridge port 8.2, the monitor-source, and sending the  
mirrored traffic out bridge port 7.3 for analysis.  
■
Bridge port 14.1 is configured to mirror traffic locally to its own processor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW ROVING_ANALYSIS_ PORT 2-379  
Example 2 To display information about the SwitchModule configured as the system analyzer,  
use the SHOW ROVING_ANALYSIS_PORT command with the  
SYSTEM_ANALYZER_INFO option:  
> show roving_analysis_port system_analyzer_info  
Slot  
------ --------------------------- -----------------------------  
07.1 6604M-TX ENABLED BRIDGE PORT 3 8.2  
Module  
System-Analyzer Analyzer  
Monitor-Source  
This command display shows that slot 7 is configured as the system analyzer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-380 SHOW SCHEDULE  
SHOW SCHEDULE  
Use the SHOW SCHEDULE command to display schedule information for all  
schedules or a specific schedule.  
Format  
show schedule  
all  
holiday  
schedule  
startup_replay_time  
weekday  
weekend  
all  
Displays information about all schedules.  
Displays the holiday list.  
holiday  
schedule  
Displays information about the specified schedule. Use the SHOW  
SCHEDULE ALL command to display a numbered list of schedules.  
The options are 1 through 20.  
startup_replay_time  
Refer to the SET SCHEDULE STARTUP_REPLAY_TIME command for a  
description of startup_replay_time.  
weekday  
weekend  
Displays the list of days defined as weekdays.  
Displays the list of days defined as weekend days.  
Example The following command displays all current schedule information:  
CB5000> show schedule all  
Schedule  
Index  
Script  
Time  
Days  
MTWTFSS  
Dates  
Mode  
Number  
-----  
----  
----  
------  
------- ------  
1
2
3
4
5
enabled  
enabled  
enabled  
enabled  
enabled  
08:00  
20:00  
00:00  
17:00  
08:00  
1
2
2
2
3
+++++  
+++++  
++  
+
+
-09/06  
+08/28  
+09/06  
-09/06  
08/28  
A plus (+) next to a date indicates the date is included in the schedule. A minus (-)  
indicates a date is excluded from the schedule.  
Related Commands SET SCHEDULE  
SET SCHEDULE HOLIDAY  
SET SCHEDULE STARTUP_REPLAY_TIME  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKDAY  
SET SCHEDULE WEEKEND  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW SCRIPT 2-381  
SHOW SCRIPT  
Use the SHOW SCRIPT command to display information about a specific script or  
all scripts.  
Format  
show script  
script  
verbose  
all  
no_verbose  
event_list  
script  
all  
The number of the script for which you want to display information.  
Displays information about all scripts.  
verbose  
Displays extended information, including a list of commands in the  
script.  
no_verbose  
event_list  
Displays summary information.  
Displays script-to-event associations. For more information, refer to the  
description of the SET SCRIPT RUN_ON_EVENT command.  
Example The following command displays script information for all eight scripts:  
CB5000> show script all  
Script Number  
Script Name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
downloader  
status  
(No Name Assigned)  
(No Name Assigned)  
(No Name Assigned)  
(No Name Assigned)  
(No Name Assigned)  
(No Name Assigned)  
Related Commands SET SCRIPT DELETE  
SET SCRIPT INSERT  
SET SCRIPT NAME  
SET SCRIPT OVERWRITE  
SET SCRIPT RUN_ON_EVENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-382 SHOW SECURITY AUTOLEARN  
SHOW SECURITY  
AUTOLEARN  
Use the SHOW SECURITY AUTOLEARN command to display the entries in the  
Autolearning database. Only the entries for the ports specified in the command  
line are displayed.  
When using the SHOW SECURITY AUTOLEARN command, a single asterisk (*)  
marks entries for a port that exceeds the maximum of seven MAC addresses per  
port. A double asterisk (**) marks entries that have exceeded the hub capacity of  
360 MAC addresses.  
If your hub is near full capacity, or if you have ports connected to bridges, you may  
want to use the SET SECURITY AUTOLEARN CAPTURE command to perform two  
or more autolearn captures. This may prevent the ports from exceeding the DMM  
limit of 360 MAC addresses per hub.  
Format  
slot.port  
show security autolearn  
all  
slot.port  
Selects a port for displaying the entries in the Autolearning database.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot location of the module in the hub and port  
(1 through 20) is the port.  
all  
Displays Autolearning database for all modules installed in the hub.  
Example The following command displays the Autolearning database entries for the ports  
on the ONline 10BASE-T Security Module in slot 3:  
CB5000> show security autolearn 3.all  
Autolearned Addresses for Module E12MSS5112M-TPLS in Slot 3:  
Port  
MAC Address(s)  
-----  
3.01  
3.06  
---------------  
01-01-01-01-01-01  
08-00-8f-01-02-03  
08-00-8f-02-03-04  
08-00-8f-04-05-06  
08-00-8f-05-06-07  
08-00-8f-06-07-08 *  
08-01-01-01-01-01 *  
09-00-8c-09-09-09  
09-00-8c-09-09-0a  
12-00-01-12-12-12  
3.09  
3.12  
Note: At least one port on this module has more than 7 security  
addresses autolearned for it. Only the first 7 addresses per port  
(as ordered by MAC address) will be downloaded; extraneous addresses  
are marked in the display above with an asterisk.  
Related Command CLEAR SECURITY AUTOLEARN MAC_ADDRESS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW SECURITY ETHERNET_MAP 2-383  
SHOW SECURITY  
ETHERNET_MAP  
Use the SHOW SECURITY ETHERNET_MAP command to display all MAC addresses  
within the specified network.  
Format  
show security ethernet_map  
mac address  
mac_address  
network  
ethernet_1 through  
ethernet_8  
slot.subslot  
port  
mac_address  
Source addresses. The number of MAC addresses does not exceed the  
maximum_security_addresses_per_port, which is 8.  
mac address  
The MAC address entry for which you want to display information.  
Selects the network to display the MAC addresses.  
network  
ethernet_1 through Specifies the specific Ethernet network for which you want to display the  
ethernet_8  
security ethernet map.  
port  
Identifies the port for this operation.  
slot.subslot  
Selects a module installed in the hub to display all of its port MAC  
addresses.  
slot (1 through 17) is the location of a module in the hub and subslot is  
the port number on the specified module.  
Example The following command displays the MAC addresses for the specified port 1 in  
slot 10:  
CB5000> show security ethernet_map network ethernet_1  
Network Map for Network Ethernet_1:  
MAC Address(s)  
SLOT PORT  
----------------- ---- ----  
01-01-01-01-01-01 10  
08-00-8f-01-02-03 10  
08-00-8f-02-03-04 10  
1
1
1
Related Command SET SECURITY PORT MODE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-384 SHOW SECURITY INTRUDER_LIST  
SHOW SECURITY  
INTRUDER_LIST  
Use the SHOW SECURITY INTRUDER_LIST command to display information about  
the 10 most recent security intrusions.  
The display lists:  
■
■
The port that experienced the intrusion and its MAC address (if available)  
The time (in days (d), hours (h), minutes (m), and seconds (s)) that has elapsed  
since the intrusion attempt occurred  
■
Whether the DMM automatically disabled the port  
The intruder list contains a maximum of 10 entries. When the intruder list is full  
and a new entry is added, the oldest entry is cleared automatically.  
Format  
show security intruder_list  
Example The following command displays the intruder list:  
CB5000> show security intruder_list  
Port  
----  
MAC Address  
Time Since  
Auto-Disabled?  
----------------- ------------- --------------  
12.01 08-00-8F-02-C6-BE 0d 0h 15m 27s Yes  
05.03 09-D3-74-00-2E-01 1d 5h 32m 53s Yes  
Related Command CLEAR SECURITY INTRUDER_LIST  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW SECURITY PORT 2-385  
SHOW SECURITY  
PORT  
Use the SHOW SECURITY PORT command to display the security mode and MAC  
address for a specific port, all ports on a specific module, or all ports on all  
modules in the hub.  
Format  
slot.subslot  
show security port  
all  
slot.subslot  
Selects a port from a module installed in the hub for which to display  
security information.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and subslot is the port number.  
For example, to specify port 4 on the module in slot 6, enter 6.4  
To specify all the ports on the module in slot 6, enter 6.all  
all  
Selects the ports from all the modules installed in the hub slot for which  
to display security information.  
Example The following command displays security information for all ports on hub 3:  
CB5000> show security port 3.all  
Security Display for Module 6218M-ATPP in slot 3:  
Port  
----  
3.01  
3.02  
3.03  
3.04  
Mode  
MAC Addresses  
--------------- -------------------  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
General Information  
--------  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
TOKEN_RING_1  
TOKEN_RING_1  
TOKEN_RING_1  
TOKEN_RING_1  
Related Command SET SECURITY_ADVANCED_ADDRESS_TABLE ADDRESS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-386 SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED ADDRESS_TABLE  
SHOW  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
ADDRESS_TABLE  
Use the SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED ADDRESS_TABLE command to display a  
MAC address or group of addresses for Ethernet networks that have been  
assigned a CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet Private Line Card. These addresses are  
stored in the Ethernet security table.  
Format  
show security_advanced address_table  
port  
slot.port  
all  
group  
all  
group number  
all  
slot.port  
The slot and port number of the port for which you want to view an address  
table  
group number 1 through 256.  
Example The following command displays the entire security address table:  
CB5000> show security_advanced address_table all  
Entry Port  
----- -----  
1.  
Group_Code MAC_Address  
---------- -----------------  
25  
25  
08-00-8f-00-17-d0  
08-00-8f-00-17-d1  
08-00-8f-00-17-da  
08-00-8f-00-17-db  
08-00-8f-00-17-ce  
08-00-8f-00-17-cf  
08-00-8f-00-17-d3  
08-00-8f-00-17-d2  
08-00-8f-00-17-d9  
08-00-8f-00-17-d8  
2.  
3. 8.15  
4. 8.16  
5. 8.17  
6. 8.18  
7. 8.19  
8. 8.20  
9. 8.21  
10. 8.22  
The first two MAC addresses in the table are assigned to Group_Code 25. The  
remaining addresses are paired with module port numbers.  
Related Commands SET SECURITY_ADVANCED  
CLEAR SECURITY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED INTRUDER_TABLE 2-387  
SHOW  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
INTRUDER_TABLE  
Use the SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED INTRUDER_TABLE command to display  
information on recent intrusion attempts for Ethernet networks with  
CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet Private Line Cards.  
The security intruder table contains a detailed log on the last 100 intrusion  
attempts on each secured network. To log intrusion attempts in the security  
intruder table, you must:  
■
■
■
Enable the intruder reporting network parameter  
Enable per-port intruder checking  
Enable either source address or source port checking  
After intrusion detection is properly configured, the Ethernet Private Line Card  
reports intruders to the DMM, which then stores the information in the security  
intruder table.  
Each table entry contains the MAC address and associated port or group code, the  
date and time of the attempted intrusion, the network on which the intrusion  
occurred, and the number of the intrusion attempts on the secured network.  
The Ethernet Private Line Card does not save intruder table information in  
non-volatile RAM (NVRAM).  
Format  
show security_advanced intruder_table  
chronological  
port  
chronological  
port  
Displays the list of intruder attempts from the Intruder table in chronological  
order.  
Displays the list of intruder attempts from the Intruder table by port number.  
Example The following command displays the currently stored Ethernet security intruder  
table:  
CB5000> show security_advanced intruder_table port  
Port  
MAC Address  
Time Stamp  
Network  
Attempts Description  
----- ---------------------------  
02.03 08-00-2b-00-00-0108FEB95  
10:04:34  
-------  
ETHERNET_7  
-------- -----------------  
13  
Intruder station  
08-00-2b-00-00-01 accesse  
port 02.03 13 times...  
Port  
MAC Address  
Time Stamp  
Network  
-------  
ETHERNET_3  
Attempts Description  
-------- -----------  
----- ---------------------------  
02.04 08-00-2b-00-00-0108FEB95  
09:02:45  
4
Intruder station  
08-00-2b-00-00-01 accesse  
port 02.04 4 times...  
Related Command CLEAR SECURITY ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-388 SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK  
SHOW  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
NETWORK  
Use the SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED NETWORK command to view the  
configuration of each security attribute on your network for Ethernet networks  
that have been assigned a CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet Private Line Card.  
Refer to the descriptions of each feature in the CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet Private  
Line Card User Guide for more information.  
Format  
show security_advanced network  
network  
network  
Displays the security settings for the network you specify. For example, if you  
enter ethernet_1, the system displays the configuration for ethernet_1.  
The options are:  
ethernet_1 through ethernet_8  
■
isolated_1 through isolated_8  
■
all (to display information for all secure networks)  
■
Example The following command displays security settings for all hub networks:  
CB5000> show security_advanced network all  
ETHERNET_4 Network Security Configuration  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
Securing Module:  
Slot 01.02 Version a1.00.6  
6100D-SEC: Ethernet Security Private LineCard  
Operational Mode:  
Administrative Mode:  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
Autolearning:  
Eavesdrop Protection:  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
Intruder Detection:  
Intruder Actions:  
Source Address Checking:ENABLED  
Source Port Checking: DISABLED  
Intruder Reporting:  
Intruder Jamming:  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
Intruder Port DisablingDISABLED  
Related Command SET SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT 2-389  
SHOW  
SECURITY_ADVANCED  
PORT  
Use the SHOW SECURITY_ADVANCED PORT command to view the security  
configuration of ports on Ethernet networks that have been assigned a  
CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet Private Line Card.  
Refer to the descriptions of each feature in the CoreBuilder 5000 Ethernet Private  
Line Card User Guide for more information.  
Format  
slot.port  
show security_advanced port  
all  
slot.port  
The slot and port number of the port for which you want to view port  
configuration.  
Example The following command shows security configuration for all ports in a hub (only  
the output for ports 1, 2, 3, and 4 are shown):  
CB5000> show security_advanced port all  
Security Port Table Display for Module 1 6124M-TPL6:  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------  
---  
Port  
Autolearn FailSafe Group_A Group_B Intruder_Check Jamming  
----- --------- -------- ------- ---------------------- --------  
08.01 ENABLED  
08.02 ENABLED  
08.03 ENABLED  
08.04 ENABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
0
0
0
0
0 ENABLED  
0 ENABLED  
0 ENABLED  
0 ENABLED  
DISABLED  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
.
.
>
Related Command SET SECURITY_ADVANCED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-390 SHOW SECURITY ETHERNET_MAP  
SHOW SECURITY  
ETHERNET_MAP  
Use the SHOW SECURITY ETHERNET_MAP command to view all MAC addresses  
on every port within the specified network.  
Format  
show security ethernet_map  
mac_address  
mac address  
network  
slot.port  
network  
port  
mac address  
network  
The MAC address for the specified port.  
Displays the security settings for the network you specify. For example,  
if you enter ethernet_1, the system displays the configuration for  
ethernet_1.  
The options are:  
ethernet_1 through ethernet_8  
■
isolated_1 through isolated_8  
■
all (to display information for all secure networks)  
■
slot.port  
Displays the slot and port number of the port whose security map you  
want to view.  
Example The following command shows security ethernet map for port 1 on slot 10:  
CB5000> show security ethernet_map port 10.1  
Network map for Network Ethernet_1:  
-------------------------------------------------------------  
MAC ADDRESS  
SLOT  
PORT  
--------------  
-------- -------  
02-00-00-00-80-00  
02-00-00-00-80-e0  
02-00-00-00-80-60  
10  
10  
10  
1
1
1
>
Related Command SET SECURITY_PORT MODE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW SONET STATISTICS 2-391  
SHOW SONET  
STATISTICS  
Use the SHOW SONET STATISTICS command to display Synchronous Optical  
Network (SONET) interval information for a PHY port.  
A PHY is a physical port.  
SONET error statistics are collected for 15-minute intervals over a period of  
24 hours.  
Format  
show sonet  
slot.phy  
statistics  
current  
interval  
number  
all  
slot.phy  
Identifies the slot and port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and phy (1 or 2) is the PHY port  
number. For example, to identify PHY port 1 on the module in slot 4,  
enter 4.1  
current  
interval  
number  
all  
Specifies the current interval.  
Specifies an interval other than the current interval.  
Specifies the interval number.  
Specifies all intervals.  
Example 1 The following command displays the SONET information for the current interval in  
slot 4, PHY port 1:  
CB5000> show sonet 4.1 statistics current  
Slot Module  
---- ------------------- -------------------------------  
04 6602M-MOD v1.00 N/A  
Version Network  
General Info  
SONET Statistics for 04.1 in interval: Current  
--------------------------------------------------  
Sect Errored Seconds:  
0
0
0
0
Sect Severely Errored Seconds:  
Sect Severely Errored Frame Seconds:  
Sect Coding Violations:  
Line Errored Seconds:  
0
0
0
0
Line Severely Errored Seconds:  
Line Unavailable Seconds:  
Line Coding Violations:  
Path Errored Seconds:  
0
0
0
0
Path Severely Errored Seconds:  
Path Unavailable Seconds:  
Path Coding Violations:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-392 SHOW SONET STATISTICS  
Example 2 The following command displays the SONET information for interval 2 in slot 4,  
PHY port 1:  
CB5000> show sonet 4.1 statistics interval 2  
Slot Module  
---- ---------- ------- ----------- ------------------  
04 6602M-MOD v1.00 N/A  
Version Network  
General Info  
SONET Statistics for 04.1 in interval: 2  
-------------------------------------------------------------  
Sect Errored Seconds:  
0
0
0
0
Sect Severely Errored Seconds:  
Sect Severely Errored Frame Seconds:  
Sect Coding Violations:  
Line Errored Seconds:  
0
0
0
0
Line Severely Errored Seconds:  
Line Unavailable Seconds:  
Line Coding Violations:  
Path Errored Seconds:  
0
0
0
0
Path Severely Errored Seconds:  
Path Unavailable Seconds:  
Path Coding Violations:  
Refer to the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms and  
additional information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW SONET STATISTICS 2-393  
Example 3 The following command displays the SONET information for all intervals in slot 4,  
PHY port 1. This example shows a sample of five intervals. See the notes following  
the sample screen for more information.  
CB5000> show sonet 4.1 statistics interval all  
Slot Module  
---- ------------------- -------------------------------  
04 6602M-MOD v1.00 N/A  
Version Network  
General Info  
SONET Statistics for 04.1 in interval: All  
------------------------------------------------  
SECTION  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Int hh:mm ES SES SFS CV ES SES UAS CV ES SES UAS CV  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
LINE  
PATH  
1 -00:10  
2 -00:30  
3 -00:45  
4 -01:00  
5 -01:15  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0  
0 0 0  
0 0 0  
0 0 0  
0 0 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0  
0 0 0  
0 0 0  
0 0 0  
0 0 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The interval table displays a history of SONET error statistics accumulated over a  
maximum of ninety-six 15-minute intervals (24 hours), with lower-numbered  
intervals showing the most recently accumulated statistics. The number of  
intervals actually displayed depends on the amount of time elapsed from the last  
module reset.  
From module reset, time is measured as a succession of 15-minute intervals. When  
each 15-minute interval expires, the statistics for each existing interval are placed  
in the next higher-numbered interval. A new interval is added to receive the  
statistics from the then highest-numbered interval, and the statistics for the  
just-completed 15-minute interval are placed in Interval 1.  
After 96 intervals have accumulated, the statistics in the 96th interval disappear  
from the display when the next 15-minute interval expires.  
Field  
Int  
Definition  
Interval number. Each interval represents a 15-minute time period.  
hh:mm  
Hours/minutes of elapsed time relative to current 15-minute interval.  
For example, the statistics in Interval 4 were accumulated during the  
15-minute interval that elapsed one hour ago.  
ES  
Errored Seconds.  
SES  
SFS  
UAS  
CV  
Severely Errored Seconds.  
Severely Errored Framing Seconds.  
Unavailable Seconds.  
Coding Violations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-394 SHOW SONET STATUS  
SHOW SONET STATUS  
Use the SHOW SONET STATUS command to display Synchronous Optical Network  
(SONET) status information for a PHY port.  
A PHY is a physical port.  
Format  
slot.phy  
status  
show sonet  
slot.phy  
Identifies the slot and port for this operation.  
slot (1 through 17) is the slot number and phy (1 or 2) is the PHY port  
number. For example, to identify PHY port 1 on the module in slot 4,  
enter 4.1  
Example The following command displays the SONET status information for slot 4:  
CB5000> show sonet 4.1 status  
Slot Module  
---- ---------- ------- ----------- 3 ------------------  
04 6602M-MOD v1.00 N/A  
Version Network  
General Info  
Medium Type  
SONET  
500  
50  
Medium Time Elapsed (sec):  
Medium Valid Intervals:  
Medium Line Coding:  
NRZ  
Medium Line Type:  
Medium Clock Source:  
SHORT  
EXTERNAL  
Section Current Status:  
Line Current Status:  
Path Current Status:  
Path Current Width:  
M/S/L Speed (bps):  
M/S/L Admin Status:  
M/S/L Oper Status:  
M/S/L Last Change:  
OKAY  
OKAY  
OKAY  
STS  
155  
ENABLED  
UP  
<timestamp>  
Path Speed (bps):  
Path Admin Status:  
Path Oper Status:  
Path Last Change:  
155  
ENABLED  
UP  
<timestamp>  
See the ATM Backbone SwitchModule User Guide for definition of terms and  
additional information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW TERMINAL 2-395  
SHOW TERMINAL  
Use the SHOW TERMINAL command to display the terminal parameter values for  
either the Console or Auxiliary port.  
Format  
show terminal  
Example The following command displays terminal settings for the Console and Auxiliary  
ports:  
CB5000> show terminal  
Terminal Session Parameters:  
Prompt  
CB5000>  
Timeout time:0  
Console Port Parameters:  
Baud:  
9600  
Data bits:  
Parity:  
Stop bits:  
Hangup:  
Mode:  
8
NONE  
2
DISABLED  
COMMAND LINE  
VT100  
Terminal:  
Auxiliary Port Parameters:  
Baud:  
9600  
Data bits:  
Parity:  
Stop bits:  
Hangup:  
Mode:  
8
NONE  
2
DISABLED  
COMMAND LINE  
VT100  
Terminal:  
Related Command SET TERMINAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-396 SHOW TFTP  
SHOW TFTP  
Use the SHOW TFTP command to display TFTP parameter values.  
Format  
show tftp  
Example The following command displays TFTP values:  
CB5000> show tftp  
--- TFTP Variables: ---  
TFTP Server IP Address: 127.0.0.1  
TFTP File Name:  
TFTP Result:  
image  
OKAY  
TFTP Result  
Definition  
CLEAR  
User cleared the previous value in this field (CLEAR TFTP  
command).  
TRANSFER IN PROGRESS  
OKAY  
TFTP file transfer is in progress.  
TFTP file transfer completed successfully.  
Undefined TFTP error.  
UNDEFINED TFTP ERROR  
FILE NOT FOUND  
ACCESS ERROR  
DISK FULL  
The TFTP server could not find the file.  
The TFTP server could not access the file.  
Upload error only.  
NO RESPONSE FROM SERVER The TFTP server did not respond to the request.  
INVALID DOWNLOAD KEY  
FEPROM ERASE ERROR  
FEPROM PROGRAM ERROR  
TFTP TRANSFER ERROR  
The download key entered as part of a licensed software  
upgrade is invalid.  
The hub receiving the download reported an error. Retry the  
download. If the error recurs, the hub requires servicing.  
The hub receiving the download reported an error. Retry the  
download. If the error recurs, the hub requires servicing.  
An error occurred during the transfer. Retry the download.  
DOWNLOAD DECODE ERROR The file on the server may be corrupt.  
DOWNLOAD FAILED  
CRC ERROR  
The download failed. Retry the download.  
The download failed. Retry the download.  
An incorrect file was specified.  
FILE TOO LARGE FOR  
MEMORY  
GATEWAY UNREACHABLE  
The hub received was unable to communicate with the default  
gateway.  
Make sure the default gateway IP address is set correctly (SHOW  
DEVICE command). Make sure the default gateway is operating  
correctly.  
MODULE TYPE INCORRECT  
FILE TYPE INCORRECT  
You specified an incorrect module type for the file you are trying  
to download.  
You specified an incorrect file.  
TIMEOUT WAITING FOR PKT An error occurred on the network. Retry the download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW TFTP 2-397  
Related Commands SET TFTP FILE_NAME  
SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-398 SHOW TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATION  
SHOW  
TR_SURROGATE  
CRS_STATION  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATION command to show CRS station  
configuration values.  
Format  
show tr_surrogate  
slot.2  
crs_station  
slot.2  
The slot ID for the module that you is selected for the operation. The slot  
number can be from 1 through 17. The subslot is always 2.  
Example The following command shows CRS station information for the TR-NMC in  
slot 11.2:  
CB5000> show tr_surrogate 11.2 crs_station  
Configuration Report Server Ring Station Data for MAC address  
08-00-8e-d0-00-c9  
of Network TOKEN_RING_1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Station Status: Active  
Mfg. Adapter Address:08-00-8e-d0-00-c9  
NAUN Address: 10-00-04-38-2b-52  
Functional Address:00-00-00-18  
Group Address: ff-ff-ff-ff  
Microcode Level:000001c1e3f1f4c2f340  
Microcode Status:100000900000  
Product Id:  
202020202020202020202020202020202020  
Function Class Mask:7b7f  
Max. Token Priority:0003  
Physical Location:00000000  
Field  
Definition  
Station Status  
Active — Station inserted in the ring and capable of responding to  
CRS requests.  
Inactive — Station incapable of responding to CRS requests or  
participating in beacon functions.  
Mfg. Adapter Address Burned-in adapter address assigned by the adapter manufacturer.  
NAUN Address  
Functional Address  
Group Address  
Address of the station’s Nearest Active Upstream Neighbor (NAUN) in  
the ring. All zeros indicates that the ring station is inactive.  
Functional address information for this ring station. This information is  
used to identify ring station functions.  
Group Address used in the Report Ring Station Address and the  
Report Ring Station Attachments MAC frame.  
Microcode Level  
Microcode Status  
Product Id  
Microcode level of the station.  
Current state of the sending station’s microcode.  
Unique identifier that indicates which hardware product the ring  
station is.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATION 2-399  
Field  
Definition  
Function Class Mask  
Max. Token Priority  
Physical Location  
Identifier for the functional classes that the station is able to transmit.  
Maximum token priority this station is allowed to set.  
Physical location of the ring station.  
Related Command SET TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-400 SHOW TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATUS  
SHOW  
TR_SURROGATE  
CRS_STATUS  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATUS command to show CRS surrogate  
status information.  
Format  
show tr_surrogate  
crs_status  
slot.2  
slot.2  
The slot ID for the module that you selected for the operation. The slot  
number can be from 1 through 17. The subslot is always 2.  
Example The following command shows the CRS status of the TR-NMC in slot 11.2:  
CB5000> show tr_surrogate 11.2 crs_status  
Configuration Report Server Status Data for Network TOKEN_RING_1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
CRS Traps:  
ENABLED  
NAUN Changes: 0  
Active Monitor Changes:0  
Tx Forward Strip Status:0000  
Field  
Definition  
CRS Traps  
Indicates if the CRS function has been configured to report Ring  
Topology Change traps. Use the SET TR_SURROGATE CRS_STATUS  
CRS_TRAPS command to change this setting.  
NAUN Changes  
Displays a count of the total number of NAUN changes on the ring  
segment since CRS was activated.  
Active Monitor  
Changes  
Displays a count of the total number of Active Monitor changes on the  
ring segment since CRS was activated.  
Tx Forward Strip  
Status  
Displays the strip status of the Transmit-Forward Frame.  
Related Command SET TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_ERROR_MAC_ FRAME 2-401  
SHOW  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_ERROR_MAC_FRAME command to show  
the contents of the REM error MAC frame. The REM Error MAC Frame Table  
displays information used to build a trap that describes the Neighbor Notification  
and Active Monitor Error portions of the Forward MAC Frame Error trap. The  
agent builds this trap and forwards it to the Network Management System. Use  
the SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_ERROR_MAC_FRAME command to show  
information about the most-recently received Error MAC Frame.  
TR_SURROGATE  
REM_ERROR_MAC_  
FRAME  
Format  
show tr_surrogate  
rem_error_mac_frame  
slot.2  
slot.2  
The slot ID for the module that you selected for the operation. The slot  
number can be from 1 through 17. The subslot is always 2.  
Example The following command shows the REM error MAC frame for the TR-NMC in  
slot 11.2:  
CB5000> show tr_surrogate 11.2 rem_error_mac_frame  
Ring Error Monitor Error MAC Frame Trap Data for Network TOKEN_RING_1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Station Address 00-00-00-00-00-00  
Station NAUN Address00-00-00-00-00-00  
Station Physical Location00000000  
Last Neighbor Notification Address00-00-00-00-00-00  
Monitor Error Code0000  
Related Command SET TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-402 SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_ISOLATING  
SHOW  
TR_SURROGATE  
REM_ISOLATING  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_ISOLATING command to show REM Isolating  
Table information. The REM Isolating Table lists information in the isolating table  
for the downstream station of a fault domain.  
Format  
all  
show tr_surrogate  
rem_isolating  
slot.2  
index  
slot.2  
The slot ID for the module that you selected for the operation. The slot  
number can be from 1 through 17. The subslot is always 2.  
all  
Shows all REM isolating information.  
index  
Shows the indicated entry from the REM Isolating Table.  
Example The following command shows the REM isolating table for the TR-NMC in slot 3.2:  
CB5000> show tr_surrogate 3.2 rem_isolating 1  
Ring Error Monitor Isolating Error Data for Entry 1, Network  
TOKEN_RING_3  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Station Address 10-00-5a-b1-6b-3c  
Impending Soft Error Threshold Exceeded FALSE  
Excessive Soft Error Threshold Exceeded FALSE  
Station Error Weight 3  
Station NAUN Address 00-01-68-50-06-2e  
Station Physical Location 00000000  
Field  
Description  
Station Address  
Lists the MAC address of the station associated with the  
accumulated error weight.  
Impending/Excessive Soft  
Error Threshold Exceeded  
Indicates whether the station with the isolating MAC address is  
in a weight-exceeded (excessive) or pre-weight exceeded  
(impending) condition.  
Station Error Weight  
Station NAUN Address  
Station Physical Location  
Lists the calculated error weight of this station in the Isolating  
Table. The default is zero.  
Lists the address of the Nearest Active Upstream Neighbor of  
the station.  
Gives the physical location of the receiving ring station of the  
fault domain.  
Related Command SET TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_LAST_BEACON 2-403  
SHOW  
TR_SURROGATE  
REM_LAST_BEACON  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_LAST_BEACON command to show  
information on the REM last received beacon. The REM Beacon Data Trap Table  
displays information used to build a trap that describes the beacon type, physical  
location, and fault domain of a beaconing station. Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE  
REM_LAST_BEACON command to show information about the most-recently  
detected beacon condition on the ring.  
Format  
show tr_surrogate  
rem_last_beacon  
slot.2  
slot.2  
The slot ID for the module that you selected for the operation. The slot  
number can be from 1 through 17. The subslot is always 2.  
Example The following command shows the REM last beacon received by the TR-NMC in  
slot 11.2:  
CB5000> show tr_surrogate 11.2 rem_last_beacon  
Ring Error Monitor Last Received Beacon Data for Network  
TOKEN_RING_1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Beacon Type  
Station Address  
Station NAUN Address  
Station Physical Location  
Beacon Recovery Status  
Signal Loss  
00-ff-00-00-00-00  
00-00-ff-00-00  
00012345  
None Left  
Field  
Description  
Beacon Type  
Indicates the type of beacon that occurred on the ring.  
The options are:  
Recovery Mode Set  
■
Signal Loss  
■
Token Not Claimed  
■
Token Claimed  
■
Invalid — Is displayed when there has not been a beacon recorded  
■
Station Address If the ring is beaconing currently, this field displays the address of the station  
transmitting beacon frames.  
Station NAUN  
Address  
Displays the Nearest Active Upstream Neighbor of the station transmitting  
beacon frames. This station is also referred to as the upstream station in the  
beacon fault domain.  
Station Physical Displays the physical location of the beaconing station.  
Location  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-404 SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_LAST_BEACON  
Field  
Description  
Beacon  
Indicates which stations in the beacon domain have been removed from the  
Recovery Status ring as part of the beacon recovery process.  
The options are:  
None Left — No stations have been removed.  
■
Beaconing Station Left — Only the station transmitting beacon frames  
■
has left the ring.  
NAUN Station Left — Only the Nearest Active Upstream Neighbor station  
■
has left the ring.  
Both Stations Left — Both the beaconing station and the NAUN have left  
■
the ring.  
Invalid — No beaconing event recorded currently.  
■
Related Command SET TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_LAST_SOFT_ ERROR 2-405  
SHOW  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_LAST_SOFT_ERROR command to show the  
contents of the REM Last Received Soft Error Table. The REM Last Received Soft  
Error Table primarily provides information to SNMP network managers. Because  
the information is designed to create a particular trap, it contains only the state of  
the stations at the time the Ring Error Monitor received the Soft Error Report MAC  
frame.  
TR_SURROGATE  
REM_LAST_SOFT_  
ERROR  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_LAST_SOFT_ERROR command to show  
information about the most-recent soft error on the ring.  
Format  
show tr_surrogate  
rem_last_soft_error  
slot.2  
slot.2  
The slot ID for the module that you selected for the operation. The slot  
number can be from 1 through 17. The subslot is always 2.  
Example The following command shows REM Last Soft Error received data for the TR-NMC  
in slot 11.2:  
CB5000> show tr_surrogate 11.2 rem_last_soft_error  
Ring Error Monitor Last Received Soft Error Data for Network  
TOKEN_RING_1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Line Errors:  
Internal Errors:  
Burst Errors:  
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
AC Errors:  
Abort Delimiters:  
Lost Frame Errors:  
Receiver Congestion Errors:  
Frame Copied Errors:  
Frequency Errors:  
Token Errors:  
Field  
Description  
Line Errors  
Indicates the number of line errors reported in the last Soft Error Report  
MAC Frame.  
Internal Errors  
Burst Errors  
Indicates the number of internal errors reported in the last Soft Error  
Report MAC Frame. The counter is incremented when the ring station  
recognizes a recoverable internal error.  
Indicates the number of burst errors reported in the last Soft Error Report  
MAC Frame. The counter is incremented when the ring station detects  
the absence of transitions for 5 half-bit times.  
AC Errors  
Indicates the number of AC errors reported in the last Soft Error Report  
MAC Frame. The counter is incremented when the ring station receives an  
AMP or SMP with the AC = b ’00’ without first receiving an AMP frame.  
Abort Delimiters  
Indicates the number of ’abort delimiter transmitted’ errors reported in  
the last Soft Error Report MAC Frame. The counter is incremented when  
the ring station transmits an abort delimiter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-406 SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_LAST_SOFT_ ERROR  
Field  
Description  
Lost Frame Errors  
Indicates the number of lost frame errors reported in the last Soft Error  
Report MAC Frame.  
Receiver  
Congestion Errors  
Indicates the number of receiver congestion errors reported in the last  
Soft Error Report MAC Frame. Receiver congestion errors indicate that  
incoming frames are arriving faster than the receiver can accommodate  
them.  
Frame Copied  
Errors  
Indicates the number of frame copied errors reported in the last Soft Error  
Report MAC Frame.  
Frequency Errors  
Indicates the number of frequency errors reported in the last Soft Error  
Report MAC Frame.  
Token Errors  
Indicates the number of token errors reported in the last Soft Error Report  
MAC Frame.  
Related Command SET TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_SOFT_ERROR 2-407  
SHOW  
TR_SURROGATE  
REM_SOFT_ERROR  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_SOFT_ERROR command to show a count of  
REM non-isolating soft error data. The REM Soft Error Statistics table provides a  
cumulative count of non-isolating soft error counters.  
Format  
show tr_surrogate  
rem_soft_error  
slot.2  
slot.2  
The slot ID for the module that you selected for the operation. The  
number can be from 1 through 17. The subslot is always 2.  
Example The following command shows REM soft error data for the TR-NMC in slot 11.2:  
CB5000> show tr_surrogate 11.2 rem_soft_error  
Ring Error Monitor Total Soft Error Data for Network TOKEN_RING_1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Lost Frame Errors:  
Receiver Congestion Errors:  
Frame Copied Errors:  
Token Errors:  
Table Full Conditions:  
Minimum Decrement Exceeded Conditions:  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Receiver Congestion Table-Full Conditions: 0  
Field  
Description  
Lost Frame Errors  
Receiver Congestion Errors  
Total lost frames reported to the REM.  
Total receive congestion errors reported to the REM. Receive  
congestion errors may indicate that the TR-NMC is being  
overloaded by incoming traffic.  
Frame Copied Errors  
Frequency Errors  
Token Errors  
Total frame copied errors reported to the REM.  
Total frequency errors reported to the REM.  
Total token errors reported to the REM.  
Table Full Conditions  
Total table full conditions reported by the REM.  
Minimum Decrement Exceeded Total number of times that the REM attempted to set its  
Conditions decrement value below the minimum value allowed.  
Receiver Congestion Table-Full Total number of receiver congestion table full conditions  
Conditions  
reported by the REM.  
Related Command SET TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-408 SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_STATUS  
SHOW  
TR_SURROGATE  
REM_STATUS  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_STATUS command to show which REM  
groups are enabled.  
Format  
show tr_surrogate  
rem_status  
slot.2  
slot.2  
The slot ID for the module that you selected for the operation. The slot  
number can be from 1 through 17. The subslot is always 2.  
Example The following command displays the current REM Status Table:  
CB5000> show tr_surrogate 11.2 rem_status  
Ring Error Monitor Status Data for Network TOKEN_RING_1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
REM Traps:  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
Normal  
Weight Exceeded Traps:  
PreWeight Exceeded Traps:  
Receiver Congestion Traps:  
NonIso Threshold Exceeded Traps:  
Forward Frames Traps:  
Ring Line Error Data:  
Ring Internal Error Data:  
Ring Burst Error Data:  
Ring AC Error Data:  
Ring Abort Xmitted Error Data:  
Ring Lost Frames Error Data:  
Ring Receiver Congestion Data:  
Ring Frame Copied Data:  
Ring Frequency Error Data:  
Ring Token Error Data:  
Auto Line Error Data:  
Auto Internal Error Data:  
Auto Burst Error Data:  
Auto AC Error Data:  
Auto Abort Xmitted Error Data:  
Auto Lost Frames Error Data:  
Auto Receiver Congestion Data:  
Auto Frame Copied Data:  
Auto Frequency Error Data:  
Auto Token Error Data:  
Ring State:  
Reset:  
Reset Complete  
Related Command SET TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_THRESHOLD_ EXCD 2-409  
SHOW  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE REM_THRESHOLD_EXCD command to show  
information about the most-recently detected threshold exceeded condition. The  
REM Non-Isolating Threshold Exceeded Table displays information used to build a  
trap that describes the soft error counter that has been exceeded.  
TR_SURROGATE  
REM_THRESHOLD_  
EXCD  
Format  
show tr_surrogate  
rem_threshold_excd  
slot.2  
slot.2  
The slot ID for the module that you selected for the operation. The slot  
number can be from 1 through 17. The subslot is always 2.  
Example The following command displays information about the most-recently detected  
threshold exceeded condition for the TR-NMC in slot 11.2:  
CB5000> show tr_surrogate 11.2 rem_threshold_excd  
Ring Error Monitor Non-Isolating Threshold Exceeded Data for Network  
TOKEN_RING_1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Lost Frame Errors:  
Receiver Congestion Errors:  
Frame Copied Errors:  
Frequency Errors:  
Token Errors:  
Table Full Conditions:  
Minimum Decrement Exceeded Errors:  
Receiver Congestion Table-Full Conditions:  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Related Command SET TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-410 SHOW TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS  
SHOW  
TR_SURROGATE  
SURR_STATUS  
Use the SHOW TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS command to assess the current  
state of a TR-NMC’s REM and CRS servers.  
Format  
show tr_surrogate  
surr_status  
slot.2  
slot.2  
The slot ID for the module that you selected for the operation. The slot number  
can be from 1 through 17. The subslot is always 2.  
Example The following command displays the surrogate status for the TR-NMC in slot 6.2:  
CB5000> show tr_surrogate 6.2 surr_status  
Surrogate Status Data for Network TOKEN_RING_1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Surrogate Admin Status:  
Port Mac Address:  
Ring Segment:  
DISABLED  
00-00-00-00-00-00  
0000  
Ring Utilization:  
REM Admin Status:  
REM Oper Status:  
CRS Admin Status:  
CRS Oper Status:  
0.0%  
DISABLED  
Idle  
DISABLED  
Idle  
Field  
Description  
Surrogate Admin  
Status  
Indicates whether or not the Token Ring Surrogate features (REM and  
CRS) are enabled or disabled.  
Port Mac Address  
Identifies the port MAC address of the server functions. This address,  
together with the Ring Segment number, identifies the surrogate  
location.  
Ring Segment  
Identifies the ring segment for which the server in the Port MAC address  
maintains management information. You can set this value using the SET  
TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS command.  
Ring Utilization  
Gives the calculated percentage use of the ring the server resides on.  
REM Admin Status  
Indicates if the REM function is enabled for the Token Ring interface  
associated with the port MAC address. You can change this setting using  
the SET TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS SURR_ADMIN or the SET  
TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS REM_ADMIN command.  
REM Oper Status  
Indicates the current operational state of the REM for this interface.  
The options are:  
Active — REM function operating.  
■
Idle — REM function not operating currently. This means that either  
■
the surr_admin or the rem_admin status is set to disable.  
Initializing — REM function being activated.  
■
Initialization failed — REM function could not start.  
■
Unavailable — REM function not implemented on this device.  
■
Terminating — REM function currently being halted.  
■
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS 2-411  
Field  
Description  
CRS Admin Status  
Indicates if the CRS function is enabled for the Token Ring interface  
associated with the port MAC address. You can change this setting using  
the SET TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS SURR_ADMIN or the SET  
TR_SURROGATE SURR_STATUS CRS_ADMIN command.  
CRS Oper Status  
Indicates the current operational state of the CRS for this interface.  
The options are:  
Active — CRS function operating.  
■
Idle — CRS function not operating currently. This means that either  
■
the surr_admin or the crs_admin status is set to disable.  
Initializing — CRS function being activated.  
■
Initialization failed — CRS function could not start.  
■
Unavailable — CRS function not implemented on this device.  
■
Terminating — CRS function currently being halted.  
■
Related Command SET TR_SURROGATE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-412 SHOW TRUNK  
SHOW TRUNK  
Use the SHOW TRUNK command to display the status of Ring-In/Ring-Out  
connections.  
Format  
show trunk  
no_verbose  
verbose  
slot.1  
trunk  
all  
slot.1  
Selects the hub slot (1 through 17) for this operation.  
trunk  
Selects the trunk for this operation. The trunk port setting is required only  
on fiber repeater modules.  
ring_in.port  
ring_out.port  
backplane_in  
backplane_out  
no_verbose  
verbose  
Displays summary information. no_verbose is the default selection.  
Displays extended trunk information.  
Example The following command displays trunk information on the module in slot 3:  
CB5000> show trunk 3.1 ring_in verbose  
Trunk Display for Module 5208M-TP:  
Slot Trunk  
-----------------------------------------------------------------  
03 RING_IN ENABLED NO SQUELCH COPPER Trunk is down  
Mode  
Status  
Type General Information  
Trunk Connector:RJ45S  
Trunk Mode Dip Setting:ENABLED  
Cable Monitor: DISABLED  
Cable Monitor Dip Setting:ENABLED  
Network Map State:INTERNAL  
Status  
Definition  
OKAY  
Trunk is operating properly.  
NO PHANTOM  
NO SQUELCH  
Port is not connected to an operating trunk port.  
The trunk does not detect a signal from a remote Ring-In/Ring-Out  
device.  
BEACON WRAPPED  
Trunk is wrapped because the device connected to the trunk caused  
a beaconing condition. While the trunk is wrapped, the trunk  
software checks the trunk every 30 seconds and unwraps when the  
remote device is ready.  
Related Command SET TRUNK RING_IN/RING_OUT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW VBRIDGE AFT 2-413  
SHOW VBRIDGE AFT  
Use the SHOW VBRIDGE AFT command to display user-created filters and learned  
entries in the address table.  
Format  
show vbridge  
all  
mac address  
aft  
mac  
vbridge  
pause  
learn  
mgmt  
self  
nopause  
slot.port  
slot.all  
all  
bridge_port  
all  
pause  
learn  
mgmt  
self  
nopause  
rate_limited  
status  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 256) about which you want to display  
information. You must enter the number of a defined virtual bridge.  
mac  
Displays address table entries relating to a MAC address or set of  
MAC addresses.  
mac address  
bridge_port  
The MAC address entry about which you want to display  
information: Enter the MAC address in hexadecimal format.  
Displays address table entries relating to a bridge port or set of  
bridge ports.  
slot.port  
■
slot is 1 through 17. port is 1 through 24. The command displays all  
entries in the virtual bridge address table associated with this bridge  
port.  
slot.all  
■
slot is 1 through 17. The command displays all entries in the virtual  
bridge address table associated with all bridge ports on this  
SwitchModule.  
rate_limited  
status  
Displays address table entries that have rate limiting enabled.  
Displays the number of learned entries, user-created (mgmt) entries,  
and entries pertaining to the SwitchModule.  
all  
Displays address table entries for all MAC addresses in the virtual  
bridge.  
learn  
mgmt  
self  
Displays address table entries the SwitchModule has learned.  
Displays user-configured address table entries.  
Displays entries pertaining to the SwitchModule.  
pause  
Displays information in sections, pausing until you press the  
spacebar to continue the display.  
nopause  
Displays information all at once, without pausing for you to press  
the spacebar. Use this option when dumping information to a log  
file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-414 SHOW VBRIDGE AFT  
Example 1 The following commands display status information for the virtual bridge 1  
address table:  
CB5000> show vbridge 1 aft status  
Address Forwarding Status of VBridge 1  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Current  
Peak  
TimeStamp  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Learned Entries:  
Mgmt Entries:  
Self Entries:  
8
1981  
7
14  
1981  
7
05:33 13 Oct 99  
09:37 13 Oct 99  
09:37 13 Oct 99  
Example 2 The following command displays information about MAC address entries in the  
virtual bridge 1 address table:  
CB5000> show vbridge 1 aft mac all  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Entry VBridge MAC_Address  
Port Type Persist Source_Check  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
1
2
3
1
1
1
08-00-8f-11-19-a0 CPU  
08-00-8f-11-19-ac CPU  
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff CPU  
SELF NOAGE  
SELF NOAGE  
SELF NOAGE  
DISABLE  
DISABLE  
DISABLE  
Example 3 The following command displays entries in the address table that consist of a MAC  
address associated with any bridge port in slot 13:  
CB5000> show vbridge 1 aft bridge_port 13.all  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
Entry VBridge MAC_Address  
Port Type Persist Source_Check  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00-00-86-20-a8-1b 13.1 LEARN AGE  
00-50-04-95-32-ac 13.1 LEARN AGE  
00-80-3e-7c-41-f2 13.1 LEARN AGE  
00-c0-4f-39-67-dd 13.1 LEARN AGE  
08-00-20-21-b9-95 13.1 LEARN AGE  
08-00-20-8a-0a-4e 13.1 LEARN AGE  
08-00-8f-30-04-6f 13.1 LEARN AGE  
10-00-5a-fa-52-76 13.1 LEARN AGE  
DISABLE  
DISABLE  
DISABLE  
DISABLE  
DISABLE  
DISABLE  
DISABLE  
DISABLE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOW VBRIDGE CONFIGURATION 2-415  
SHOW VBRIDGE  
CONFIGURATION  
Use the SHOW VBRIDGE CONFIGURATION command to display information about  
virtual bridges on CoreBuilder 5000 SwitchModules.  
Format  
show vbridge  
configuration  
no_verbose  
verbose  
vbridge  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 256) about which you want to display  
information. You must enter the number of a defined virtual bridge.  
no_verbose  
Displays:  
Virtual bridge number  
■
Virtual bridge identifier  
■
Number of ports assigned to the virtual bridge  
■
Spanning Tree state  
■
General information (such as name)  
■
If you do not enter the VERBOSE option, NO_VERBOSE is the default.  
verbose  
Displays the information shown by the NO_VERBOSE option, plus  
Spanning Tree parameters for the virtual bridge.  
Example The following command displays configuration information about virtual  
bridge 25:  
CB5000> show vbridge 25 configuration verbose  
VBridge Bridge Identifier  
------- ----------------------------  
Ports  
Spanning Tree General Information  
------------- ----------------  
25 80-00-08-00-8f-11-1a-5a2 DISABLED vbridge_25  
Interface Number:  
Interface Mode:  
NONE  
N/A  
Aging Time:  
300  
Learned Entry Discards:  
Spanning Tree Priority:  
Spanning Tree Bridge Max Age:  
0
32768  
20.00  
Spanning Tree Bridge Forward Delay: 15.00  
Spanning Tree Bridge Hello Time:  
Spanning Tree Hold Time:  
Spanning Tree Max Age:  
Spanning Tree Hello Time:  
Spanning Tree Forward Delay:  
Designated Root:  
2.00  
1.00  
20.00  
2.00  
15.00  
80-00-08-00-8f-11-1a-5a  
Root Cost:  
0
Root Port:  
0
Topology Changes:  
0
Time Since Topology Changed:  
667395.26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-416 SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING BRIDGE_PORT  
SHOW VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
BRIDGE_PORT  
Use the SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING BRIDGE_PORT command to display all  
the IP addresses that are in the IGMP cache and are associated with the specified  
bridgeport.  
Format  
slot.port  
show vbridge  
bridge_port  
igmp_snooping  
vbridge  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 240) about which you want to display  
information. You must enter the number of a defined virtual bridge.  
slot.port  
Identifies the slot and port for this operation.  
Example The following command displays all the IP addresses that are in the IGMP  
Snooping cache for Vbridge 25 located in slot 8:  
CB5000> show vbridge 25 igmp_snooping bridge_port 8.1  
Entry VBridge IP_Address  
MAC_Address  
Port  
------ -------- -------------- ----------------- ------  
1
2
1
1
224.0.0.35  
224.0.0.139  
01-00-5e-00-00-23 8.1  
01-00-5e-00-00-8b 8.1  
Related Commands SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP BRIDGE_PORT  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP 2-417  
SHOW VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING IP  
Use the SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP command to display all the ports  
associated with the specified IP address.  
Format  
ip  
xx.xx.xx.xx  
show vbridge  
igmp_snooping  
vbridge  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 240) about which you want to display  
information. You must enter the number of a defined virtual bridge.  
xx.xx.xx.xx  
The specific IP address for which you want to display all the associated  
ports.  
Example The following command displays IGMP Snooping port information about virtual  
bridge 25 at IP address 111.12.13.14:  
CB5000> show vbridge 25 igmp_snooping ip 111.12.13.14  
Entry  
Vbridge IP_Address  
MAC_Address  
Port  
-----  
2.1  
------- -------- ------------- -----------------  
1
2
1
2
111.12.13.14 01-00-5e-00-00-23  
111.12.13.14 01-00-5e-00-00-23  
2.2  
Related Commands SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP ALL  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP BRIDGE_PORT  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC ALL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-418 SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP ALL  
SHOW VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING IP  
ALL  
Use the SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP ALL command to display all IP  
addresses and MAC addresses, and their associated ports in the IGMP Snooping  
cache.  
Format  
ip  
all  
show vbridge  
igmp_snooping  
vbridge  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 240) about which you want to display  
information. You must enter the number of a defined virtual bridge.  
Example The following command displays IGMP Snooping information about virtual  
bridge 25:  
CB5000> show vbridge 25 igmp_snooping ip all  
Entry Vbridge  
IP_Address  
MAC_Address  
Port  
------- --------- -------------- ------------------- ----  
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
224.0.0.35  
01-00-5e-00-00-23 2.3  
3.5  
5.7  
2.1  
5.2  
224.0.0.139  
Related Commands SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP BRIDGE_PORT  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC ALL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP BRIDGE_PORT 2-419  
SHOW VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING IP  
BRIDGE_PORT  
Use the SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP BRIDGE_PORT command to display  
all the ports associated with the specified IP address.  
Format  
show vbridge  
ip  
xx.xx.xx.xx  
igmp_snooping  
bridge_port  
vbridge  
slot.port  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 240) about which you want to display  
information. You must enter the number of a defined virtual bridge.  
xx.xx.xx.xx  
slot.port  
The specific IP address for which you want to display all the associated  
IGMP Snooping ports.  
Identifies the specific slot and port for this operation.  
Example The following command displays all the IGMP Snooping ports associated with  
virtual bridge 25 at IP address 111.12.13.14:  
CB5000> show vbridge 25 igmp_snooping ip 111.12.13.14 bridge_port 2.1  
Entry  
Vbridge IP_Address  
MAC_Address  
Port  
-------  
--------- --------------------------------- -----  
1
2
1
2
111.12.13.14 01-00-5e-00-00-23  
111.12.13.14 01-00-5e-00-00-23  
2.1  
2.2  
Related Commands SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP ALL  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC ALL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-420 SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC  
SHOW VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
MAC  
Use the SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC command to display a MAC  
address, its IP address and its associated ports in the IGMP Snooping cache.  
Format  
mac  
xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx  
show vbridge  
igmp_snooping  
vbridge  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 240) about which you want to display  
information. You must enter the number of a defined virtual bridge.  
xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx The specific MAC address for which you want to display associated  
IGMP Snooping ports.  
Example The following command displays all the IGMP Snooping ports for virtual bridge 1  
at MAC address 01.00.5e.00.00.23:  
CB5000> show vbridge 1 igmp_snooping mac 01.00.5e.00.00.23  
Entry Vbridge  
IP_Address  
MAC_Address  
Port  
------- --------- -------------- ------------------- -----  
1
2
1
1
224.0.0.35  
224.0.0.139  
01-00-5e-00-00-23 2.1  
01-00-5e-00-00-23 2.1  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC ALL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC ALL 2-421  
SHOW VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
MAC ALL  
Use the SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC ALL command to display all MAC  
addresses, their IP addresses and their associated ports in the IGMP Snooping  
cache.  
Format  
mac  
all  
show vbridge  
igmp_snooping  
vbridge  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 240) about which you want to display  
information. You must enter the number of a defined virtual bridge.  
Example The following command displays all the IGMP Snooping ports for virtual bridge 1:  
CB5000> show vbridge 1 igmp_snooping mac all  
Entry Vbridge  
IP_Address  
MAC_Address  
Port  
------- --------- -------------- ------------------- -----  
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
224.0.0.35  
224.0.0.139  
01-00-5e-00-00-23 2.1  
3.5  
5.7  
01-00-5e-00-00-8b 2.1  
5.2  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-422 SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORTS  
SHOW VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
ROUTER_PORTS  
Use the SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORTS command to display  
all the ports that are designated as router ports in the IGMP Snooping cache.  
Format  
show vbridge  
igmp_snooping  
router_ports  
vbridge  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 240) about which you want to display  
information. You must enter the number of a defined virtual bridge.  
Example The following command displays all the ports that are designated as router ports  
for virtual bridge 1:  
CB5000> show vbridge 1 igmp_snooping router_ports  
Entry Vbridge Port  
------- --------- ------  
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
2.1  
3.5  
7.5  
7.8  
Related Command SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING BRIDGE_PORT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING STATUS 2-423  
SHOW VBRIDGE  
IGMP_SNOOPING  
STATUS  
Use the SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING STATUS command to display  
information about IGMP Snooping on a specified Vbridge.  
Format  
status  
show vbridge  
igmp_snooping  
vbridge  
vbridge  
The virtual bridge (1 through 240) about which you want to display  
information. You must enter the number of a defined virtual bridge.  
Example The following command displays information about IGMP Snooping on virtual  
bridge 1:  
CB5000> show vbridge 1 igmp_snooping status  
IGMP Snooping  
IGMP Querying  
Port Aging Time  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
300  
Querier IP Address  
Querier State  
Querier Listening Time (seconds)  
Querier Interval (seconds)  
Sent Query Packets  
Group Aging Time (seconds)  
151.104.2.1  
Listening  
30  
125  
200  
300  
Related Commands SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING IP ALL  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING BRIDGE_PORT  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING MAC ALL  
SHOW VBRIDGE IGMP_SNOOPING ROUTER_PORTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-424 TELNET  
TELNET  
Use the TELNET command to log in to any DMM, or any other target device on the  
network that supports TELNET.  
Use the LOGOUT command to terminate a connection to a remote DMM and  
return to the local management hub.  
If you are having trouble establishing a TELNET session, make sure the target  
device is on, or bridged or routed to, the same ring as the management hub. You  
can use the PING command to test if the target device is currently reachable over  
the network.  
You can remotely log in to only one management hub at a time. Before you use  
TELNET to connect to a second target device, log out of the first target device.  
Format  
telnet  
device id  
port  
device id  
port = 23  
port  
IP address or host name of the device with which you are making a TELNET  
connection. Enter the address as a series of four decimal bytes separated by  
periods. For example, 192.122.19.4.  
You can use host names from the host table in place of IP addresses. Refer to the  
descriptions for SHOW HOST and SET HOST.  
Integer identifying the port. The default is 23, which is the TELNET port on most  
target devices.  
Example The following command establishes a TELNET session with a device with  
IP address 127.36.58.7 through the default TELNET port (23):  
CB5000> telnet 127.36.58.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UPLOAD IN_BAND DEVICE CONFIGURATION 2-425  
UPLOAD IN_BAND  
DEVICE  
CONFIGURATION  
Use the UPLOAD IN_BAND DEVICE CONFIGURATION command to save the  
current configuration of a hub to a file. This configuration file can later be  
downloaded.  
Before you use the UPLOAD IN_BAND command:  
■
■
Use the SET TFTP FILE_NAME command to specify the name of the file to save  
the configuration to.  
Use the SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS command to specify the IP address of  
the TFTP server.  
Format  
upload in_band device configuration  
Example The following command saves the configuration in the file HUB1CON, previously  
specified with the SET TFTP FILE_NAME command:  
CB5000> upload in_band device configuration  
This operation will overwrite the file HUB1CON.  
Do you wish to continue? (y/n): y  
Related Commands DOWNLOAD INBAND  
SET TFTP FILE_NAME  
SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-426 UPLOAD IN_BAND DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TECHNICAL SUPPORT  
A
3Com provides easy access to technical support information through a variety of  
services. This appendix describes these services.  
Information contained in this appendix is correct at time of publication. For the  
most recent information, 3Com recommends that you access the 3Com  
Corporation World Wide Web site.  
Online Technical  
Services  
3Com offers worldwide product support 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, through  
the following online systems:  
■
■
■
■
■
World Wide Web site  
3Com Knowledgebase Web Services  
3Com FTP site  
3Com Bulletin Board Service (3Com BBS)  
SM  
3Com Facts Automated Fax Service  
World Wide Web Site To access the latest networking information on the 3Com Corporation World Wide  
Web site enter this URL into your Internet browser:  
http://www.3com.com/  
This service provides access to online support information such as technical  
documentation and software library, as well as support options that range from  
technical education to maintenance and professional services.  
3Com Knowledgebase This interactive tool contains technical product information compiled by 3Com  
Web Services expert technical engineers around the globe. Located on the World Wide Web at  
http://knowledgebase.3com.com, this service gives all 3Com customers and  
partners complementary, round-the-clock access to technical information on most  
3Com products.  
3Com FTP Site Download drivers, patches, software, and MIBs across the Internet from the 3Com  
public FTP site. This service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.  
To connect to the 3Com FTP site, enter the following information into your FTP  
client:  
■
■
■
Hostname: ftp.3com.com  
Username: anonymous  
Password: <your Internet e-mail address>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A-2  
APPENDIX A: TECHNICAL SUPPORT  
You do not need a user name and password with Web browser software such as  
Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer.  
3Com Bulletin Board The 3Com BBS contains patches, software, and drivers for 3Com products. This  
Service service is available through analog modem or digital modem (ISDN) 24 hours a  
day, 7 days a week.  
Access by Analog Modem  
To reach the service by modem, set your modem to 8 data bits, no parity,  
and 1 stop bit. Call the telephone number nearest you:  
Country  
Australia  
Brazil  
Data Rate  
Telephone Number  
Country  
Japan  
Data Rate  
Telephone Number  
Up to 14,400 bps 61 2 9955 2073  
Up to 28,800 bps 55 11 5181 9666  
Up to 14,400 bps 33 1 6986 6954  
Up to 28,800 bps 4989 62732 188  
Up to 14,400 bps 852 2537 5601  
Up to 14,400 bps 39 2 27300680  
Up to 14,400 bps 81 3 5977 7977  
Up to 28,800 bps 52 5 520 7835  
Up to 14,400 bps 86 10 684 92351  
Up to 14,400 bps 886 2 377 5840  
Up to 28,800 bps 44 1442 438278  
Up to 53,333 bps 1 847 262 6000  
Mexico  
France  
P.R. of China  
Taiwan, R.O.C.  
U.K.  
Germany  
Hong Kong  
Italy  
U.S.A.  
Access by Digital Modem  
ISDN users can dial in to the 3Com BBS using a digital modem for fast access up to  
64 Kbps. To access the 3Com BBS using ISDN, call the following number:  
1 847 262 6000  
3Com Facts Automated The 3Com Facts automated fax service provides technical articles, diagrams, and  
Fax Service troubleshooting instructions on 3Com products 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.  
Call 3Com Facts using your Touch-Tone telephone:  
1 408 727 7021  
Support from Your  
Network Supplier  
If you require additional assistance, contact your network supplier. Many suppliers  
are authorized 3Com service partners who are qualified to provide a variety of  
services, including network planning, installation, hardware maintenance,  
application training, and support services.  
When you contact your network supplier for assistance, have the following  
information ready:  
■
■
■
■
Product model name, part number, and serial number  
A list of system hardware and software, including revision levels  
Diagnostic error messages  
Details about recent configuration changes, if applicable  
If you are unable to contact your network supplier, see the following section on  
how to contact 3Com.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Support from 3Com A-3  
Support from 3Com  
If you are unable to obtain assistance from the 3Com online technical resources or  
from your network supplier, 3Com offers technical telephone support services. To  
find out more about your support options, please the 3Com technical telephone  
support phone number at the location nearest you.  
When you contact 3Com for assistance, have the following information ready:  
■
■
■
■
Product model name, part number, and serial number  
A list of system hardware and software, including revision levels  
Diagnostic error messages  
Details about recent configuration changes, if applicable  
Here is a list of worldwide technical telephone support numbers:  
Country  
Telephone Number  
Country  
Telephone Number  
Asia Pacific Rim  
Australia  
Hong Kong  
India  
Indonesia  
Japan  
Malaysia  
New Zealand  
Pakistan  
Philippines  
1 800 678 515  
800 933 486  
P.R. of China  
10800 61 00137 or  
021 6350 1590  
800 6161 463  
+61 2 9937 5085  
001 800 61 009  
0031 61 6439  
1800 801 777  
0800 446 398  
+61 2 9937 5085  
1235 61 266 2602  
Singapore  
S. Korea  
From anywhere in S. Korea:  
From Seoul:  
Taiwan, R.O.C.  
00798 611 2230  
(0)2 3455 6455  
0080 611 261  
Thailand  
001 800 611 2000  
Europe  
From anywhere in Europe, call: +31 (0)30 6029900 phone  
+31 (0)30 6029999 fax  
Europe, South Africa, and Middle East  
From the following countries, you may use the toll-free numbers:  
Austria  
Belgium  
Denmark  
Finland  
France  
Germany  
Hungary  
Ireland  
Israel  
0800 297468  
0800 71429  
800 17309  
0800 113153  
0800 917959  
0800 1821502  
00800 12813  
1800 553117  
1800 9453794  
1678 79489  
Netherlands  
Norway  
Poland  
Portugal  
South Africa  
Spain  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
U.K.  
0800 0227788  
800 11376  
00800 3111206  
0800 831416  
0800 995014  
900 983125  
020 795482  
0800 55 3072  
0800 966197  
Italy  
Latin America  
Argentina  
Brazil  
Chile  
Colombia  
AT&T +800 666 5065  
0800 13 3266  
1230 020 0645  
98012 2127  
Mexico  
Peru  
Puerto Rico  
Venezuela  
01 800 CARE (01 800 2273)  
AT&T +800 666 5065  
800 666 5065  
AT&T +800 666 5065  
North America  
1 800 NET 3Com  
(1 800 638 3266)  
Enterprise Customers:  
1 800 876-3266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A-4  
APPENDIX A: TECHNICAL SUPPORT  
Returning Products  
for Repair  
Before you send a product directly to 3Com for repair, you must first obtain an  
authorization number. Products sent to 3Com without authorization numbers will  
be returned to the sender unopened, at the sender’s expense.  
To obtain an authorization number, call or fax:  
Country  
Telephone Number  
+65 543 6500  
Fax Number  
Asia, Pacific Rim  
+65 543 6348  
+31 30 6029999  
Europe, South Africa, and  
Middle East  
+31 30 6029900  
Latin America  
1 408 326 2927  
1 408 326 3355  
From the following countries, you may call the toll-free numbers; select option 2 and then  
option 2:  
Austria  
0800 297468  
0800 71429  
800 17309  
Belgium  
Denmark  
Finland  
France  
Germany  
Hungary  
Ireland  
0800 113153  
0800 917959  
0800 1821502  
00800 12813  
1800 553117  
1800 9453794  
1678 79489  
0800 0227788  
800 11376  
00800 3111206  
0800 831416  
0800 995014  
900 983125  
020 795482  
0800 55 3072  
0800 966197  
Israel  
Italy  
Netherlands  
Norway  
Poland  
Portugal  
South Africa  
Spain  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
U.K.  
U.S.A. and Canada  
1 800 NET 3Com  
(1 800 638 3266)  
1 408 326 7120  
(not toll-free)  
Enterprise Customers:  
1 800 876 3266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3Com Corporation LIMITED WARRANTY  
CoreBuilder® 5000 Distributed Management Module  
HARDWARE  
3Com warrants to the end user (“Customer”) that this hardware product will be free from defects in workmanship and  
materials, under normal use and service, for one (1) year from the date of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller.  
3Com’s sole obligation under this express warranty shall be, at 3Com’s option and expense, to repair the defective product or  
part, deliver to Customer an equivalent product or part to replace the defective item, or if neither of the two foregoing options  
is reasonably available, 3Com may, in its sole discretion, refund to Customer the purchase price paid for the defective product.  
All products that are replaced will become the property of 3Com. Replacement products may be new or reconditioned. 3Com  
warrants any replaced or repaired product or part for ninety (90) days from shipment, or the remainder of the initial warranty  
period, whichever is longer.  
SOFTWARE  
3Com warrants to Customer that each software program licensed from it will perform in substantial conformance to its  
program specifications, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller. 3Com  
warrants the media containing software against failure during the warranty period. No updates are provided. 3Com's sole  
obligation under this express warranty shall be, at 3Com's option and expense, to refund the purchase price paid by Customer  
for any defective software product, or to replace any defective media with software which substantially conforms to applicable  
3Com published specifications. Customer assumes responsibility for the selection of the appropriate applications program and  
associated reference materials. 3Com makes no warranty or representation that its software products will meet Customer’s  
requirements or work in combination with any hardware or applications software products provided by third parties, that the  
operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects in the software products will be  
corrected. For any third-party products listed in the 3Com software product documentation or specifications as being  
compatible, 3Com will make reasonable efforts to provide compatibility, except where the non-compatibility is caused by a  
“bug” or defect in the third party's product or from use of the software product not in accordance with 3Com’s published  
specifications or user manual.  
THIS 3COM PRODUCT MAY INCLUDE OR BE BUNDLED WITH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE, THE USE OF WHICH IS GOVERNED BY  
A SEPARATE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT. THIS 3COM WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY TO SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE.  
FOR THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY, PLEASE REFER TO THE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT GOVERNING THE USE OF SUCH  
SOFTWARE.  
YEAR 2000 WARRANTY  
See the 3Com Year 2000 Web site at http://www.3com.com/products/yr2000.html  
OBTAINING WARRANTY  
SERVICE  
Customer must contact a 3Com Corporate Service Center or an Authorized 3Com Service Center within the applicable  
warranty period to obtain warranty service authorization. Dated proof of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller may be  
required. Products returned to 3Com's Corporate Service Center must be pre-authorized by 3Com with a Return Material  
Authorization (RMA) number or User Service Order (USO) number marked on the outside of the package, and sent prepaid and  
packaged appropriately for safe shipment, and it is recommended that they be insured or sent by a method that provides for  
tracking of the package. Responsibility for loss or damage does not transfer to 3Com until the returned item is received by  
3Com. The repaired or replaced item will be shipped to Customer, at 3Com's expense, not later than thirty (30) days after  
3Com receives the defective product.  
3Com shall not be responsible for any software, firmware, information, or memory data of Customer contained in, stored on,  
or integrated with any products returned to 3Com for repair, whether under warranty or not.  
Dead- or Defective-on-Arrival  
. In the event a product completely fails to function or exhibits a defect in materials or  
workmanship within the first forty-eight (48) hours of installation but no later than thirty (30) days after the date of purchase,  
and this is verified by 3Com, it will be considered dead- or defective-on-arrival (DOA) and a replacement shall be provided by  
advance replacement. The replacement product will normally be shipped not later than three (3) business days after 3Com’s  
verification of the DOA product, but may be delayed due to export or import procedures. The shipment of advance  
replacement products is subject to local legal requirements and may not be available in all locations. When an advance  
replacement is provided and Customer fails to return the original product to 3Com within fifteen (15) days after shipment of  
the replacement, 3Com will charge Customer for the replacement product, at list price.  
INCLUDED SERVICES:  
Telephone Support,  
with coverage for basic troubleshooting only, will be provided for ninety (90) days from the date of  
purchase, on a commercially reasonable efforts basis. Please refer to the Technical Support appendix in the Getting Started  
Guide for telephone numbers.  
3Com’s Web and Bulletin Board Services  
provide 3Knowledgebase, bug tracking, documentation, release notes, and some  
software maintenance releases at no charge.  
WARRANTIES EXCLUSIVE  
IF A 3COM PRODUCT DOES NOT OPERATE AS WARRANTED ABOVE, CUSTOMER'S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THAT  
WARRANTY SHALL BE REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID, AT 3COM'S OPTION. TO THE FULL  
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER  
WARRANTIES, TERMS, OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW, STATUTORY OR  
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WARRANTIES, TERMS, OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT, ALL OF WHICH ARE  
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. 3COM NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER  
LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS.  
3COM SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED  
DEFECT OR MALFUNCTION IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER'S OR ANY THIRD PERSON'S  
MISUSE, NEGLECT, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO OPEN, REPAIR OR MODIFY THE  
PRODUCT, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE, LIGHTNING, POWER  
CUTS OR OUTAGES, OTHER HAZARDS, OR ACTS OF GOD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
TO THE FULL EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, 3COM ALSO EXCLUDES FOR ITSELF AND ITS SUPPLIERS ANY LIABILITY, WHETHER  
BASED IN CONTRACT OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), FOR INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR  
PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR FOR LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF INFORMATION OR  
DATA, OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE,  
USE, PERFORMANCE, FAILURE, OR INTERRUPTION OF ITS PRODUCTS, EVEN IF 3COM OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND LIMITS ITS LIABILITY TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND OF THE  
PURCHASE PRICE PAID, AT 3COM'S OPTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES WILL NOT BE AFFECTED IF ANY  
REMEDY PROVIDED HEREIN SHALL FAIL OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
DISCLAIMER  
Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or the limitation of incidental  
or consequential damages for certain products supplied to consumers, or the limitation of liability for personal injury, so the  
above limitations and exclusions may be limited in their application to you. When the implied warranties are not allowed to be  
excluded in their entirety, they will be limited to the duration of the applicable written warranty. This warranty gives you  
specific legal rights which may vary depending on local law.  
GOVERNING LAW  
This Limited Warranty shall be governed by the laws of the State of California, U.S.A., excluding its conflicts of laws principles  
and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.  
3Com Corporation  
5400 Bayfront Plaza  
P.O. Box 58145  
Santa Clara, CA 95052-8145  
(408) 326-5000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

3M Home Theater System S55 User Manual
Accell Bicycle Accessories Cardio Comfort Pacer User Manual
ACTiSYS Network Card IR2000UL User Manual
AKG Acoustics Microphone CK 31 User Manual
Alliance Laundry Systems Washer NX18BVPA7 User Manual
American Dryer Corp Clothes Dryer ADG 410 User Manual
ATI Technologies Computer Hardware X1550 SERIES User Manual
Axis Communications Stereo Receiver P7210 User Manual
Behringer DJ Equipment LX1B User Manual
Behringer Musical Instrument 02222FX User Manual